E008 987 300

Faculty of Social Sciences

Volume 15 1IlW'. '"' 'f~::'

Physical Planning & Stores Building SER Physics Building P Radio 2NUR FM V The University a/Newcastle Campus Layout Richardson Wing RW Security GH B Science Building SB SQJlpture Workshop Abor-lglnal Education Centre - Wollotuka AE Lecture Theatre :B B1 SW Academic Office Block ACB Lecture Theatre :Basden Social Sciences Building SIR BA Special Education Centre Advanced Technology Centre ATC Lecture Theatre :E E SE Sports Centre - Auchmuty Animal House AN Ubrary - Auchmuty L se Sports Gymnasium - Hunter An:hItoc1Ure A Ubrary - Huxley Ul GY Sports Pavilion Architecture Drawing Studios ADS Maintenance Worksllop SP MW Sraff House Art AT Mathematics Building SH V Temporary Office Buildings AYIaIion AV McMullin Building TB MC TUNRA Behavioural Sciences Building W Medical Sciences Building AV MS TUNRA Annexe Biological Sciences B TA University Union - Hunter Bowman BuUdlng BB UH University Union - Shortland esc Building (Red Square) esc US Visual ArtslMedla Studies CALT- CALT VA Wetlands Pavilion (Centr. for Advanced learning & Teaching) WP Ceramics CE Chancellety (Central Administration) CH Chemistry BuUding C t Child Care Centre - Klntalba CCK Child Care Centre - Work Based CCB Child car. Centr. - Wonnaybe CCW Commonwealth Bank CB Computing and Information Sciences CT Design Building D Drama Studios DS Drama Theatre DT Edwards Hall EH Engineering Administration EA Engineering Bulk Solids EG Engineering Chemical & Materials EB Engineering Civil & Surveying ED Engineering Classrooms EF Engineering Electrical & Computer EE Engineering Mechanical EC Engineering Science (0 W George) ES Evan House EV General Purpose Building GP Geology Building G Graduate Studios GS Great Hall GH Griffith Duncan Theatre H Hunter Building H Hunter Technology Centre HTC International House I

00 ~ ~~ '" O. (j ~ ~ C ~- ;;4 '"~ (j ~- 1-'. 0 ('D I-+) oS;, =:s (j ~ ~ ('D 2 "" -~ FACULTY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE New South Wale., Auatralla Location Address _ University Drive, Callaghan Postal Address _ lbe University of Newcastle NSW 2308 section one Telephone _ (049) 21.5000 ~F~ac~u~lt~y~S~ta~ff~ ______~~ TeleK _ AA28194 - Ubrary _ AA2861B - Bursar section two _ AA28784 - TUNRA (The University of Newcastle _F~a~cu~l~tY~ln~f~o~rm~a~tio~n ______~~ Research Associates Limited) Facsimile _ (049) 21.6922 Infonnation for new students 4 Hours oJBusiness _ Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9amto5pm Honours and Postgraduate Study 5 Credit Policy 5 Review of Academic Progress 5

The Umvenlty of Newcut1e Calendar COQu.ta of the followlnt volume.: SpecIal Conslderatton 5 Volume 1 _ Legislation Professional Recognition 6 Volume 2 University Bodies and Staff Students wtth SpecIal Needs 6 Volume 3 -Faculty of Architecture Handbook Advtce and Support 6 Volume 4 -Faculty of Art. Design and CommWlication Handbook section three VolumeS -Faculty of Arts Handbook _D~e~g~re~e~R~u~le~s______~ .... Volume 6 -Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook Volume 7 -Faculty of Education Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of Social Science 11 VolumeS -Faculty of Engineering Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of SoctaI ScIence (Justtce Studies) Volume 9 -_ Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook 11 Volume 10 _ Faculty of Law Handbook Schedule - Associate DIploma Police Studies 12 Volume 11 _ Faculty of Medicine Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of Social Science (Recreation & Tourism) 12 Volume 12 _ Faculty of Music Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of Social ScIence (Welfare Studies) 12 Volume 13 _ Faculty of Nursing Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of Social Work 13 Volume 14 _ Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook Schedule - Bachelor of SoctaI Work (Honours) 13 Volume 15 _ Faculty of Social Science Handbook Schedule - Master of Social Science 14 Also available are the Undergraduate Guides Schedule - Master of Social Work 14 This Volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in section/our courses conducted by the Faculty of Social Science. © The University of Newcastle 1993 Course Outlines/Schedule of Subjects ISSN 1037 - 7905 _U_n_d_e....:rg~r_ad_u_a_t_e_a_n_d_P_o_s~tg~r_a_d_u_at_e..!..) ___.. The tnfonnaUon in this Handbook is correct as at 24 September 1993. Recommended Price _ Five dollars and fifty cents plus postage. Bachelor of Social Science 16 Bachelor of Social Science ~ustice Studies} 27 Designed by _ Marte-T Wisniowskl. Medical CommWlicaUon Unit Bachelor of Social Science (Recreation and Tourism) 28 Typeset by _ Jan Spurr. Office of the University Secretary Bachelor of SocIal ScIence (Welfare StudIes) 29 Printed by _ The Pot Still :ress pty Ltd. Artarmon. Sydney Loans xl Bachelor of social Work 30 Refund of Charges xl Bachelor of Social Science/Bachelor of Social Work - combined degree program 35 campus Traffic and Parktng xl Bachelor of Social Science (Honours) 36 Mtscellaneous SeIVices Master of Soctal Science 39 Banking xli Master of Social Work 41 cashier xli Chaplaincy Service xii section five Community Programs xli Subject Descriptions Convocation xli .. Co-op Bookshop xii Lost Property xii Guide to Subject Entries 42 Noticeboards xli Economics 43 Post Office xli Geography 66 Public Transport xli History 71 Student Insurance Cover xltI Justice Studies 86 University Computing Services xiii Law 90 University Libraries xlv Lingulstlcs 91 Philosophy 95 Psychology 96 Recreation and Tourism 102 Social Work 113 Sociology and Anthropology 117 Statistics 138 Welfare Studtes142 section six General Information

Principal Dates 1994 Advice and Information U Enrolment and Re-enrolment ttl Leave of Absence v Attendance at Classes v General Conduct v Examinations v Statements of Academic Record vttt Unsatisfactory Progress - Rules VIii Charges x Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) x Dean's Foreword

Everyone Is concerned about the ways In which our Uves. and the lives of those around us. are affected by what ts going on in sociely generally. For many of us. this concern becomes focussed when we experience a change in our own l1festyles. or when we are confronted by broadly based changes such as the current high and sustained rates of unemployment. and the effects they have on us and others. We all seek explanations for such events or changes. The explanations generally available are an amalgam of the different ideas and experiences that we have drawn from our famUy. schooling. and the social and cultural or religious groups to which we belong. These explanations are often Inconsistent and may be veIY limited in their application. Social Science also provides a set of explanations or theories for what happens in soclely. particularly what brings about change and what might flow from it. Social Science Is especially concerned with theories about life cycle. gender. class, race, work. social Justlce and social organisation. Social Science theories differ from popular explanations tn that they are the result of systematic thinking. observation and reflection. because Social Science adopts a critical stance when It deals with any phenomena. and because Social Science makes its findings available to all for further scrutiny and critique through publication. There is no single theoIY or paradigm in Social Science. no single or even major fonn of research. Social Science methods range from the mathematical and highlyempirlcaJ, which deal with large population groups and attempt to explain and even to predict change. through to qualitative studies dealing with notions of meaning. values and interpretations oflncUvtdual experience. Fields of study include many aspects of Australlan sociely. other societies in the developed/ tndustrialtsed world and traditional societies. particularly those In Asia and the Pacific region as well as particular organisations. institutions and groups within these societies. The challenge of social science. as with natural science. Is not just to have knowledge. but to develop understanding and so to be abl-to fnfonn debate and action. Social Science theoIY and research contrtbute _.J e lUI" I- -md to moral . to po itica L section one Faculty Staff

debate in society rather than dictate precise answers For you the debates about the appllcatlon of Social PRINCIPAL OFFICERS to social problems. Science in policy formulation. administration and Vlsltor His Excellency. The Governor of New South Wales direct practice will be of crttlcallmportance. In the Faculty of SocIal ScIence you wllliearn about Chancellor The Honourable Justice E.A. Evatt. AO. LLB. HonLLD(Syd), the major branches of social theory and how they All students In the Faculty should find theIr time LLM(Harv). HonLLD(Macq). HonDUnlv with us challenging, exciting and rewarding. We have changed over the last century; the great social Deputy Chancellor P.I.A. Hendry. AD. MB BS(Syd). DCP(Lond). HonMD. welcome you and we look forward to working with issues and problems that have been the subject of FRCPA. FCAP. FAACB research and theory; the various soctal movements you. Professor RJ. Morlley. BA(Syd). MA(Monash), Dr3·cycle. and how they have been Informed by SocIal ScIence. Vice-Chancellor You will also discover that Social Science often oesUSlras). FAHA(Phllos) Brtan Engllsh meets opposition just as natural science does Deputy Vice-Chancellor Professor M.P. Carter. BA(Nott). PhD(Edln) DEAN particularly when it touches closely upon human Pro Vice-Chancellor IIDd DeaD of Students Professor K.R Dutton. MA(Syd). beings. their relationshIps and major institutions In DU(Paris). FACE. Officer des Palmes academlques socIety such as the family or rellglon. For example. Pro Vice-Chancellor (Development) L.R Eastcott. BA(NSW). MEd(Syd). the opposition to Darwinism which arose lastcentury PhD(Alta). DlpEd and still continues. and developments in genetics and reproductive technology which have met Pro Vice-Chancellor (Reoearch) Professor RJ. MacDonald. BSe. PhD(NSW). opposition from many quarters in more recent times. FAiP As a student in Social Science you will also learn Deputy President of the Academic Senate Professor F.L. Clarke. BEc. about some of the ways in which Social Science PhD(Syd). FCPA. ACIS. ACIM Informs whole areas of Social Policy. Publtc Admlnlstratlon. Welfare provlslon. aspects ofllfestyle FACULTY OF SOCIAL SCIENCE STAFF including Recreation and leisure planning. organisation and practice. and professions such as The Faculty of Social Science comprises the Departments of Social Welfare. Social Work. In the process you will engage in the SocIal Work. SocIology and Anthropology and the Dlvlsion of LeIsure Studles. debates about the extent to which Social Science Dean Professor B.A. EngUsh. BSW. PhD(NSW). MAASW knowledge and skills are used to regulate and to Assistant Registrar control groups ofpeople as well as to seIVe them. and to liberate them. S.M. Eade. BA. DlpEd(fAFE) Some of you wlll complete degrees In the Faculty which provide specific preparation for work In the professions of Social Work. Social and Community Welfare Practice. Recreation. Leisure and Tourism. Faculty of Section 0 .... Faculty Slall Faculty of s.cUOnO.... Faculty Staff Social Science Social SCience

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WELFARE P. Khoury. BA(NSW) Senior Lectured T. Leahy. BA(Syd). MA(Carleton) B.A. Morris. BA(Macq). PhD(Syd) P. Duncan. BA. PhD. Grad Dip. Human Res. Management(CSU Mitchell). MAIWCW(Head of Department) S.T. Rozarto. BA(Dhaka). MA. PhD(NSW) G.H. Morgan. BA. PGCertEd(York). MEd(NE). MAlndReI(Warw). MAIWCW S.A. Tomsen. BA. PhD(Macq) Lecturers J. Wafer. DlpEd(NCAE). BA. PhD. MAOndlana). PhDOndlana) M. Ayre. BA. DlpEd Department Office Staff AR Beveridge. MAStud. BSocSc(Curtln). AssDlpSocWelfare L. Mcamara Rl. Brown. BA MA(W'gong). BD(MCD) A. Holley C. Dole. AssDlpSocWel(Mac.lns.). BA(WelStd)(UWS) G.J. Heys. BSW(NSW). MUS(Macq). MAASW DMSlON OF LEISURE SroDIES A.J. McCulloch. BSocStud. MA(Syd). BA. PostGradDipSocSc(NE). MAlWCW SeDlor Lecturel'8 B. Ross. RGN. BSocScl(WeIStds) P.R Brown. B.Sc(SocSc) CertEd. MSc(Loughborough)(Head of Division) Department Office Staff H. Richins. BScAdmln(Oregon). MScBusAdmln(Oregon) K. Longworth B. Wener. BARecAdmln(Alberta. MAReglonal Plannlng(Waterloo), PhD(Vlctorla) J. Smith Lecturers DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK M. Labone. BA. GradDlp. MA(UTS) Profeuor B.A English. BSW. PhD(NSW). MAASW S.T. Muloln. BA(Mt.AllIson). MA(Alta) Senior Lecturer J.S. Gaha. BSocStud. MSocStud(Syd). MAASW (Head of Department) G. Young. BA(SocSc). PGDlpTourlsm(Strath). MSc(Strathclyde) Lecturers Department Office Staff Y. Darlington. BA. BSWK(Qld). GradDlpLlb(Rlverlna). MAASW P. Falanga. BA J.L. Gibbons. BSW(NSW). MAASW L. Flynn. BSW. MSW(NSW). MAASW D. Plath. BA. BSW(Syd). MSW(NSW) A. Rowlands. BSW(NSW). GradDipSocAdmln. MAASW Department Office Staff D. KopUck. BSocScl

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOWGY AND ANTHROPOWGY Professors L.J. Bryson. BA. DlpSocStud. DlpEd(Melb). PhD(Monash) M.P. Carter. BA(Nott). PhD(Edln) (Personal Chair) A8aoclate Profeaaors G.B. Samuel. MA(OxO. PhD(Camb). DlpCompSc (Head of Department) K.M. Robinson. BA(Syd). PhD(ANU) SeDlor Lecturel'8 L.H. Connor. BA. PhD(Syd) E.E. Jordan. BA(Q'ld). DlpEd(NCAE). PhD Lecturers I. Allegrlttl. BA. MA(Macq) K.L. Carrington. BAdmln(Griffith). PhD(Macq) R Donovan. BA(Durh). PhD(Warw) J. Gow. BA(Grlffith), MA(NSW). PhD(Griffith) Faculty of Section Two Faculty Social Science Information

Bonour. and Po.t-....duate Study Unspecified credit can be granted for subjects Graduates completing undergraduate programs that are not substantially the same as the within the Faculty may with the approval of the subjects approved for the course to which the Dean of the Faculty on the recommendation of the student Is seeking admission. Thus unspecified Head of Department, undertake an Honours credit can only be gran ted for elective Program. The Bachelor of Social Work contains a components of an approved course. provision for honours within the four year program. Credit granted for one degree program in the The Faculty also offers a Master of Social Science by Faculty may not be recognised as such on coursework and a Master of Social Work by enrolment In another degree. Coursework. A Master of Social Science by research 2. Cand1dates granted credit in recognltton of section two is also available. PhD programs are currently work at another institutton must nonnally available within the Departments of SoCiology and complete at least 35 percent of the course in Faculty Anthropology and Social Work. this University. Chooalng Your Subject. 3. A candidate seeking credit must prOvide the Information Students should study carefully the requirements Faculty Board with details of the courses for the degree of their choice particularly with regard completed for which credit Is sought. Where to compulsory subjects, limitation on the subjects these are from another Institution these details Introduction to Faculty Handbook for New Student. which can bechosen and prerequlslteandcorequlstte should include the name ofthe institution. the The Faculty offers a wide range of courses In Social Science and for the Social reqUirements. Limits are also set on the number of name and content of the courses. the marks. Science based professions at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels. Staff subjects a student is pennltted to take In anyone grades or cred1t points awarded. the structure of the Faculty welcome students and work with them to develop the knowledge semester. of the qualification previously studied (degree. and skills that will prepare the student for a career tn social science or tn one The professional degree programs also incorporate a diploma. certificate. etc) and such other of the professions associated with social science. field education component which Is specific to each Infonnatton as the Faculty Board may require. This handbook contains general tnfonnation for all students and details about degree. 4. Credit will be granted by the Faculty Board on our courses and the staffwho teach them. The handbook is a guide for students Students requiring specific advice on the selection the recommendatton of the Head of the relevant and you should famtItarise yourself with its contents. If you have any queries or content of subjects In a course should seek help department(s), or equtvalent(s),tnconsultatton you are welcome to discuss them with the Head of Department concerned orwtth from members of the Department responsible for the with the Dean or the Faculty Secretary. the Faculty Secretary. particular course or subject. 5. All applications for credit will be made to the Undergraduate Degree. All enquiries regarding enrolment. variation to Faculty Secretary. Faculty of Social Science. The Faculty offers four undergraduate degree programs. one a general degree tn program or general administrative matters should Review of Academic Progre.. Social Science. the others spectaltst professional degrees. These degrees are: be directed to the Faculty Secretary. Acting under the Rules Governing Unsattsfactory Credit In Undergraduate Degree. In tbe Faculty 1. Bachelor of Social Science - BSocSc progress. the Faculty Board will review the academic progress of all students who have failed more than 2. Bachelor of Social Science (Recreation and Tourism) - BSocSc(RecTour) 1. The Faculty Board may grantcreditin specified and unspeCified semester subjects to a 50% of their total enrolment expressed In credit 3. Bachelor of Social Science (Welfare Studies) - BSocSc(WeISt) candidate. on such conditions as it may points at the end of the second and subsequent 4. Bachelor of Social Work - BSW detennlne. In recognttton of work completed In years of attendance in the Faculty. Faculty Board will also review the progress of any student enrolled It Is also possible to do a combined degree In Arts and Social Work or Social this University or another Institution. The in the Bachelor of Social Science (Justice Studies). Science and Social Work. Faculty·s policy on speCified and unspecified credit is as follows: Bachelor ofSocial Science (Recreation andTourlsm). The details of these degrees and the combined degree program appear In Bachelor of Social Science (Welfare Studies) and Specified credit is granted onlywhen the subjects subsequent sections of the Handbook. Where relevant you will find Infonnation Bachelor Social Work who have failed a compulsory for which credit Is sought are substantially the there on the professional standing of the degree. subject twice. same as the subjects approved for the course to Entry Requlrements which the student Is seeking admission. Special Consideration To be considered for undergraduate entry to the Faculty of Social Science, Specified credit will not be granted for a subject It Is recognised that during the course of their students must satisfy the entry requirements of the University. For any special when the result obtained was a conceded pass studies. students may suffer from tllness or other entry requirements and procedures, see the rules for each degree. Prospective or a tennlnating pass or there Is any other serious circumstances beyond their control which undergraduate and postgraduate students should consult the Faculty Secretary factor which would preclude the subject being affect their preparation for or performance at an for further Information. recognised for prerequisite or corequlslte examination. University Rules provide for students purposes. who believe that their perfonnance In a subject has Faculty of SecUonTwo Faculty Flculty of SecUonTwo Foculty Social Science Inform.Uon Social Science Inform.Uon

been adversely affected by such circumstances to Student. with Special Needo University Counselltng Service located In the Auchmuty Llbrarycourtyard where male and female apply for Special Consideration. Appl1cations for Students with dtsabUities may wish to consult the counsellors are available. Special Consideration must be made on the Faculty's Adviser for Students with Special Needs, prescrlbedform. Formsareavailablefrom the Student Ms S. Muloin of the Division of Leisure Studies, Purchuing Ten Boob Division and the Facully of Social Science Office. Behavioural Sciences BuUdlng. Telephone 21.6787 The subject descrtptions found In Setion Five of this As decisions can only be made on the basis of the for an appolnlment. Handbook refer to "texts", "references" and Infonnation presented by the student, all available Student Participation In Unlveralty Affair. "recommended reading". Students are advised that evidence should accompany each application. The only the purchase of texts Is essential. The purchase ProviSion Is made for students to be elected as medical certificate given on the prescribed fonn of books 11sted as references and for recommended members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as must be completed where an application Is made on reading is not essential and may result tn well as to other University bodies. Elections of medical grounds unless a more extensive medical unnecessary expense. student members usually take place early In the first report is presented which includes the information semester and students should watch Departmental requtred on the fonn. Where a request for Spectal notice boards for details of elections of student Consideration is made on the grounds of misadventure, all available supporting evidence members. should be attached to the application. In cases, Advice ODd Support where no written evidence is available, the Particularly when entertng University for the first submission of a statutory declaration wtll be time, students may experience some difficulty In necessruy. Statutory declaration forms are available adjusting to academic life. Those experlenclng from most newsagents. difficulties are encouraged to discuss their concerns All Applications for Special Consideration will be with approprtate members of the Faculty. referred to the Dean or delegate (usually the Assistant Students seekinggutdance on enrolment procedures, Dean) who will make a recommendation to the course requirements and areas of Interest should Head(s) of Department in which the student is consult the Faculty Secretary. undertaking studies. A copy of the Applicatton for Students seeking advice relating to the content of a Special Consideration and the Dean or delegate's particular subject group or course. eg history or recommendation will be forwarded to the relevant leisure studies. should first approach the secretary Head(s) of Department. of the relevant department. Students who miss an examination because of Students requlrlng specific information on the tllness or other serious circumstance beyond their selection or content of subjects should seek advice control and who make an Application for Special from the co-ordinator of the relevant subject. Consideration, must check with the Department(s) that offered the relevant subJect(s) to ascertain the Students may at times find It helpful to dlscuss their Department's reqUirements. concerns with a student member of the Faculty Boardoraspeclfic Deparlmental Board, particularly Students are advised to make themselves aware of if they are uncertain of the proper procedures to be the Universtty's Rules on SpeCial Consideration and followed in a particular matter or tftheyfeel reluctant Examinations which are contained In the centre to make a personal approach to a member of staff pages of the Faculty Handbook. (names of student members available from Faculty Profeaalonal Recognition office). Graduates of the University of Newcastle who hold For Information. skills training and advice on the the Bachelor of Social Science (Welfare Studies) use of library resources, consult your lecturer or degree are eligtble for membership of the Australian tutor about arranging Instruction by library stafT. Institute of Welfare and Community Workers. Individual assistance Is provided at the Reference Graduates of the University of Newcastle who hold Desk In both IIbrartes. The Learning Support Unit, the Bachelor of Social Work degree are eligible for located on the second level of the cr Bulldlng offers membershp of the Australian Association of Social short courses and Individual assistance with study Workers. skills and learning difficulties. For personal counselling It Is suggested that students consult the Faculty of Section Three Degree Rul •• Social Science

substantially equivalent to one which 3. An appltcant for admission to candidature for that candidate has prevtously counted an award shall satisfY the requirements of the towards a degree or diploma. University governing admission to and (3) A candidate for an award shalt not enrol In enrolment In a course and any other additional a course or part of a course for another requirements as may be prescribed in the award in this University unless consent schedule for that award. has first been oblalned from the Dean and. Subject if another Faculty Is responsIble for the course leading to that other award. the 4. (1) For the purposes of a course. a subject may Dean ofthat Faculty. provtded that astudent be c1asstfled at a level determined by the may enrol In a combined course approved section three Faculty Board. by the Academic Senate leading to two (2) Each subject shall be allotted a credit poInt awards. value by the Academic Senate after Degree Pre-requisites and Co-requisites considering the advice of the Faculty Board Rules of the Faculty in which the department Is 6. (I) The Faculty Board on the recommendation located. ofthe Head ofthe Department mayprescrtbe pre-requisites and/or co-requisites for any (3) The Academic Senate. after considering a subject offered by that Department. Rule. Governing Academic Awaru request from a Faculty Board. may determine that a subject be not offered (2) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean AppUcation of Rules during a particular academic year. granted after considering any recommendation made by the Head of the 1. These Rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the University other (4) The Faculty Board shall approve the Department. no candidate may enrol In a than the degrees of Doctor and Master. subjects for the award. Any change In the subject unless that candidate has passed interpretation list of approved subjects which will have any subjects prescribed as its pre-requisites effect In the followingyear shall be approved 2. (1) In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise indicates at any grade which may be speCified and by a date determined by the Academic or requires: has already passed or concurrently enrols Senate. "award" means the degree, diploma (including graduate diploma and In or Is already enrolled In any subjects associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate Is (5) Where there Is any change In the list of prescribed as Its co-requisites. approved subjects. the Faculty Board shall enrolled; (3) Except with the permission of the Dean. a make all reasonable provision to permit "course" means the total requirements of the program of study candidate wUI not have satisfied a pre­ students already enrolled In the course to requisite If the pre-requisite subject has approved by the Academic Senate to qualtfY a candidate for the award progress normally. as set out tn the schedule; not been completed In the preceding eight Enrohnent "Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty; calendar years. 5. (1) A candidate may not enrol In any year in a "department" means the department offering a particular subject and (4) A candIdate atlalnlng a Tennlnatlng Pass combination of subjects which Is In a subject shall be deemed not to have includes any other body so doing; incompatible with the reqUirements of the passed that subject for pre-requisite "Faculty" means the Faculty responsible for the course; timetable for that year. purposes. "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty; (2) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean and Credit subject to any contrary prOvision In the "schedule" means the schedule to these Rules relevant to the award 7. (I) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a schedule: Itsted under the name of the Faculty; candidate in specified and unspecified ".ubJect" means any part of a course for which a result may be (a) a candidate may not enrol In subjects subjects. on such conditions as It may recorded. totalling more than theequlvalentof40 detennine. in recognition ofwork completed credit potnts in any semester; (2) A reference In these Rules to a Head of Department shall be read not In the University or another Institution only as a reference to the person appointed to that office but also. where (b) a candidate shall not enrol In a subject approved by the Faculty Board for this a subject Is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved which does not count towards the purpose or addlttonally as may be provtded by the Academic Senate to undertake the responslbiltties of a Head of award; and In the schedule. Department for the purpose of these Rules. (c) a candidate shall not be pennltted to (2) Except as may be otherwise provtded In the enrol in any subject which Is schedule. a candidate shall not be given Degree Rul•• Faculty of Section Thr.. Faculty of Section Thr.. Degree Rul •• Soclll Science Social Scl.nce

credit for more than sixty-five percent of (lU In the case of a full year subject. another Bachelor degree by completing a (2) Where a candidates previous studies have the total number of credit points required the last day of second semester; combtned degree program approved by the been counted towards an award. credit will to complete the course. and/or Academic Senate on the adViceofthe Faculty be limited to 110 credit points. Subject Requirements (IIU subject to any provision within the Boardand. where the other Bachelordegree Enrolment Is offered In another Faculty. the Facul!)' B. (1) The subjects which may be completed In schedules; and Board of that Faculty. 3. Except with the permission of the Dean. a the course for the Award shall be those (h) a candidate shall not be permitted to candidate shall not enrol In subjects totalling (2) Admission to a combined degree program approved by the Faculty Board and withdraw from a subject on more than more than 50 credit points per semester. published annually as the Approved two occasions. shall be restricted to candidates who have achieved a standard ofperfonnance deemed Time Requirement. Subjects section of the schedule. AbseDce satisfactory for the purposes of admission 4. (1) Except with the permission of the Facul!)' (2) A candidate enrolled tn a subject shall 10. (1) Subject to any provision In the schedule. a comply with such academic and practical to the spec1flc combined degree course by Board,acandidate shall complete the course candidate In good academic standing in the the Faculty Board(s). 10 no more than seven years of study from requirements and submit such WIitten or course: other work as the Department shall specify. (3) The work undertaken by a candidate tn a its commencement. ta) may take leave of absence of one year combined degree program shall be no less (2) A candidate who has been granted credlUn (3) Except as otherwise permitted by the Head from the course; or tn quanti!)' and quail!)' than If the two of Department, any material presented by recognition of work completed elsewhere (h) with the permission of the Dean. may courses were taken separately. shall be deemed to have commenced the a candidate for assessment must be the take leave of absence of two consecutive work of the candidate and not have been (4) To quallfy for admission to the two degrees course from a date to be detennlned by the years from the course without prejudice Dean at the time the credit is granted. previously submitted for assessment. a candidate shall satisfy the requirements to any right of the candidate to re-enrol for both degrees, except as may be otherwise SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (4) To complete a subject a candidate shall In the course followtng such absence provided. (JUSTICE STUDIES)' satisfy published departmental and with full credit In all subjects requirements and gain a satisfactory result successfully completed prior to the Relu:lng Provision QuaHftcation for the Degree in such assessments and examinations as period ofleave. 13. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances 1. To qual1fy for admission to the Degree a the Faculty Board shall require. arfsinginapartlcularcase, the Academic Senate (2) For the purposes of sub-rule (1). unless candidate shall pass the program of study Withdrawal otherwise specified tn the schedule, a on the recommendation of the Faculty Board approved by the Faculty Board totalling 240 may relax any provision of these Rules. credit points. 9. (1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject candidate eligible to re-enrol shall be orthe course only byinform1ng the Academic deemed to be In good academic standtng. SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE Credit Registrar In writing and the withdrawal (3) A person who has been enrolled tn a course QuaHftcation for the Degree 2. Credit may be granted for up to 140 credit shall take effect from the date of receipt of but is absent without leave or has been 1. To quallfy for admission to the Degree, a points. such notification. excluded from the course may apply for re­ candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less TIme Requirement. (2) A student shall be deemed not to have admission to that course and may be re­ than 240 credit points chosen from the list of 3. (1) Except with the permission of the Dean. a enrolled In a subject if that student admitted to candidature under such Approved Subjects and comprising: candidate shall complete the course In not withdraws from the subject: conditions and at such time as the Faculty (a) not more than 80 credit points from 100 less than three years and not more than Board may detennlne. unless otherwise (a) In the case ofa semesteriength subject. level subjects; and eight years. before the Higher Education specified tn the schedule. (h) at least 150 credit points from Group A (2) Where standing has been granted. a Contribution Scheme census date for QuaH8catioD for the Award subjects of which: candidate shall be deemed to have that semester; or 11. (1) To qualify for the award a candidate shall (I) at least 40 credit points shall be from commenced the course from a date to be (h) In the case ofa full year subject. before satisfactorily complete the requirements 200 level Group A subjects; and detennlned by the Dean at the time the the first Higher Education Contrlbutlon governing the course prescribed In the credit Is granted. Scheme census date for that academic schedule. (II) at least 40 credit points shall be from A candidate who has satisjled the requirements year. 300 level Group A subjects. (2) A subject which has been counted towards for the award of the Associate Diploma ofPoItce Credit (3) Except with the permission ofthe Dean: a completed award may not be counted Studies may be permitted by the Faculty Board (a) a candidate shall not be permitted to towards another award. except to such 2. (1) Credit may be granted for up to 160 credit to transfer candidature from the degree to the withdraw from a subject after the extent as the Faculty Board may approve. points except that a candidate may be Associate Diploma of Police Studies. relevant date which shall be: Combined Degree Programo granted such credit as the faculty Board detenntnes for subjects completed in the (I) in the case of a semester length 12. (1) Where so prescrlbed fora partlcularcourse. Unlverstty which have not already been a candidate may complete the requirements subject. the last day of that counted towards an award. semester: or for one Bachelor degree In conjunction with FecUltyof SecUonTh,.. Deg,.. Rule. Faculty of s.cUonThr.. Degree Rul •• SocIal Science Social ScIence

SCHEDULE - ASSOCIATE DIPLOMA OF Offen of AdmiamOD (2) Acandldatewho bas been granted standing POUCE SroDms clause 2. such that the places available in shall be deemed. to have commenced the Trllllafer of ClIIldidature the course each year are filled. 3. (1) The Academic Registrar shall ensure that course from a date to be determined by the (2) The Faculty Board shall determine how offers of admission are made tn descending I. Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Social Dean at the time the credit Is granted. many places In the Course should be filled rank order to applicants ranked under Science {Justice StudiesO. who have satisfied from appUcants ranked under parts (a) and clause 2. such that the places available In SCHEDULE - BACHELOROFSOCIALSCIENCE the requirements for the Associate DIploma of (h) of clause 2 respectively. the course each year are OIled. (HONOURS) Police Studies may be permitted by the Faculty QuaUflcation for Dej/ree (2) The Faculty Board shall determine how AdmluIon to ClIIldidature Board to transfer candidature to the Associate many places tn the course should be filled DIploma of Police Studies. Candidates wtshlng 4. To qualtfy for admission to the Degree a 1. AcandIdate may undertake the Honours Degree from applicants ranked under parts (a) and to transfer shall apply In wrttingto theAcademtc candidate shall pass the programme of study in either one or two disciplines. (h) of clause 2 respectively. Registrar for permission to do so. approved by the Faculty Board totalling 240 2. In order to be admitted to candidature for the QuaUfication for the Diploma credit points. QuaUflcatioD for Degree Degree In a single disclpUne an applicant shall: TIme Required 4. To qualify for admission to the Degree a 2. To qualify for the award of the Associate Diploma (a) have completed the reqUirements for candidate shall pass the programme of study a candidate shall pass the program of study 5. (1) Exceptwtth the permission of the Dean. the admission to the Ordinary Degree of approved by the Faculty Board totalltng 240 approved by the Faculty Bolard totalltng 160 Bachelor ofSocial Science of the University course shall be completed In not less than credit points. credit points. three years and not more than eight years or to any other degree approved by the SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE of study. TIme Required Faculty Board; and (RECREATION AND TOURISM) (2) When standing has been granted. minimum 5. (1) Except wtth the permission of the Dean. a (h) have completed any additional work AdmIoaIon to ClIIldidature and maximum times for completion of the candidate shall complete the course tn not prescribed In accordance with the policy less than three years and not more than determined by the Faculty Board on the I. (1) course shall be determined by the Dean at Except tn cases where they meet the the time the credit Is granted. eight years of study. recommendation of the Head of the published selection crlterla determined by (2) A candidate who has been granted standing Department responsible for the diSCipline. the Faculty Board. applicants for admission SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE shall be deemed to have commenced the 3. In order to be admitted to candidature for the to candidature shall be invited to undertake (WELFARE STUDIES) selection assessment. AdmIoaIon to ClIIldidature course from a date to be determined by the Degree In two dlsclpUnes. an applicant shall: Dean at the time the credit is granted. (a) have completed the requirements for (2) The seleCtion assessmen t shall conSist of: I. (1) Except tn cases where they meet the SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK admission to the Ordinary Degree of published selection crlterla determined by fa} the submission of such written work' Bachelor of Social Science of the University and • the Faculty Board. applicants for admiSSion QuaUflcation for the Degree or to any other degree approved by the to candidature shall be tnvited to undertake 1. To qualify for admission to the Degree a (b) attendance at such interviews Faculty Board; and selection assessment. candidate shall pass the programme of study as the Faculty Board shall determine. (h) have completed any additional work (2) The selection assessmen t shall consist of: approved by the Faculty Board totalling 320 (3) Applicants invited to underlake the selection credit points. prescrlbed In accordance with the policy fa) the submission of such written work' determined by the Faculty Board on the assessment who do not respond will be and ' Grading of the Degree considered for admission on the basis of recommendation of the Heads of the academic performance. (b) attendance at such Interviews 2. (1) The Degree shall beconferredasan Ordinary Departmentsresponslble for the dtsclp Une. Degree except that. where the performance RIIIlldug for Selection as the Faculty Board shall determine. QuaUfication for Admi•• lon to the Degree of a candidate has reached a standard 2. Applicants shall be ranked in descending order (3) Applicants invited to undertake the selection determined by the Faculty Board to be of 3. To qualify for admission to the Degree a of merit on the basts of either: assessment who do not respond will be suffiCient merit. the Degree shall be candidate shall pass a program of subjects (a) considered for admission on the basts of conferred with Honours. approved by the Faculty Board totalltng 80 academic performance based on the academic performance. credit points at the 400 level. selection Criteria determined under clauses (2) There shall be two classes of Honours. RIIIlIdug for Seloetion 1(1) and 1(3); or namely Class I. Class II. Class II shall have Claues of HonOlD'S 2. (b) academic performance and results Applicants shall be ranked In descending order two divisions. namely Division 1 and 4. There shall be three classes of Honours namely of merit on the basts of either: determined by the Faculty Board arlslng DMslon 2. Class I. Class Il and Class Ill. Class II shall have out of the selection assessment. (a) academic performance based on the Time Requirements two divisions. namely Division 1 and Division 2. .offer. of AdmIaalon selection criteria determined underc1auses 3. (I) Except wtth the permission of the Dean. a Time Requirements 1(1) and 1(3); or 3. (1) The Academic Registrar shall ensure that candidate shall complete the course In no 5. Exceptwtth the permission of the FacultyBoard. offers ofadmission are made In descending (b) academic performance and results less than 4 years and no more than 7 years a candidate shall complete the course in not rank order to appltcants ranked under determined by the Faculty Board arlsln of study. less than one year and not more than two years out of the selection assessment. g of study. Faculty of s.c:tIon Thr.. Degree Rul •• Faculty of Section ThrM Degr.. Rule. Social Science Social Science

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (I) have satisfied all the requIrements for (a) have saUsfied all the requIrements for Classification admtsslon to the degree ofBachelor of Arts admission to the degree of Bachelor of or Bachelor ofSoclal Science with Honours SocIal Work of the Unlversfty. or another I. (1) The degree of Master of Social ScIence shall Class I or Class II of the UnIversIty or to a degree approved for thIs purpose by the be a degree taken by either coursework or Degree. approved for thIs purpose by the Faculty Board; and research. Faculty Board. of the UnIversIty or any (b) have completed at least two years of (2) The Faculty of Social ScIence shall be other university; or professional experience of a kind approved responsible for the course leading to the (2) have satisfied all the requIrements for by the Faculty Board; or degree by coursework. Arts admission to the degree of Bachelor of (b) In exceptional circumstances produce (3) The Graduate Studies CommIttee shall be or Bachelor of Social Science of the evidence of possessing such other responsible for the course leading to the University or other approved university qualifications as may be approved by the degree by research. and have completed such work and sat for Faculty Board on the recommendation of AdmilNlion to Candidature for the Deeree by such examinations as the Faculty Board the Head of the Department of SocIal Work. Courllework may have determined and have achieved a standard at least eqUivalent to that required QuaUflcation for the Degree 2. To be eligible for admIssIon to candidature for for admission to a Degree of Bachelor with 3. To qualIfy for the admIssIon to the degree a the degree by coursework an appUcant shall: second class honours In an appropriate candidate shall pass subjects totallIng not less (1) have satisfied all the requIrements for subject; or than 120 credIt poInts selected from the LIst of admission to the degree of Bachelor of Arts (3) In exceptional cases produce evidence of Approved Subjects. or Bachelor of Social SCience of the possessing such other qualifications as Credit University or another degree. approved for may be approved by the Faculty Board on thIs purpose by the Faculty Board: or 4. The Faculty Board may grant credit to a the recommendation of the Head of the candidate on such conditions as it may (2) in excepttonal circumstances produce Department. determfne. Standing shall not be granted for evidence of possessing such other QuaUfication for the Degree by Research more than 60 credit points. quallficattons as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of 7. To quaUfy for the degree a candidate admItted TIme Requlrement. the relevant Head of the Department. under Clause 6 shall complete a program 5. The course shall be completed in not less than approved by the Graduate Studies Committee QuaUfication for the Degree by Courseworlt one and a half years and no more than three consIsting of: and a half years of study. 3. To qualify for the degree a candIdate admItted (I) a thesIs embodying the results of the under Clause 2 shall pass subjects totalUng candidate's research; and 120 credit poInts selected from the List of Approved Subjects. (2) such other work and examinations as may be prescrlbed by the Graduate Studies Credit In the Degree by Courseworlt Committee. 4. The Faculty Board may grant credit to a Time Requlrement. for the Degree by Research candidate admitted under Clause 2 on such conditions as it may determine on the advice of 8. The degree by research shall be completed In the Head of the Department. Credit shall not be not less than one year and in not more than granted for more than 60 credit points. three years of study unless the Graduate Studies Committee otherwise permits. TIme Requirements for the Degree by Courseworlt SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK 5. The degree by coursework shall be completed within two years In the case of a full-time Clall8iflcatlon candidate or within four years In the case of a I. The degree of Master of SocIal Work shall be a part-time candidate unless the Faculty Board degree by coursework offered In the Faculty of otherwise permits. Social Science. AdmilNlion to Candidature for the Deeree by AdmiulOD to Candidature Research 2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an 6. To be eligible for admIssIon to candidature for applicant shall: the degree by research an applicant shall: Faculty of SecUon Four Course Duoln.aI Social Science Schedule of Subjects

eourse Structure AvaUabUlty - On campus Attendance - Full-Ume and Part-Ume Total Credit Points - 240 The subjects totalling 240 credit points presented for the degree should bechosen from those approved by the Faculty Board in accordance with the follOwing conditions. section four guaUflcation for the Degree 1. To qualify for admission to the degree. a candidate shall pass subjects totalUng not less than 240 Course Outlines/Schedules of Subjects credit points chosen from the Itst of Approved Subjects and comprising: (Undergraduate and Postgraduate) (a) not more than 80 credit points from 100 level subjects: and (h) at least 150 credit points from Group A BACHEWR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE subjects of which: The Bachelor of Social Science Is a new degree program at the University of (1) at least 40 credit pOints shall be from Newcastle. It has been developed to cater for students interested In focussing 200 level Group A subjects: and their studies on the techniques of analysts. theory and insights offered by the (U) at least 40 credit pOints shall be from social sciences. Major streams of study may be chosen from the follOwing seven 300 level Group A subjects. areas. These are called Group A subjects: Economics Geography History Linguistics Psychology SOCiology and Anthropology Statistics As well students can select other subjects from diSCiplines across the University providing they have the necessary prerequisite subjects. These additional subjects are called Group B subjects. Many students will not choose their fields of Interest until after the first year. However the Initial selection of subjects should be made In the light of probable direction of their later subject Interests. For example. a student Interested in urban planning would be well advised to include certain Sociology and Anthropology and Geography subjects. Someone interested in specialising in social research would be well advised to Include Statistics and Sociology and Anthropology. Those interested in work or the workplace would be well advised to consider some combinations of subjects from History. Economics (possibly Industrial Relations) and SOCiology and Anthropology. A student interested In language in its social and psychological context might specialise in Psychology and Linguistics. Faculty of Section Four Course OuUlnea/ Faculty of Secdon Four Course Oudlnesl Social Science Schedule of Subjects Social Sclance Schedule of Subjects

Bachelor of Social Science Computer SU!Vect Name Semester credit Prerequisite Corequlsites ofqJJer !'blnt. Schedule of Approved Subjects Number Group A ECON317 Economic Doctrines and Compuu.r SUbject Name Semester credit Prerequisite Corequlslw Methods A 1 10 As for ECON306 Nwnber qfqJJer !'blnt. ECON31B Economic Doctrines and MethodsB 2 10 As for ECON306 ECONOMICS ECON319 Economic Doctrines and ECONlIO Microeconomics I 10 Nt! Methods C 2 10 As for ECON306 ECONlIl Macroeconomics I 2 10 Nt! ECON322 MonetaI)' Theol)' 1 10 As for ECON306 ECONIIS Introductory Quantitative ECON323 Financial Institutions and Methods A 10 Nt! Policy 2 10 ECON322 ECON1I6 Introductory Quantitative ECON32S Industrial Relations IlIA 1 10 ECON221 Methods B 2 10 ECONIIS ECON326 Industrlal Relations IllB 2 10 ECON221 ECON20B Comparative Economic ECON330 The Economics of Employ- 10 ECON230, ECON250 Systems A 10 ECONIIO and ECONIII ment and Unemployment and ECON2S1 ECON209 Comparative Models ECON331 Contemporary Issues In and Cases 2 10 As for ECON206 Labour Economics 2 10 As for ECON330 ECON21O PoUtical Economics 10 As for ECON206 ECON340 Econometrics II 1 10 ECON241 ECON211 TheOlY of Public Choice 2 10 As for ECON206 ECON34 1 Econometrics III 2 10 ECON340 ECON216 Industry Economics A 1 10 As for ECON208 ECON342 Applied Econometrics II 10 ECON241 or ECON242 ECON217 Industry Economics B 2 10 ECON216 ECON343 Mathematical Economics B 2 10 ECON243, ECON250 ECON21B Problems of Developing and ECON2S1 Countries 10 As for ECON208 ECON350 PhUosophicalIssues in ECON220 Industrlal Relations IIA 1 10 40cp Economics 2 10 As for ECON306 ECON221 Industrial Relations lIB 2 10 ECON220 ECON360 Microeconomics III I 10 ECON250 ECON22S Japanese Economy 2 10 (ECONIIO and ECONIII) ECON36I Macroeconomics III 2 10 ECON2S1 or ECON204 GEOGRAPHY ECON230 Introductory Labour GEOGIOI Introduction to Physical Economics 10 As for ECON208 Geography 2 10 Nt! ECON240 Introductory Econometrics I 10 ECONIIS and ECONI16 GEOGI02 Introduction to Human ECON24I Econometrics I 2 10 ECON240 Geography 10 Nt! ECON242 Applied Econometrlcs I 2 10 ECON240 GEOG201 Methods in Physical ECON243 Mathematical Economics A 10 (ECON liS and ECON 116) Geography 2 10 GEOG 10 I or MATH 103 GEOG202 Methods In HUman ECON250 Microeconomics II 10 ECONllO Geography 10 GEOGI02 IlfCON2S1 Macroeconomics II 2 10 ECONlIl GEOG203 Biogeography and ECON306 International Economics A 10 ECON250 and ECON25I Climatology 10 GEOGIOI ECON307 International Economics B 2 10 ECON306 GEOG204 Geomorphology of ECON30B Macroeconomic Planning 2 10 ECON liS, ECON 116, Australia 2 10 GEOGIOI ECON250 and ECON2S1 GEOG207 Population, Culture and ECON309 urban Economics 10 As for ECON306 Resources 2 10 GEOGI02 ECON31O Regional Economics 10 As for ECON306 GEOG20B Cities and Regions 10 GEOGI02 ECON311 EnVironmental Economies 2 10 As for ECON306 GEOG301 Advanced Methods in 10 GEOG20 I and either ECON312 Managerial Economics 2 10 As for ECON306 Physical Geography GEOG203 or GEOG204 ECON313 Growth and Fluctuations 2 10 As for ECON306 GEOG302 Advanced Methods in 2 10 GEOG202 and either ECON314 Topics in Economic Human Geography 2 10 GEOG207 or GEOG208 Development 2 10 As for ECON306 GEOG3Q4 The Biosphere and I 10 GEOG20 1, GEOG208 and ECON31S Public FInance 10 As for ECON306 Conservation 10 GEOG204 ECON316 Australian Public Finance 2 10 ECON31S GEOG30S Climatic Problems 2 10 GEOG201 and GEOG203 Faculty 01 Section Four Course Outllnell Faculty of Section Four Course Outllnesf Social Science Schedule 01 Subjects Social Science Schedule of Subjects

Computer SuljJect Name Semester credit Prerequl.slte Corequlsites Computer SuljJect Name Semester credit Prerequisite Corequlsites Nwnber of offer Point. Nwnber of offer Point.

GEOG306 Geography of Australia: HISI'254 Childhood In ColonIal and An Historical Perspective 10 As for GEOO302 Post-ColonIal AustralIa 2 15 As for HISI'23O GEOG309 SocIety and Space 2 10 As for GEOO302 HIST330 Tradional and Early 15 30cp of Histol)' at 200 GEOG31l Hydrology 2 10 GEOO20 1 and GEOG203 Modern India level or equivalent GEOG315 Production, Work and HIST331 19th and 20th Centul)' Ten1tol)' 10 As for GEOG302 IndIa 2 15 As for HIST330 WSTORY HIST332 GandhI and Modem India 10 As for HIST330 HISTIOI The Foundations of HIST333 The French Revolution Australian SocIety 10 Nil and Its Aftermath 15 As for HIST330 HISTI02 Australia In the 20th HIST334 Nationalism and Fascism Century 2 10 Nil In Europe 2 15 As for HIST330 HISTI03 East Asian CIvUisations 10 Nil HIST335 European Socialism and HISTI04 The Foundations of the Russian Revolution 15 As for HIST330 Western Culture 2 10 Nil HIST336 World War I 2 10 30 cps of Hlstol)' at 200 HIST230 TradItional and Early 15 20 cp of Histol)' at level HlSl'233/333 or Modem: India 100 level or eqUivalent including at least one HIST231 19th and 20th Centul)' subject In HIST234/334 India 2 15 As for HIST230 European Histol)' or HIST233/ HIST232 GandhI and Modem India 2 10 As for HIST230 333 or HIST234/334 as a HIST233 The French Revolution corequisite and IIs Aftennath 15 As for HIST230 HIST337 Amertcan History to the HIST234 Nationalism and Fascism CMIWar 15 As for HIST330 in Europe 2 15 As for HIST230 HIST338 American HiStory after HIST235 European Socialism and the CMI War 2 15 As for HIST330 the Russian Revolution 15 As for HIST230 HlST339 American History. 10 HIST237/337 or HIST337/ HIST237 American History to the DIrected Reading HIST337/338 (or (refer to CMI War 15 As for HIST230 HIST337/338 as a prereq- HIST238 American History after the corequtstte) uisites) CIvil War 2 15 As for HIST230 HIST340 China and Europe: HIST240 China and Europe: Culture 15 20 cps of Hlstol)' at Culture Contact and Contact and Contrasts 100 level or HIST103 Contrasts 15 As for HIST330 or IEAC101 HIST341 Culture, Nation and HIST241 Culture, Nation and Society SocIety In Modem ChIna 2 15 As for HIST330 In Modem China 2 15 As for HIST240 HIST342 State. SocIety & Ideology HIST242 State. SocIety & Ideology In Early Modem Japan 10 As for HIST330 In Early Modem Japan 10 As for HIST240 HIST344 The South Pacific: ColonIsation HIST244 The Sou th Pacific: Colonisation and Culture Change I 15 As for HIST330 and Culture Change I 15 As for HIST230 HIST345 The South Pacific: An HIST245 The South PacIfic: An Histortcal Survey 2 15 As for HIST330 Historical Survey 2 15 As for HIST230 HlST346 Selected Issues in Pacific 2 10 30 cps of Hlstol)' at 200 HIST247 England from Refonnation to Histol)' level Includtng at least Revolution 15 As for HIST230 one subject in Pacific HIST248 English SocIety In the 18th and Histol)' Early 19th Centuries 2 15 As for HIST230 HIST350 Women's History 15 As for HIST330 HIST250 Women's History I 15 As for HIST230 HIST351 Australian SocIal Welfare HIST251 Australian SocIal Welfare Histol)' 15 As for HIST330 Histol)' 15 As for HIST230 HIST352 Histol)' and SocIety 15 As for HIST330 Faculty of Section Four Course OuUlnes/ Faculty of Section Four Course OuUlnes/ Social Science Schedule of Subjects Social Science Schedule of Subjects

Computer SUbject Name Semester Cnldtt Pren!qulsu.. Corequlsltes Computer SUlVect Name Semester Cnldtt Corequlsltes Number of offer Point. Number ofqffer Point.

HIST353 Issues in Australian UNG32 I Phonetics and Phonology 10 UNG201 UNG301 HlstoI)' 2 15 As for H1Sf330 PSYCHOLOGY HISf354 Childhood In Colonial and PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction I 10 'fER or equivalent required Post Colonial Australia 2 15 As for HISf330 for admission to B.A.(Psyc) HIST355 England from Reformation or B.Sc.(Psyc) whichever to Revolution 20 As for HISf330 is the lesser HIST356 English Society In thelBth PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 2 10 PSYCIOI and Early 19th Centuries 2 20 As for HISf330 PSYC202 Basic Processes I 10 PSYCI02 PSYC207 UNGUJSTICS (or UNGIOI Introduction to PSYC201 Linguistics FY 20 Nil as a pre- L1NG201 Linguistic Description FY 20 LING 10 I requisite) UNG211 Language and PSYC207 Experimental Methodology 10 PSYCI02 Cognition 10 UNGIOI LING201 PSYC208 Psychobiology 10 PSYCI02 PSYC207 UNG214 Structure of Languages (or other than English 10 UNG 10 I LlNG201 PSYC201 L1NG215 Language In Multicultural as a pre- Societies 2 10 LINGlOlorSOCAlll requisite) PersonaUty and Social LING21B Topics In Syntax 2 10 LING 101 UNG201 PSYC209 LlNG219 Analysis of Speech 2 10 LING 10 I LlNG201 Processes 2 10 PSYCI02 PSYC207 LlNG22 I Phonetics and Phonology 10 LING 101 (or -~i LING301 Linguistic TheoI)' FY 20 LING201 PSYc201 LlNG302 Research/Minor Thesis 20rFY 10 UNG201 LING301 as a pre- LlNG303 Research/Minor Thesis 20rFY 10 LING201 40 cp of requlstte) 9at least credit level) Linguistics PSYC210 Developmental Psychology 2 10 PSYCI02 PSYC207 at 300 (or level PSYC201 LlNG304 Directed Reading lor 2 LlNG201 40 cp of as a pre- orFY (at least credit level) Linguistics requisite) at 300 PSYC301 Advanced Foundations level and for Psychology I 10 PSYC2010rPSYC207 pennisslon PSYC302 Independent Project FY 10 As for PSYC301 PSYC301 of Head PSYC303 Basic Processes I I 10 As for PSYC30 I of Depart- PSYC304 Basic Processes 2 2 10 As for PSYC30 I ment PSYC305 Individual Processes 2 10 As for PSYC301 LING305 Special Topic In lor 2 10 UNG20 I (atleast credit As for PSYC306 Advanced Social Processes 10 As for PSYC30 I Linguistics orFY level) LlNG304 PSYC307 Advanced AppUed Topics LlNG306 Current Issues In lor 2 10 LlNG20 I (at least credit As for In Psychology I 10 As for PSYC30 I Linguistics orFY level) LlNG304 PSYC306 Advanced AppUed Topics LlNG311 Language and Cognition I 10 LlNG201 LlNG301 in Psychology 2 LlNG314 Structure of Languages SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY other than EngUsh 10 LlNG201 LlNG301 SOCAIII Introduction to Sociology LING315 Language In Multl- ~, and Social Anthroplogy FY 20 Nil cultural Societies 2 10 LING201 LlNG301 SOCAIOI Introduction to Sociology LING31B Topics In Syntax 2 10 UNG201 UNG301 and Social Anthropology 10 Permission of Head LING319 Analysis of Speech 2 10 LlNG201 UNG301 of Department UNG320 Speech and Language SOCAI02 Introduction to Sociology Disorders 2 10 LING201 UNG301 I and Social Anthropology 2 10 SOCAlOlor SOC 10 I Foeulty 01 Section Four Cour.. Outllneal Faculty of Section Four Cou, .. OUUlnut Social Science__ Schedule of Subjects Social Science__ Schedulo 01 Sub)octs Computer Subject Name Credit Prerequisite Corequlsites Oomputer SUJVect Name Credit Corequlsitea Number of offer Points Number qfo.JTer Points

SOCA201 HiStory of Sociological SOCA362 Governing BodIes: The Thought 2 10 SOCAIII. SOWE 105/ State and Dangerous 106 or equivalent Sexuallties 2 20 As for SOCA360 SOCA203 Work In Industrial Soclel¥ 2 10 SOCAIII or eqUivalent. SOCA364 The Constructlon of or Industrial Relations Aboriginalll¥ In Australia 2 20 As for SOCA360 lIA (ECON220) SOCA365 Order and Discontinuity in SOCA204 Theory and Practice of Social Industrlal Societies 2 20 As for SOCA360 Research 2 10 As for SOCA20 I SOCA367 Women and the Welfare SOCA205 Anthropological AnalysiS 2 10 As for SOCA20 I State 2 20 As for SOCA360 SOCA20B Media and Soclel¥ 10 As for SOCA20 I SOCA36B Disease. Discipllne and SOCA21O The Australian Family 2 10 As for SOCA20 I Death I 20 As for SOCA353 SOCA212 Introductory Aboriginal SOCA369 Criminal Justice and State Studies: Culture and Power 2 20 As for SOCA353 Politics 10 As for SOCA20 I SOCA371 Health. Healing and Social SOCA213 Developing Third World Power 2 20 As for SOCA360 Societies 10 As for SOCA20 I SOCA394 Special Topic lor 2 20 As for SOCA360 SOCA216 Youth. Culture and SOCA395 Special Topic lor 2 20 As for SOCA360 Delinquency 10 As for SOCA20 I SOCA396 Special Topic lor 2 20 As for SOCA360 SOCA217 Ethnlcll¥ and Migration SOCA397 Special Topic lor 2 20 As for S0CA360 Studies 2 10 As for SOCA20 I STATISTICS SOCA219 Sociology of Health and STATIO! Introductory Statistics lor 2 10 Nil Illness 10 As for SOCA20 I STATl03 Introductory Mathematical SOCA220 Aborigines and the Statistics 2 10 MATH 102 and INFO 10 I Welfare State 2 10 As for SOCA20 I (adviSOry) (Cannot count SOCA221 Sociology of Communll¥ 10 As for SOCA20 I StatiOI and STATl03 SOCA223 The Culture of Sexual STAT201 Mathematical Statistics 10 MATH 103 or STATIO I Minorities 10 As for SOCA20 I andMATH1l2 SOCA224 Democracy. Politics STAT202 RegreSSion Analysis 2 10 STAT2O! and Power 10 As for SOCA20 I STAT205 Engineering Statistics 5 MATH I 12 or MATH 102 SOCA244. , Special Topic lor 2 10 As for SOCA20 I STAT206 Design and AnalysIs of ,.A245 Special Topic lor 2 10 As for SOCA20 I Experiments & Smveys 2 10 STAT2O! .\. CA246 STAT301 .>" Special Topic lor 2 10 As for SOCA20 I Statlstical Inference 10 STAT2O! and MATH20 I SOCA247 Special Topic lor 2 10 As for SOCA20 I STAT302 Study Design 2 10 STAT2O! and STAT202 SOCA352 Research Methods In I 20 30 cp of Sociology and STAT303 Generalized Linear Sociology and Social Anthropology at 200 Models 10 STAT201 and STAT202 Anthropology level Including SOCA20 I STAT304 TIme Series Analysis 2 10 STAT2O! and STAT301 and SOCA204 or eqUivalent STAT202 (adviSOry) SOCA353 Knowledge, Ideology and 20 20 cp of Sociology and STAT310 Total Qualil¥ Management 2 10 MNGTIII and 200 level Discourse Anthropology subjects at subjects totalling 40 credit 200 level Including SOCA20 I. points chosen from subjects SOCA355 TIbet and SE Asia: 20 20cp of Sociology and offered by the Departments of Buddhist and Tribal Anthropology subjects at Economics. Management and/or Societies 200 level Including at least Statistics & penntsston of H.D.D. one Anthropology subject SOCA360 Australian Culture. 20 20cp of Sociology and Myths and Nationalism Anthropology subjects at 200 level Faculty of 8.ction Four Faculty of Social Science Cour .. Outline'" Section Four Cour .. Outll"..., Schedule of SUbjects Social Science Schedul. of Subjocto

Bachelor of Social Science BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (JUSTICE Group B ~cts (IIUUdmum 0140 crecllt poiDt.) Schedule of Approved Subjects S11lDIES) Any other subjects within the Universi\)' for which Group B eontlnuiDg students only 1994. the student has approprlate pre-reqUisites. Computer SuqJect Name Semester crecut Corequlsltes The Bachelor of Social Science (Justice Studtes) was COlIR8E STRUCTURE Number qfO./Ter J'blnt. introduced to meet the growing demand from Year 1 (Staae 1 part-time) Cp Bem organisations associated with State and Federal lEISURE 81tlD1ES Pollee Servicesand other public serviceseg. corrective JUSTI04 Justice Studtes I 10 2 LEIS 10 I Introduction to services, customs officers. The course also reflects JUST 105 fulictng Practice I 10 Leisure Studies 10 Nil the recent development of justice studies as SOCAllllntroduction to SOCiology LEIS 104 Ntl An Introduction to Leisure 2 10 LEIS 10 I substantive areas of academic study and research. and Social Anthropology 20 FlY Organisation & Public fultcy The board alms of the course are to: (St.,. 2 part-tim.) LEIS201 Leisure, Tourism and 10 SOCAIII or eqUivalent Ntl Popular Culture • develop theoretical knowledge In the social JUSTI02 Interpersonal Psychology IA 10 LEIS204 The Social Psychology science discipltnes of SOCiology. psychology. OR 2 10 LEIS 103 or PSYCH 102 Ntl of Leisure or equivalent politics and economics and to apply this PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction 1 10 LEIS209 knowledge to the study ofpoltcing and justice Introduction to 10 MNGTIll or LEIS 104 Elective from Group A the Tourlsm Industry provision. or Group B subjects 10 LEIS211 Tourist Behaviour 2 10 LEIS209 • produce graduates who have profeSSional skills JUSTI03 Interpersonal Psychology IB 10 2 and Interactions to pursue a variety of career paths In public LEIS301 Leisure Theol)' OR 10 LEIS20 I and LEIS204 Nil service areas,and who have the capacity to LEIS311 Sport & AustralIan undertake more speCialised postgraduate PSYC 102 Psychology Introduction 2 10 2 Socie\)' Elective from Group A or I 10 Completion of 60 cps Ntl studies In the future. LEIS315 Tourlsm fuUcy and B subjects 10 2 2 10 LEIS211 The degree Is a three year full time or six year part Planning Year 2 (st.,e 3 Part-time) time program In which students must attain 240 LEIS316 TOUrism Enterprise 10 LEIS211 crecUt points. JUST207 Policing Practice 2 10 Management LEIS319 The degree comprises a core of mandatoty subjects, JUST204 Ethics 10 2 Project in 2 10 MNGT332 Tourism Management a range of subjects Including elective options drawn Electives from Group A or LEIS320 from social science subjects and other relevant B subjects 20 Tourism Marketing I 10 MNGT230 or equtvalent [For subject descrtptions see Bachelor of Soclal Science [Recreation dtsciples (Group A-110 crecUt points) and further (St.,e 4 Part-time) and Tourlsm) entry] elective subjects based on personal preference from LAWIOI Foundations of Law 10 any undergraduate course available!n the University JUST206 Justice Studtes 2 10 SOCIAL WElEARE (Group B-40 credit points). The range of Group A JUST211 Criminal Justice Systems 1 10 2 SOWEI41 SocIal Problems and and Group B subjects available at the Ourimbah 10 Ntl Electives from Group A or Community Services campus will be dependent upon student interest B subjects 20 2 SOWEI42 and staffing. PoUltcs & the Welfare State 5 10 Ntl SOWE206 Year 3 (St.,e II Part-time) Interpersonal Relations 10 Ntl Group A Subject. (at lout 110 crecllt points) and Welfare Practice JUST305 Justice Studtes 3 10 Aborlgtnal Studies SOWE242 Youth Studies 2A 2 10 Ntl Electives from Group A or SOWE34 I Human Rights. Advocacy 5 10 Ntl Commerce B subjects 30 1.2 Crlm1nology and Social Change (St.,e 6 Part-time) SOWE342 Economics Regtonal Social Policy 10 SOWE 142 or equivalent JUST306 PoUcing Practice 3 10 and Planning Geography Histol)' Electives from Group A or (For subject descrlptlons. see Bachelor of Soctal Science (Welfare Studtes) entry] Justice Studies B subjects 30 1.2 This Is not a d'lflnltfve list. Student. can select other subjectsfrom disciplines across the Unlve,..,lty Law prouldlng they have the necess"'1l prerequisite subjects. For fUrther llifonnation. consult the Management relevant Department or Handbooks available for perusal In the Faculty O.fJke. Psychology SOCiology and Anthropology Cour.. OuUlnetJ Focultyol SecUon Four Cour.. OuUlne'" Faculty of SecUon Four Social Science Schedule of Subjects Social ScJence Schedule of Subjects

BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (RECREATION SocIology and Anthropology. History. Geography. SE)lESTER2 • the requtred knowledge and skflls for entry AND TOURISM) Economics. Management and languages such as LEIS303 Leisure and Tourism into welfare and community services. The Bachelor of Social Science (Recreation and Japanese. German or French. Students will be Independent Study (full year) (II) SocIal Science Core - to provtde the students counselled In first year with respect to the elective Tourism) Is a three-year course designed to provide LElS306 Leisure and Regional Planning 10 with: students with the knowledge and skflls necessary to options aVallable wlthtn the University. Elective 10 • a basic understanding of human pursue professional careers in the recreation and Course structure/Approved Uot of SUbjects development in Welfare Practice; tourism industries. The course combines social Elective 10 Year 1 science and professional studies subjects with a Cp • a basic understanding of the social context SEMESTER 1 of Australfan society; and number of elective options, enabling students to BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (WELFARE define specialised programmes of study suitable to LEISIOI IntrodUction to leisure Studies 10 STUDIES) • an understanding of social and cultural their Interests. processes and the ways In which they LEISI03 leisure Behaviour and Lifespan The Bachelor of Social Science (Welfare Studies) was influence social welfare. The course alms to produce graduates who are Development 10 Introduced to meet the growing demand from capable of developing professional responses to SOCAIlllntroduction to SOCiology and organtsatlonsassocfatedwithwelfareandcommunlty (fII) Through a sequence of Electives. the course will leisure behaviours and/or undertaking future post­ Anthropology (full year) 20 services. for personnel who both understand. and provtde students with: graduate studies In recreation. tourism or an allied Elective 10 have professional skills to operate within the social field. • the opportunity to pursue specialist studies SEMESTER 2 seIVIce areas. The course also reflects the recent In a dlsclplfne-based subject; Students must complete 240credlt points ofsubjects. LEISI02 Leisure and TOUrism Programming 10 development of welfare and community studies as • the opportunity to pursue specialist studies made up ofBOcredit points of social science subjects. substantive areas of academic study and research. LEIS 104 Leisure Organisation and within the areas of social welfare and 80 credit points of profeSSional studies subjects and The broad alms of the course are to: community studies; 80 credit points of elective subjects approved by Publfc Polfcy 10 Faculty Board. The general content of each of these SOCAlll Introduction to SOCiology • develop theoretical knowledge in the social • the opportunity to develop a spectallst subject areas Is as follows: and Anthropology (full year) science diSCiplines such as sociology. program ofstudytn all1edareas (egsocfology: psychology. poUUcs and economics and to apply economics; psychology); and the Ilextbfllty Elective Social Science SUbjects 10 this knowledge to the study of welfare and to choose subjects that best meet the needs These subjects introduce students to the social and Year 2 community organisations. and interests of students. psychological dimensions of leisure behaviour and SEMESTER 1 • produce graduates who have professional skills Students are requtred to cany out 250 hours. in examine the role of the leisure industries in the LEIS201 Leisure. TOUrism and Popular to pursue a variety of career paths In social both second and third year. of approved. supervised organisation of recreation and tourism in Australia. Culture . 10 welfare and community services. and who have field work. Field Placements are arranged through These studies provide a theoretical foundation for LEIS206 leisure Management the capacity to undertake more speclaltsed the Department. the professional studies subjects and elective options Practice (full year) 20 postgraduate studies In the future. in recreation and tourism. The Bachelor of SocIal Science (Welfare Studies) Elective 10 The degree is a three-year course In which students Is sccredlted by tbe Austra1lan motltute orwelfue Profesalonal Studies SUbjects Elective 10 must attain 240 credit potnts. Students are reqUired IIDd Community Workers. These subjects develop knowledge and skills In the SEMESTER 2 to complete 110 credtt points from Professional Course Structure/Approved U.t of SUbjects planning. promotion. implementation and evaluation Subjects, 70 credit points from Social Science of recreation and tourism seIVIces. The subjects LEIS204 Social Psychology of Leisure 10 subjects and 80 credit points from Elective subjects Year 1 develop specialised competencies In areas such as LElS206 Leisure Management Practice approved by Faculty Board. ~RI Cp (full year) research. marketing and management relevant to The degree comprises core subjects in Professional SOWE 10 1 Social Welfare lA 10 the leisure Industries. A professional development LElS207 Research Methods In Studies, subjects In Social Science and Elective SQWE 107 Lifespan Development & Welfare component gives students the opportunity to apply Leisure and TOUrism 1 10 subjects. The objectives of each of these areas are: Practice 10 these skills In selected organisations which provide Elective 10 SOCAlll Introduction to Sociology and recreation and tourism facUtties and seIVtces. (I) Professional Studies - to provtde the student Year 3 with: Social Anthropology 20 Elective Studies SEMESTER 1 • the knowledge and skills to plan. promote. LAWIOI Foundations of Law 10 Elective subjects enable students to either develop LElS30 1 Leisure Theory Implement and evaluate services tn the SEMESTER 2 specialised studies In an area of Interest or sample 10 welfare Industries: 10 widely from the variety of subjects avaflable within LEIS303 Leisure and Tourism SOWEI02 Social Welfare IB the University. Specialised studies In Recreation Independent Study (full year) 20 • the research and techntcal skills needed to SOWEI09 Social Welfare Analysts and TOUrism Include Tourism Management. Nature LEIS307 Research Methods In Leisure study social welfare. as well as welfare and and Enquiry 10 community service delivery systems. with a Based Recreation and Recreation for Persons with and Tourism 2 10 SOCAlll Introduction to Soctology and view to formulattngapproprlateprofesstonaI Specific Needs. Other speclallsms aVailable Include Elective 10 Social Anthropology (Cont'd) responses; and Elective 10 Faculty of s.cUon Four Faculty of SectIon Four Cour.. OuUlnes! Social Science Cour.. OuUlnas! Schedula of Subjects Social Science Schodulo of SubJoclo

Year 2 Cp method consists ofan tntegrated approach, tn which Although the subjects In the Sodal Work core are Feeling and Evaluation - the searchJor meaning SEMEsTER 1 students develop knowledge and skills through divided tnto three strands; Social Work Theory, Social Workers must be able to assess the SOWE20 I Social Welfare Methods 2A 10 tndlvldual and group participation tn work on a Social Work Practice and FIeld Education, the three quality and the tmportance of Information, graded set of typical cases, Issues and projects. strands are closely Integrated and are taken together. Judge the tntegrlty of sources, appreciate the However. it is possible for students who have not SOWE203 FIeld Educatton 2 20 The first year subject tntroduces students to the relevanceoftnfonnatlon and assess the meaning passed all the assessments In a FIeld Education SOWE209 Social Welfare Analysis IlU\for methods and fields of Social Work, the broad of situations for the persons Involved in them. subject to proceed to a subsequent stage of the and Enquiry II knowledge base and the value stance of the 10 Social Work Theory and Practice and to repeat the Communication - sharing InJormation and Elective profession. In subsequent years the core is divided conveying meaning. 10 Into Social Work Theory, Practtce Skills and FIeld missing subject at that time. SEMEsTER 2 Education. The system of prerequisites and Wlthtn each of the Social Work Theory and Practice Social Workers must also be sensitive. able to SOWE202 Social Welfare Methods 28 10 corequisJtes ensures that students do not enter the subjects, knowledge and skills are grouped Into "read" and to respond aptly to what Is going on tnasltuatlon. Goodcommumcation sk1llsenable SOWE203 FIeld Education 2 (Cont'd) FIeld Educatton subjects unttl they have passed the seven study areas covering the objectives of the appropriate Theory and Practtce subjects. course and for the purposes of assessment. The Social Workers to receive and to convey signals SOWE206 Interpersonal Relations and verbally and non verbally using a range of Welfare Practice 10 Other Specified Subject. (SO credit points) exploration of values permeates throughout all aspects ofthe course. Thtsexploratlon and discussion spoken. written. visual. audio and other media. Electtve 10 SOCial Workers draw upon the knowledge and skills of values Is not designed to compel students to Intervention - taking or sharing In action. Year 3 of other diSCiplines, mainly Psychology, SOCiology confonn to some Ideal notion of a "profeSSional" nor and Anthropology, History, Philosophy and Law. Competent profeSSional practice Involves taking SEMESTER 1 Is it closed-ended. The examination ofvalues should action with clients, using knOWledge, developing SOWE302 Social Welfare Methods 38 10 In this degree students study Introductory be seen as open-ended, challenging and designed to understanding. evaluating situations and Psychology, Introductory Sociology and help students understand their own values. to explore SOWE303 FIeld Education 3 20 communicating with others to assess. refer or Anthropology, Public Policy, History, Ethics and the the range of value positions In Social Work and in SOWE309 Social Welfare AnalysIs act In a social. political and economic context. Foundations of Law in the Departments offering related fields and prepare them for dealing with with due regard for ethical considerations, In and Enquiry III 10 those subjects. This exposes students to the richness value Issues in practice. order to brtng about change which Is tn the Elective 10 and the variations in approach and method within The Study Are.. Interests of the clients. Intervention Involves SEMESTER 2 each of the other disciplines. Students pursue a range of graded activities and the planned use of a range of resources. The implications for Social Work Theory and Practice Including oneself, and may occur with SOWE30 I Social Welfare Methods 3A 10 exercises In each ofthe seven study areas throughout SOWE303 FIeld Education 3 (Cont'd) are then drawn out within the core subjects of the the Social Work component of their course. The individuals and small groups or at the levels of degree. integrated approach to learning means that material organisations. communities or through soc:lal SOWE30S Social Welfare Project 10 Elective Subjects (40 credit points) from different study areas Is Incorporated Into every poltcy initiatives. Elective 10 A number ofother subjects and disciplines taught In actlvttyor exercise. Assessments also test knowledge ProJessionaJApproach to Work-processing work the University can be taken by Social Work students and sktlls across study areas. Each activity through time. BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK to broaden their own education or to pursue a undertaken by studen ts will have specific objectives All profesSionals need to be able to organise The Bachelor of Social Work degree consists of four particular Interest In one of the disciplines to which relating to nominated study areas. The seven areas their work as individuals, in teams or in a larger years full-time study, they have been Introduced In the Other Specified of study are - organisation. They must be able to deal with Thecourseisdestgned to prepare students to practise Subjects component of their course. Exploration and Discovery . the acquisltton oj organisations and systems and generally be as Social Workers and to be eligible for membership The Integrated Approach to Learning knowledge able to manage their workload in ways which of the Australian ASSOCiation of Social Workers. Knowledge infonns practice. Students need to enhance their practice. enrich their own lives The Department of Social Work uses an Integrated and do not lead to any harm for their clients. The degree comprises core subjects in Social Work. approach to student learning within the Social Work bund a knowledge base and to learn about the types of sources of knowledge. how to acquire their colleagues or themselves. other Specified subjects and elective sUbjects. The core subjects. This approach -covers the range of knowledge for their own practice and how to Social Work core subjects Include a total of ISOdays knowledge and skills that students need to begin Self·Directed Learning . preporatton Jor a life­ produce knowledge that will contribute to the (1050 hours) of supervised field education placements practice. In this approach to learning, students also time oj learning. development of the profeSSion. in Social Work agencies. other organisations and in explore their own values and the various value Practising profeSSionals must develop their the community. positions and ethical considerations encountered In Critical Reasoning and Analysis· the process oj ability to go on acquiring knowledge, developing thinking Social Work Subject. (200 credit points) practice. Students are encouraged to build on their skills. explortng values and adapting to change. own experience and to Incorporate the knowledge Social workers must be able to think lOgically Self-directed learning Includes recognising The Social Work strand consists of one first year and skills developed In other speCified subjects and and laterally. Logical thinking Is the basis of learning opportunlttes. self monitoring. subject and then three subjects in each of the electives Into their learning. assessment. judgement and argument and a participation In profeSSional supervision second. third and fourth years of the degree. means for arriving at an understanding of sessions and setting an'" .uorking towards self Throughou t the Social Work core the basic teaching avatlable Information. Lateral thinking Is learning goals. creative, it looks for new ways of understanding. Faculty of $ecdon Four Course Outtlnes! Course OUUlnesJ Foeullyo! SectIon Four Socia' Science Schedule of Subjects SoclolScIonce Schedul. of Subjec"

These seven study areas define the scope of the their degree students undertake three Field Speclal AdmIsaion for AhorIjIIDaI Studenu campus based Social Work curriculum. Intending Education placements of 50 days each. one In each In line with Social Work programs in some other students should remember that the study areas are of the second. third and fourth years of the course. UnlVersilles and with other Schoolsand Departments not separate subjects. All work Is integrated. in the Placements cover a range of fields and methods of in the Unlverslly of Newcastle. three places are ftrstinstance. within the theory and practice subjects practice In different settings. Field Education Is also reserved eachyearfor Aboriginal students.Addillonal and. then. between these subjects and Field linked. by various means. to the campus based part educational support Is provided for these students. Education placements. of the cumculum. It Is assessed and students must The Department also maintains close links with This integration Is achieved in a number of ways. perfonn all Field Educallon actlvilles and exercises Wollotuka. the Aboriginal Education and Suppori at a satisfactory level to gain a pass In the subject. Two of the most important means for achieVing Centre on campus. integration are to have students work through a Asaeument number of themes or stages tn the human ltfe-cycle At the start of each case or theme based exercise In over the four years of the course, and to work on the core Social Work subjects students receive a list each theme from the perspective of the Individual, oflearntng goals and assessment crlterla. Feedback the couple or small group, larger groups and Is given durlng the course of the exercise and final communities and agencies or organisations, all seen assessments made at the end of each exercise or in the context of the society, the economy and the stage In the subject. Students also keep a record of State. Throughout the course emphasis Is placed their self-directed learning activities. This record Is upon both individual and group leamlngexperiences. submitted for review during each year and Is fonnally Rather than simply attend a number oflectures and assessed at the end of each year of the course. tutorials in Social Work on specific topiCS. students Te_ workin small groups on a series ofcases or situations of the Idnds encountered in Social Work practice. Staff make specially prepared Learning Units. a The students then usea range ofresources, Including Field Education Manual and other resources themselves, each other, staff. library and resource aVailable to students. Reading lists and advice on materials. knowledge and sWlls acquired In other approprlate texts Is also provided during the course subjects and their own experience to develop the of each subject. A small charge may be made for appropriate Social Work knowledge and sWlls for some course materlals. their stage of learning. and to examine the values Crecllt for Previous Study relevant to the situation. Staff are involved In the The degree structure allows for credit under rules learning process as teachers In their own area of similar to those for the ordinary degree of Bachelor speciality. consultants. gUides. co-learners and. Social Science for students with another degree. or finally. as assessors. Throughout the course a range transferrfng from another degree with relevant units of other experts and specialist lecturers from Social In Psychology. Sociology. etc. Work and related diSCiplines will be Involved In the As many of the potential students In this category program. already have some experlence of the fields and Field Education methods of Social Work they may be allowed to enrol Field Education placements are provided by In a subject SWRK204. Special Project. instead of individual Social Workers. agenCies and SWRKIO I. Thlssubjectwlll be tailored to the specific organisations In the community. They are a crucial needs of students. It will recognise and build on their part of Social Work education and go beyond any prevtouseducatton and work experlences and extend simple notion of "gaining experlence" in the work their knowledge and sWll by Individual and group place. Every student Is placed with a designated exercises. Field Educator after successful completion ofcampus Students enrolled In SWRK204 could finish their based sktlls workshops and skills assessment. degree In three years If they have the appropriate Through the placement the Field Educator Is Other Spec1fled Subject. In their /lrst degree. effecllvely part of the teaching staffofthe Department Credit for Core Social Work SubJecu will only be Field Education placements are arranged by the given for Social Work subjects In another approved 1 University and both students and Field Educators Social Work degree where evidence Is provided that receive support during the placement from staff of the content and methods of Instruction are similar the Social Work Department. During the course of to those In this degree. I Faculty of Section Four Cour.. OutlineSI' Fecultyol Section Four Cour .. Outline'" Social Science Schedule of SubJects Social Science Schedule of SUbjects

Bachelor of Social Work Bachelor of Social Science/Bachelor of Social Work The stru.cture of the degree Is as follows: To satisfy the reqUirements for a combined Bachelor of Soctal Science/Bachelor of Social Work degree. Credit Pre- Co- DIscipline Subject Name (No_) Length Point. Requisite candidates would complete the followtog programme: YEAR I Requisite BtlChelor Of Social Science Compuloo'1l SocIal ScIence Social Work SuJdect. Socfal Work Introduction to Social Work FY 20 ML (SWRKIOI) • ML Subject. In BSW Sociology & Yeul 20 credit points at 40 credit points 20 credit points at Introduction to SOCiology and FY 20 ML ML Anthropology Social Anthropology (SOCA III) 100 level 100 level Psychology Psychology 60 credIt points - 20 credit points Introduction I SEM 10 ML NIL Yeu2 (PSYCIOI) 40 of which must be at 200 level Psychology Introduction II SEM 10 PSYCIOI (PSYCI02) Yeu3 20 credit points at 20 crecUt points 60 credit points at Other Elective: either one Full Year or 20 NIL NIL 200 level or 300 level 300 level 2 Semester length 100 level subjects In Year 5 20 credit points at 60 credit points at an approved DiSCipline in the University YEAR 2 300 level 400 level Social Work Total 220 credit points from the Bachelor of Social Science programme. 280 credit points from core and Social Work Theory I (SWRK20 I) FY 20 SWRKIOI# SWRK202. compulsory subjects for the Bachelor of Social Work. However, the overlap of 80 credit points from subjects 205.206# common to both programmes will mean that students will complete a minimum of 420 credit pOints in the Social Work Practice I (SWRK202) FY 20 SOCAIII SWRK201. 205.206# combined degree programme. F1eld Education IA (SWRK205) SEM 10 PSYClO2 SWRK201. 202 Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Social Work F1eld Education I B (SWRK206) SEM 10 SWRK205 SWRK201. 202 Philosophy For details please refer to Arts Handbook. Ethical Issues (PHIL258) SEM 10 SWRKIOI# SWRK201 # or eqUivalent as approved History Foundations of Australian Society (HISTIOI) or eqUIvalent SEM 10 NIL NIL as approved YEAR 3 Social Work Social Work Theory II (SWRK30 I) FY 20 SWRK201# SWRK302.303# Social Work Practice II (SWRK302) FY 20 SWRK202# SWRK30 1. 303# F1eld Education II (SWRK303) FY 20 SWRK206# SWRK301.302# SOCiology & Politics and Public Policy (SOCA206) SEM 10 SOCAlll NIL Anthropology or eqUivalent Sociology & Anthropology subject as approved YEAR 4 Social Work SOCIal Work Theory III (SWRK40 I) FY 20 SWRK30J# SWRK402.403lt Social Work Practice III (SWRK402) FY 20 SWRK302# SWRK40I.403# Field Education III (SWRK403) FY 20 SWRK303# SWRK40I.402# Other Elective: either one Full Year or 20 as approp. as approp. two Semester length subjects at 200 level or higher In an approved DIsclpJine In the University •• Law Foundations of Law (LAW 10 I) SEM 10 NIL NIL or eqUivalent as approved

May be replaced by a corequfsfte SWRK204 . &Jcfal Work Specta1 Projectfor students wUh adrxmced standing jor the rest of 1 st year. •.. or equivalent Because ofunevenness ofcredU po(ntdistrlbution in third andfrurth years. students can undertakee1ecttve studies in semester two. third year and semester one. foorth year OR afull year subject infowth year. Faculty of Section Four Cour.. OuBlnell Faculty of SacUon Four Course OuBln.1I Social Science Schedule of Subjects Socia' Science Schedule of Subjects

Bachelor of Social Science (Honours) Uat of Approved Subjects The degree of Bachelor of Social Science (Hons) Is a one year full-time or two year part-time course oomputer SUJVect Name Semester Credit following on from the Bachelor of Social Science Number ofO.JJer Pblnts degree. The degree alms to provide depth of study tn one of the social science discipline areas or two if a ECONOMICS joint progmm Is undertaken. ECON40 I EconOmics IV (Part 1) IT 40 The course consists of: ECON402 Economics IV (Part 2) IT 40 ECON404 Industrial Relations IV Ca) A one semester subject In Social Research (Part I) 40 Methods co-ordlnated by the Department of ECON405 industrial Relations IV Sociology and Anthropology. This reqUirement (Part 2) 40 may be waived by the Dean on the recommendation of the relevant Head of GEOGRAPHY Department If the student has already reached GEOG4O I Geography Honours IT 40 an equivalent standard in Social Research GE0G402 Geography Honours IT 40 Methods. Where this requirement Is waived the candidate shall choose 2 subjects as specified mSTORY In (h). HIST401 History Honours (F 111 60 (b) A one semester subject of relevance to the HIST402 Hlstoty Honours thesis topic (see (ell chosen by the student from (PIT. Yr 1) 40 the honours subjects offered within the key HIST403 Htstoty Honours diSCipline areas ofBSocSc degree or the BSocSc (PiT. Yr 2) 40 specialist degrees. currently; Economics lEISURE STUDIES IEIS401 Recreation & Tourism Honours 60 Geography (F111 History IEIS402 Recreation & Tourism Honours FY 40 Leisure Studies (PiT. Yr I) IEIS403 Linguistics Recreation & Tourism Honours FY 40 (PIT. Yr2) Psychology LEIS404 Recreation & Tourism Honours + I or 2 40 Statistics IEIS405 Recreation & Tourism Honours + 1 or 2 40 LEIS406 Social Welfare Recreation & Tourism Honours + 1 or 2 20 IEIS407 Recreation & Tourism Honours + 1 or 2 20 SOCiology and Anthropology (c) A thesis. UNGUISTICS Cd) Each student's program, thesis topic. LING40 I Linguistics Honours (F11 60 LING402 Ungutsttcs Honours superv1sor/s and examiners must be approved by the Dean on the recommendation of the (PIT. Yr I) 40 LING403 relevant Head/s of Departments. Llngulslttcs Honours (P/T.Yr2)) 40 (e) At least two examiners will be appointed. In Departments/DiVisions newly Introducing the PSYCHOLOGY Honours degree at least one of these will be PSYC40 I Psychology Honours 40 I IT 40 Consult Department external. PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 IT 40 Consult Department PSYC403 Psychology 403 IT 30 Consult Department PSYC404 Psychology 404 IT 50 Consult Department + Mid-year tntake only Faculty of Section Four Course OuUlneal Faculty of Section Four Cour .. Oudlne'" Social Science Schedule of Subjects Social Science Schedulo 01 SubJects

Muter of Social Science Enby RequiJementll and Duradon Oomputer SUbject Name _fer CredIt DellCripdon The minimum enbyrequtrement is a pass Bachelors Number qfOJJer Points The MSocSc bycoursework is currently intended for degree. preferably with a major In SOCiology and SOCIAL WEU"ARE students who have a general interest in sociology or Anthropology. or other tertfalj' qualification deemed anthropology and wbo wish to broaden and deepen to be eqUivalent by Faculty Board on the SOWE401 Welfare Studies Honours (F/11 FY SO SOWE402 Welfare Studies Honours (PIT Yr I) FY 40 their knowledge_ It Includes general core subjects recommendation of the Head of Department. SOWE403 Welfare Studies Honours (PITYr 2) FY 40 (SOCA55 1 andSOCA552) to be taken by all students. The complete Masters program consists of two years SOWE404 Welfare Studies Honours + lor 2 40 As well. a range of specialist subjects Is offered. In full time or part time eqUivalent. SOWE405 addition. as part of the MSocSc. It Is possible to take Welfare Studies Honours + lor 2 40 Candidates with an Honours degree In Sociology or SOWE406 a Umited number of undergraduate and Honours Welfare Studies Honours + lor 2 20 equivalent shall receive credit for one year of full­ SOWE407 Welfare Studies Honours + lor 2 20 subjects and subjects from other Masters programs (subject to theagreementofthe relevantdeparfment). time study for the Master of Social Science degree. SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY The subjects which are available cover a wide range SOCA404 Sociology & Anthropology of special areas so that It Is usually possible for students to select a program which Is focussed on Honours (Fin SO SOCA405 Sociology & Anthropology their particular interests. eg general SOCiology, Honours anthropology. gender studies. Asian studies, social poUcy/welfare state, research methods. Here the (PIT. Yr I) FY 40 SOCA406 Sociology & Anthropology structure of the course is described and details are Honours given of those subjects which will probably be (PIT. Yr 2) FY 40 taught In 1994. Additional speCialist subjects may SOCA407 Sociology & Anthropology be announced in the course of the year; contact the Department for more Honours + lor 2 40 informatton~ SOCA40B Sociology & Anthropology Coune Structue Honours + lor 2 40 The Master of Social Science coursework program SOCA409 Sociology & Anthropology consists of the equivalent of 120 credit points made Honours + lor 2 20 up as follows: SOCMIO Sociology & Anthropology I. 1\vo core subjects. SOCA551 and SOCA552. Honours + lor 2 20 focusing on contemporary developments In STATISTICS social theory and contemporary developments in social research methods. STAT401 Probabflfty Theol)' 10 Consult Department STAT402 Analysis of Categorical 2. A number of optional subjects. They consist of: Data 10 Consult Departrnent (a) the postgraduate level subjects offered as STAT403 Demograpby and part of the MSocSc coursework program or SuIVlvai AnalYSiS 10 Consult Deparbnent offered in another Masters program (taken STAT404 Robust Regression with approval). Between twenty and forty and Smoothing 10 Consult Deparbnent credit points of these will be undertaken. STAT405 Statistical Consulting 10 Consult Deparfment STAT406 Methods for Quality (b) undergraduate subjects and subjects from the BSocSc(Honours) subjects offered by Improvement 10 Consult Deparfment STAT407 Advanced Topics in other departments. These should comprise no more than the equivalent of 20 credit Statistics 10 Consult Deparfment points. including any undergraduate (or STAT408 Project 10 Consult Deparfment Honours) subjects taken outside the STAT409 Project 20 Consult Deparfment Department. STAT410 Project 30 Consult Deparfment STAT411 Project 40 Consult Department 3. Students will normally write a minor thesis in the final year of study. This is eqUivalent to + Mld-yesr Intake only forty credit points. (SOCA550) Feculty of SecUon Four Course OuUlneal Faculty of Seclion Four Cour .. OuUlneal Soc'.' Science Schedule of Subject. Socl., Science Schedulo of SUbjects

Uat of Approved Subjecte ....ter of Social Work SWRK516 Computer Subject Ncune CrItique of Therapeutic Semeeter CredIt Deocripdon Responses to Trauma Victims 10 Nwnber '!fOO'er !'blnrs The degree Is designed to meet the needs of Social SWRK517 ChUd Sexual Abuse: SOCA551 Contemporary Development Workers to acquire advanced sktlls and to gtve Theory Practice and Research 10 In Social Theol)' 1 20 leadership in the different methods and the various SWRK518 Social Work Practice SOCA552 Contemporary Development tn fields of Social Work Intervention. A common base and Fam!ly Law 10 Social Research Methods 2 20 for advanced practice Is provided through core Note that students may take up to two electives SOCA513 Contemporary French subjects focusstng on contemporary developments outside the Department of Social Work. Social Thought 10 and current Issues In Social Worktheol)'and practice. SOCA519 Gender and Sociology 10 Candidates also undertake a superv1sed Practicum SOCA525 Sociocultural Studies In to develop and extend their practice skills and wtll of Health 1 complete a minor thesis Including some original Master Medical Science 10 (Medical Social Selence, SOCA526 Sociocultural Studies In research or scholarship relevant to practice. The Centre for Clinical Epidemiology and Healthll 2 10 Candidates will also undertake four elective subjects. SOCA532 Criminal JUstice and two of which may. with the pennlsslon of the Head Blostatistics,ln cooperation with the Department of of Department. be taken outside the Department of Sociology and Anthropology. offers a Master of State Power 2 10 SOCA550 Social Work. Medical Science (Medical Social Science'. ThIs course Minor Thesis 3 40 SOCA553 Is Intended for those with bachelor's degrees (or Supervised Reading lor 2 20 This course Is aimed directly at Social Workers who SOCA554 above) In social science. science or a health·related Supervised Reading lor 2 20 are seeking to broaden their knowledge and extend SOCA555 diSCipline who desire specialist skills In social science Supervised Reading lor 2 10 their sktlls. The development of the profession and SOCA556 research asapplled clinical and community health Supervised Reading lor 2 10 career advancement for Individual Social Workers to depends upon soundly based and relevant issues. The Master of Medical Science degree is postgraduate qualifications. conferred by the Faculty of Medicine. LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS The Masters elegreeconsists ofoneyearofcoursework (full-time'. followed hy a thesis In applied research The subjects for the course are: over one year (full-time). The course can also be • Core Components Cp taken on a part-time basts. The coursework and SWRK501 Introduction to Learning for thesis aim to prepare students to competently Advanced Practice 10 conceptualize. destgn and execute transdtsctpltnary research. Such research Is concerned with SWRK502 Current Issues In Social Work psychological. social and cultural processes. tn Theory and Practice 10 relation to the etiology, distribution, prevention and SWRK503 Practtcum 20 amelioration of Illness. Students will acquire an SWRK504 Minor Thesis 40 understanding of the basic theoretical and SWRK514 Practtcum 10 methodological prinCiples underlying health social SWRK515 Practtcum 10 science research. They will also lerun to apply this knowledge to the study of health and tIIness Issues • Elecdve Subject. Cp in clinical and/or community settings. SWRK505 The Politics of the Personal 10 Students who have completed an Honours degree tn SWRK506 Quantitative Research Methods 10 Soclologyand Anthropology are encouraged to SWRK507 Qualitative Research Methods 10 consider enrolling for the Masters degree. Anyone SWRK508 Working with Women 10 wishing for further Infonnatlon should contact Drs SWRK509 History of the Welfare State 10 Connor and Robinson from the Department of SOCiology and Anthropology. SWRK510 Power and Influence tn Organisattons 10 An outline of the two main Medical Social Science components of the Masters program Is Included In SWRK511 Psychodynamic Approaches Section Five. wtth Individuals. Groups and Organisations 10 SWRK512 Current Social Work Practice 10 Faculty of s.ctlon Five Economic. Social Science Subject DelCrlptlona

ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS economic development. Topics to be discussed EconomiCS & Economic History constitute separate Include: the land question. the growth of disciplines within the Faculty of Arts. manufactUring and the arbitration system. the Impact of depression and unemployment. the rise of ECONI02 ECONOMIC HISTORY A lOcp consumer SOCiety. and the role of government in the Lecturer J.R. Fisher Australian economy. The course ranges from the Prerequisite Nfl mid-nineteenth century to the present. Hours 2 lecture hOUTS and 1 tutorial per week A detailed readlDi lIat wiD be clIatributed at the beginning of the course. section five Examination End of semester examination and progressive assessment ECONllO MICROECONOMICS I lOcp Subject Content Lecturers H. Dick. P. Knlest This course looks at the background to modem Prerequisite Nil Australian economic development. Using simple Descriptions HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week. 1 hour workshop concepts and theory. it examines: per week. 1 hour tutorial per week (a) economic growth In prehistoric Australia 5000- EKamination End of semester examination and 200 BP (Before the Present). progressive assessment Guide to Subject Entries (b) the background to. origins and economic Content Subject outlines and reading nsts are set out In a standard fonnat to faclntate development of the white settlement In New reference. An explanation of some of the technical tenns used In this Handbook South Wales 1788-1860 A.D. Microeconomics, the foundation of all economics, is Is given below. the study of the allocation of resources and the Recommended Reading and Texts distribution of income and wealth arising from the Prerequlaltes are subjects which must be passed before a candidate may enrol Blalney. G. 1982. Trtumph of the Nomnds. 2nd edn. Interaction of market forces and government In a particular subject. The only prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or Macmfllan Intervention. This course introduces the theoretical subjects which must be taken before enrollfng In the particular topic. To enrol Dingle. T. 1988. Abortgfnol Economy. Penguin concepts, principles and relationships which are the In any subject ofwhfch the topic may be part. the prerequisites for that subject basis of every economist's tool-kit. Taking the must stm be satisfied. References: household and the finn as decision-making units, Where a prerequisite for a subject Is marked "(advisory)". it refers to a pass In Jackson. R.V. 1977. Australian Economic the course examines the nature of Demand and the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures In that subject will be given Deve/opmentintheNlneteenthCentwy.A.N.U. Press Supply and how they Interact In competetlve. on the assumption that a pass has been achieved at the level Indicated. Blalney. G. 1983. A Land Ha!fWon, Sun Books oligopoltstlc and monopolistic markets for both products and factors. This leads Into consideration Corequlaltel refer to subjects or topiCS which must be taken concurrently Nicholas. S. (ed.) 1989. COfWict Workers: Interpreting unless already completed. • ofthe nmltatlons ofmarket forces and the approprtate Australla's Past form of poltcy Intervention. Examination. The legislation defines "examination" as including mid-year Flood. J. 1989. Archoeology of the Dreamtfme. 2nd Texts exarn1naUons. aSSignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of 000. Collins a candidate In a subject Is assessed. Some attempt has been made to Indicate McTaggart. D.. Findley. C .• and Parkin. M. 1992. White. C. 1992. Mastering Risk, Oxford for each subject how assessment Is determined. Economics. Addison-Wesley Texts are essential books recommended for purchase by students. ECONI03 AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC Bentlck. T .. & Spencer. D. 1992. Study Guide. HISTORY lOcp References or Recommended Reading Lists include books which are relevant Addison-Wesley to the subject or topiC. but which need not be purchased. Lecturer A R Buck Other References Credit po!ut values associated with each subject are shown to the right of the Prerequisite Nfl Baumol. W.J .. BUnder. A.S .• Gunther. A.W. and subject description and are abbreviated to "cp". Hours 2 lecture hours and one tutorlal per week Hicks. J.R. 1988. Economics -PrInciples and Policy. Australtan edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich EKamtnation End of semester examination and progreSSive assessment Waud. R.. Hockfng. A.. Maxwell. P .• and Bonnlcl. J. Content 1992. Economics, Australian edn. Harper and Row Samuelson. P. et at. 1992. Economics. Third Thiscourse examines the economic orlgins ofmodem Australian edn. McGraw-Hill Australia. Particular attention is given to those Ideas and values which have Influenced Australian . Williams, J.B. 1990. The Economic Examiner. McGraw Section Flv. Economic. Foeulty of SubJect Description. Faculty of Section Flv. Economic. Social Science Social Sc~nce Subloct Descriptions

Content ECONlll MACROECONOMICS I lOcp Texts content Economic IIlatory of !Della EconomiC Growth In Europe Brttatn and the world Lecturers P. Knlest. to be advised Berenson, M & Levine, D. 1992, Basic Business The economiC development of the Indian economy from the end of the medieval pertod to 1914 Prerequisite Nil statlstlcs, Prentice-Hall subcontinent from the Mughal pertod to the FtrS~ References GB-SI'AT V3.0" Dynamlc Mlcrosystems Inc. World War. The course w!ll emphasise the growth 0 Hours 2 lecture hours per week. 1 hour workshop crafts, N.F.R. 1985, The British Economy In the the division of labour, from village to local, regional, per week. 1 hour tutorial per week Computing text to be advised. ternational markets. Agriculture. Industrial RevolutiDn. Oxford natlonal and in d Examlnalion Continuous assessment plus one 2- ECON116 INTRODUCTORY QUANTITATIVE Cia C G.A. 1984, Economic Expanston and Social commerce. Industry. transport and foreign tra e hour examination METHODS B IOcp c~: England, 1500 - 1700, 2 vols, Cambrtdge wtll be covered. Content Lecturers M.T.Gordon, G.R.Keatlng,J .A. Doeleman, !)aviS, Ralph 1973, The RlseoftheAtlanticEconomles, References This course introduces students to macroeconomic K.M. Renfrew London Dharma Kuma et al (eds), 2 vols 1982, 1984, concepts. principles and policy. Topics covered Prerequisite Introductory guantltatlve Methods A Floud R. and McCloskey, D.N. (eds) 1981, The cambridge EconomiC History ofIndta include national income accounting. income and (ECON1l5) ~mIc History qf Britain Since 1700, 2 vols, Chaudhuri, K.N .. and CliVe Dewey (eds) 1979, employmentdetertninaUon. jnflation. the balance of Cambrtdge Economy and Society, New Deihl payments, monetary and fiscal poltcy. Hours 2 hour lecture and 2 hour laboratory session per week Jones, E.L. 1988, Growth Recurring, Oxford Texts ECON293) READINGS IN ASIAN Content Pollard, Sidney 1981, Peaceful Conquest: The ECON393 ECONOMIC HISTORY I lOcp To be advised. ECON 1 I 61s a pre-requisite for all econometrics and IndustrlallsatfDn of Europe 1760 -1970, Oxford Lecturer H.W.Dlck ECONll6 INTRODUCTORY QUANTITATIVE mathematical economics courses offered at the ECON290) READINGS IN EUROPEAN lOcp Prerequisite! Corequlslte For ECON293 Is ECON203, METHODS A IOcp second year level In the Department of EconomiCS. ECON390) ECONOMIC HISTORY for ECON393 Is ECON303 Lecturers M.T.Gordon, G.R.Keatlng,J.A. Doeleman, The 19M B course provides an introduction to the Lecturer S.R.Shenoy Content K.M. Renfrew mathematical techniques used in economics and the PrerequisIte As for ECON202 or ECON302 Aspects of Indonesian economiC history In Prerequisites N!l business and to the econometrics topics of nineteenth and twenthleth centuries correlation. regreSSion and time selies analysis. Corequlslte For ECON290 Is ECON202, for ECON390 Hours 2 hour lecture and 2 hour laboratory session Spreadsheets (Lotus 1-2-3) and a statistical package Is ECON302 Riiferenres per week (GB-STAn are used In the analysis ofdata throughout Hours 2 hours per week To be advised. Examtnatton One final examination the semester. Examfnntion Progressive assessment ECON204/ ASIAN ECONOMIC lOcp Content Texts Content ECON304 HISTORY U This Is the first of two semester subjects which aim Berenson, M & Levine, D. 1992, Basic Business British and world economic history from about 1500 Lecturer H.W. Dick to give students an understanding of elementary Statistics, Prentice-Hall Pre qulsltes For ECON204 EconomiC History A quantitative and statistical procedures used In to 1914 O'Brten, D.T.. Lewts, D.E. and Guest, J.F. 1989, 102) or Australfan EconomIc History economics and business. ECONI15 (igM A) Is a pre­ (EC~N Mathematicsfor Business and Economics, Harcourt Text (ECONI03) or MIcroeconomics I (ECONllO) an,ll requisite for ECONI16 (lgM B). The degree rules for Brace Readings wtll be advised Macroeconomics I (ECONlll) For ECON304, 30 the BachelorofArts and BachelorofArts (Psychology] credit potnts of Economic History at 200 level. restrict enrolment to 20 credit points at 100 level In ECON202/ EUROPEAN ECONOMIC HISTORY ECON203/ ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY I lOcp a single discipline - Economics in this Instance. ECON302 lOcp ECON303 HolUS 2 lecture hours lectures per week Thus. If you are enrolled or intend to enrol In Lecturer S.R.Shenoy Lecturer S R Shenoy &:a.nUrtatwn End of semester and progressive ECONIIO and ECONIII, you are not pennltted to Prerequisites For ECON202. Economic History A Prerequisites For ECON203 Economic History assessment enrol In ECONIl5 and ECONI16. (ECONI02) or Australtan Economic History A(ECONI02) or Australtan Economic History Content IgM A and IgM B are pre-requisites for all (ECONI03) or Microeconomics I (ECONllO) !Ill!! (ECONI03) or Microeconomics I (ECONIIO) ansi Japanese Economlc History econometrics and mathematical courses offered at Macroeconomics I (ECON Ill) MacroeconomIcs I (ECON Ill) The economic development of Japan from ctrca the secondyear level in the DepartmentofEconomtcs. Prerequisites For ECON302, 30 credIt points of PrerequisItes For ECON303, 30 credIt points of 1600 to the pertod after 1945. Major topiCS are the 19M A covers three broad areas: computing on IBM­ Economic History at 200 level. Economic History at 200 level. Tokugawa heritage. the economic transfonnatlon compatible microcomputers and the use of Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a fortnightly Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a fortnightly since 1868 and government and business in modern spreadsheetsofiware, mathematical techniques used tutorial. In economics and business. and some basic economic tutortal Japan. statistics concepts. Exa.nUnation End of Semester and progressive Examlnatlon End of semester and progressive assessment assessment SecUonfive EconomiCS focUltyof SubjoclllelCrlplIonl Faculty of hctlon Five Economics Social Science Social Sctence Subject DelCrlptlons

References Texts: Content HOUTS 2 hours lectures per week. one hour tutorial Bomstein. M .. led) 1989. Comparative Economic per fortnight This course aims at the analysis of systemic features Macpherson. W.J. 1987. The Ecorwmlc Development Systems. 6th edn. Irwin ofJapan c. 1868-1941. Macmlllan EKamination End of semester and progressive of economlc systems and at the making of Informed and mature inter-system comparisons, using basic Gregol)'. P .• and Stuart. RC. 1992. eornparatlve Mlnaml. R 1986. The Economic Development of assessment EconomIC Systems. 4th edn. Houghton Mifflin tools of economiC analysts. Japan. Macmillan Content The empirical content of the course will consist of a Kobler. H. 1989. Comparative Economic Systems. R'l/erences Modem Chinese Economlc Hlstol)' number of case studies. which are the object of Scott. Foresman Allen.G.C.1981.ASIwrtEconomicHlstoryofModem Major topics Include the spread of the market periodical review. in response to the changing Zimbalist. A. and Sherman. H.J. 1984. Compcu1ng Japan. 4th edn. Allen & Unwin economy. population growth. the impact of the significance of various economic systems. Focus Is EconJJmIc Systems. Academlc Press West. and the economics of Maoism. laced on managed capitaUst systems. viz .. the Duus. P. (ed) 1990. The Cambridge History ofJapan. ECON210 POLITICAL ECONOMICS lOcp Vol. 6. Cambrtdge UP Text ~nlted states. France. Japan. Holland. Sweden. and the emerging Asia-Pacific economies. Lecturer To be advised Jansen. M.& Rozman. G. 1986.Japanin1ransitlon: Eastman. L.E. 1989. Family. Fields and Ancestors. Microeconomics J (ECONIIO) From Tokugawa to Meyt. Princeton U.P. Oxford UP. References Prerequisite and Macroeconomics I (ECON I I I) Lockwood. W.W. 1970. The Economic Deuelopment References Gregol)'. P .. and Stuart. R.C. 1992. Comparative EconJJmIc Systems. 4th edn. Houghton Mifflin HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week ofJapan. Prtnceton U.P. Elvin. M. 1973. The Pattem of the Chinese Past. ~a.rn1natiOn One examination paper and other Nakane. C.. & Oishi. S. (eds) 1990. Tokugawa Methuen Haltanl. K. 1986. Comparatlue Economic Systems: Organlzattonal and Managerial Perspectives. assessment Japan. TOkyo UP Jones E.L. 1988. Growth Recuning. Oxford uP Prentlce-Hall Content Smith T.C. 1959. The Agrarian Origins of Modem Myers. R.H. 1980. The Chinese Economy. Past and Kohler. H. 1989. Comparative EcononUc Systems. Thts course will examine a range of economic Issues Japan. Stanford U.P. Present. Wadsworth Scott. Foresman and theortes within a poUtical context. Contemporary ECON291) READINGS IN ASIAN lOcp Grove. L. and Daniels. C. (eds) 1984. State and Ward.J.D.S.andWrtght.J.C.G.1977.Anlntroduction policy questions such as the environment. ECON391l ECONOMIC HISTORY U Society in China. Tokyo UP to Market Capitalism. Longman Cheshire unemployment. Income distribution and the role of Lecturer S.RShenoy planning and markets. will be evaluated. EmphasiS ECON292) READINGS IN ASIAN lOcp Zimbalist. A. and Sherman. H.J. 1984. Compcu1ng Is placed upon Ideology. power and conflict tn the Prerequisite /Corequlsite For ECON29 I Is ECON204. ECON392) ECONOMIC HISTORY ill EconJJmIc Systems: A Political-economic Approach. assessment of these issueS. for ECON391 Is ECON304 Lecturer J.R.F1sher AcademiC Press Hours 2 hours per week Prerequisite /Corequlsite For ECON292Is ECON205. References ECON208 COMPARATIVE MODELS AND us Examination Progressive assessment for ECON392 Is ECON305 CASES lOcp Byrt.W.I990.BusinessandGovemmentinA tralia. Hours 2 hours per week Macmillan Content Lecturer J.C.de castro Lopo Deane. P. 1989. The State and the EconJJmIc System: Japanese economic history from about 1600 to the Examination Progressive assessment Prerequisite Microeconomics I (ECON II 0) and An Introduction to the History of PoUttcaI EconJJmy. pertod after 1945 Content Macroeconomics I (ECON I II) OUP Text Modern Chinese Economic History. changes in HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week and 1 hour optional Eatwell. J. and Milgate. M. (eds) 1984. Keynes's Readlngs will be advised economic policy and their implications before and workshop per week EconJJmIcs and the Theory ofValue and Dlstlibutkln. after 1949. 1970. TheEconomlcDevelopmentofJapan.Prtnceton Examination Either a 3 hour paper or progressive Duckworth U.P. Text assessment Fitzgerald. T. 1990. Between Ufe and economics. Smith. T. C. 1959. The Agrarian Origins of Modem Riskin. C. 1987. China's Political Economy. Oxford Content ABC Japan. Stanford U.P. UP This course extends the scope of the analysts carried Galbraith. J. 1977. The Age of Uncertainty. out In ECON20B (Which Is not. however. a ECON206/ ASIAN ECONOMIC lOcp ECON208 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC Hutchinson ECON305 HISTORY m SYSTEMS A lOcp prerequisite) . Hodgson. G. 1984. The Denwcratlc Economy: A New The main emphasis is placed on the examination of Look at Planning. Markels and Power. Penguin Lecturers J.R.Flsher Lecturer J.C.de Castro Lopo the more significant critiques of modem capitalism Prequlsite Microeconomics (ECON II 0) m!I Jennet. C. and Stewart. R. 1990. Hawke and Prerequisites For ECON205 economic Hlstol)' A and the embodiment of those critical Ideas In the Macroeconomics I (ECON I II) Australian Public Policy. Macmillan (ECONI02) or Australian Economic Hlstol)' development of a number of economic systems - Roddick. J 1988. Danoe Latin (ECON lO3) or Microeconomics I (ECON llO) !II!!! HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week and 1 hour optional social democracy. command socialism. market The of Mallons. Macroeconomics I (ECON II I) workshop per week socialism. and labour-managed socialism. American Bureau Capitalism. Socialism and Prerequisites For ECON305. 30 credit points of ExarrUnation Etther a 3 hour examination or schumpeter. J. 1943. Economic History at 200 level. progressive assessment Democracy. Unwin Economics Faculty of " F1vo Faculty of Section Five Economics Subject Desc~ptlon. Social Scle-,c.-, Social Sclanee Subject Descriptions >'

'EVELOPOOt....~ __/:Ec'DN220 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IIA lOcp ECON211 THEORY OF PtlBLIC CHOICE lOcp Content ECON21S PROBLEMS OF ll COUNTRIES lOcp Lecturers D.K.Macdonaid Lecturer J.A. Doeleman The study of market structure, conduct and Lecturer C.W.Stahl and M.A.Hossaln Prerequisite 40 credit points Prerequisites Mlcroeconomlcs I (ECON II 0) 1114 perfonnance. The topics include: extensions to the Macroeconomlcsl (ECONIII) theory of the firm; the role of the large corporation In Prerequisite Microeconomics I (ECON II 0) !!lid HoLUs Two lecture hours per week plus 1 hour tutorial per fortnight Hours 2 lecture hours per week Industry; the Importance of growth and profitability Macroeconomlcs I (ECON II il objecttves; Integration, diversification and merger. EJcanUnatton One 2 hour paper plus progressive Assessment To be advised Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester determinants of market structure (stochastic assessment Ccntent processes, cost condlttons, advertising etc.); Examtnation One 3 hour paper and progreSSive assessment Content This course is analytical In nature and concerned relatlonshlps between structure and market conduct. reasons for government Intervention. Content This course alms to provide students with an with economic principles governing political Introduction to Industrlal relations concepts and R~eren.ces This course commences with a discussion of the behaviour. The theory of public or social choice can tools of analysts in both the International and nature of underdevelopment and the development be viewed as an extension of welfare economics. Clarke. R 1985. Industrfol Economics. Blackwell Australian contexts. Special emphasis will be given Traditionally, welfare economics deals with questions problem. M,\!or topics that follow are: growth. poverty Clarke. R & McGuiness. T. (ed) 1987. The &onomIcs to the origins and historical development of the main of allocation and distribution In the context of and Income distribution; population growth and oj the F'inn. Blackwell Australian Institutions. market Interaction. Related questions can be asked economic developmen t; urbanisation and mtgraUon: where chOice Is detenntned by politlcallnteractlon. Devine. P.J. et al 1985. An Introduction to Industrial agricultural and industrial development: Text Topics Include aspects of conllict theory. of game &onomlcs. 4th edn. Allen & Unwin intemationallabour migration; and environmental Deery. S. and Plowman. D. 1991.AustrallanInduslrial theory. and of voting theory. George. K.D. & Joll. C. 1981.Industrial Organisation. issUes tn developingcountrles. Case studlesmaterlals Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hili from Asia wtll be used extenSively throughout the R~erences Allen & Unwin References course. Bouldlng. K. 1962. C"'lIIlct and DeJense. Harper Marlin. S. 1988. Industrfol Economics. Macmillan Dabscheck. B .• Griffin. G .. & Teicher. J. (eds) 1992. Text Colman. A. 1982. Game Theory and Experimental Shepherd. W.G. 1985. The &anomies oJIndustrial contemporary Australian Industrial Relations. Games, Pergamon Press Organisation. 2nd edn. Prentice-Hail To be advised Longman Cheshire Frey. B.A. 1983. Den1ocratlc&onomlcPollcy. Oxford Scherer. F.M. 1990. IndustrfolMarketStn.tcture and References Macintyre. S. and Mitchell. R (eds) 1989. FoundationS &onomlc Peiformance. 2nd edn. Houghton-Mlffiln Gillis. M. et al. 1983. qf Arbitration. Oxford UP Frohlich. N. & Oppenheimer. J.A. 1978. Modem &onomlcs oj Development Political &anomy. Prentice Hall ECON217 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS B lOcp Norton Turner. I. and Sandercock. L. 1983. In Union is Strength. 3rd edn. Nelson Mueller. D.C. 1979. Public Choioe. Cambridge Getublg. Ismae! and Oshima. Harry T. (eds.) 1991. Lecturers To be advised Towards Full Employment Strategy Jor Accelerated ECON221 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 1m lOcp Olson. M. 1982. The Rise and Decline oj Natioos. Prerequisite Industry economics A (ECON216) Economtc Growth, Asian and Pacific Development Yale UP HOUTS 2 hours per week Centre. Kuala Lumpur Lecturer R.H. Green Schellenberg. J.A. 1982. The Science oj Conflict Prerequisite Industrial Relations IIA (ECON220) &aminatton One 2 hour paper plus an assignment Hughes. Helen (ed.) 1988.AchievingInduslrlalization OUP in East Asia, Cambridge University Press Content Hours 2 lecture hours per week Tullock. G. 1967. TowardsaMathematlcsoJPolUlcs. Meier. a.M. (ed),1989. Leading Issues in &onomlc Examination One 2 hour paper plus progressive This course provides a study of the causes and Ann Arbor Developmen, 5th edn. Oxford. Note: the 4th edn will suggested remedies for the malaise that has been assessment Van den Doel. H. 1979. Democracy and Welfare also be placed In Short Loans said to characterise Australian Industry in recent Content &orwmlcs. Cambridge times. The incentives and Impediments to structural Shand. RT.. (ed.) 1986. OJfFnrmEmploymentin the This course focuses on Australia's conciliation and Weintraub. E.R. 1975. C"'lIIlct and Co-operation in adjustment Within the Australian economy will be Development oj Rural Asia. Volumes I and 2. arbitration system. It covers the structures and &onomlcs. Macmillan examined. Students will be Introduced toAustrailan Canberra: National Centre for Development Studies processes of conclltation and arbitration, the law Jndustrydata sources. The structure and uses of the ECON216 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS A lOcp Todaro. M.P. 1989. &onomlc Development in the governing strikes and tndustrialacUon. the principles ASIC will be examined. Students will be expected to Third World. 4th edn. Longman Cheshire and operation of wages policy and the nature and Lecturers To be advised prepare a research paper and present the findings at World Bank. 1992 and 1993. World Development direction of Industrial relations reform. Prerequisite Microeconomics I (ECON I!O) !!!Ill a class seminar. Report. Oxford University Press Texts Macroeconomlcs I (ECONIII) References United Nations Development Programme. Hwnan Deery. S. and Plowman. D. 1991. AustrailanInduslrial HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week There Is no one set text recommended for purchase. Development Report. 1992 and 1993. Oxford Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw Hili bu t a list of references {mainly Industries Assistance &am1natton One 2 hour paper and progreSSive University Press Creighton. B. and Stewarl. A. 1990. Labour Low: An assessment Commission and Bureau of IndusUy Economics reports and papers) will be provided. Introduction. Federation Press Faculty of SecHon Flv. Economlce Faculty of Secllon Five Economics Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

References Yamamura. K. & Yasuba. Y. 1987. The PolItIcal Include two-sample hypothesiS testing (means and the estimators and approaches to hypothesis testing Dabscheck B. Griffin G and Teicher I (eds) 1992. Economy oj Japan: The Domestic TransJonnation. proportions) and k-sample hypothesis testing (Including LM. LR and Wald tests). Contemporary Australian Industrial Relations. Stanford (analysls-of-variance and Chi· square tests). The Rtiferences Longman Cheshire simple regression model Is extended to the multiple ECON230 INTRODUCTORY lABOUR regression model and the basic assumptions and Hoel. P.G. 1984. Introduction to Mathematical Easson M. and Shaw J. (eds) 1990. TransJorming ECONOMICS lOcp problems ofeconometrics are discussed. HypotheSiS Stattstlcs. WUey IndustJial Relations. Plu to Press Lecturer B.L.J.Gordon testing in the classical general linear model Johnston. J. 1987. Econometric Methods. McGraw­ Ford W .• Hearn. J .• et al (eds) 1987. AuslTallan framework is also covered. Detailed economic Hill Prerequlstle Microeconomics (ECON11O) ~ LabolU Relations: Readings. 4th edn. Macmtllan Macroeconomics I (ECON Ill) appHcattonsarelnvestigated using software packages Judge. G. Hill R Griffiths. W. Lutkepohl. H. Lee. T Mitchell. R and MacIntyre. S. (eds) 1989. Fowtdations such as SHAZAM. MINITAB. GB·STAT and

Maddala. G.S. 1988. Introduction to Ecorwmetrics. imperfect competition and mlcroeconomlc aspects The course Is "debate-oriented" in the sense that Examlnation One 3 hour paper and progressive Macmtllan of distribution theory. Also discussed are confltcting models of economic activity are critically assessment externalities and market failure and the economies Ramanathan. R 1992. Introductory Econometrics compared. The major alternative schools of thought Content with AppUcatiDns. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich of common property resources. are introduced in this context. The course covers theory and polley relating to White. K.J. et al. Shazam Users Reference Manual. Text: The course develops theory as a foundation for foreign exchange markets and exchange rate McGraw-H!I1 Katz. M.L. & Rosen. H.S. 1991. Microeconomics. policy analysis: the effectiveness of fiscal, monetary detenntnation; money; Interest rates and exchange Irwin. and incomes poliCies are considered. In the context rates; fixed exchange rates and foreign exchange ECON243 MATHEMATICAL of Australla's current economic position. intervention; the international monetary system ECONOMICS A lOcp References: Texts: and international macroeconomic policy. Lecturers To be advised Eckert. Ross D. and Leftwich. Richard H. 1988. The Price System and Resource Allocation, 10th edn. Bailey. N.B. & Frtedman. P. 1991. Macroeconomlcs. Text Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods A Dryden Press. Chicago FInandalMarkets. and the Internat/onalSecotr. Irwin To be advised. (ECON 115) Yll Introductory Quantitative Methods ReJerences: B (ECONI16) or Mathematics 103 Maddala. G.S. and Miller. Ellen 1989. ECON30S MACROECONOMIC PLANNING lOcp Microeconomics: Theory and Applications. McGraw­ Okun. A.M. 1981. Prices and Quantities: A Hours 2 lecture hours Lecturer J.C. de Castro Lopo HUl. New York Macroeconomic Analysis. Basis Blackwell. Oxford Examination One 2 hour examination and Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) ..,d Pindyck. Robert S. and Rubinfleld. Daniel L. 1989. Hansen.A.H. 1953.A GukletoKeynes. McGraw-H!I1 progressive assessment Microeconomics. Macmtllan. New York Macroeconomics II (ECON251) and Introductory Ackley.G.1978.Macroeconomlcs:TheoryandPolIcy. Quantitative MethodsA(ECON 115) and Introductory Content Glahe. Fred R and Lee Dwight R. 1981. MacmUlan Quantitative Methods B (ECON 116) This course Is designed prlmarlly to provide an Microeconomics: Theory and Appllcatfons. Harcourt introduction to mathematical tools used in economics Brace Jovanovich. New York ECON306 INTERNATIONAL Hours 2 lecture hours per week and occasional and econometrlcs. The topics dealt with Include ECONOMICS A lOcp workshops for Year IV students Landsburg. Steven E. 1989. PrIce Theory and economic applications of differential and Integral Applications. 2nd edn. Dryden Press. Chicago Lecturer P.J .Stanton &am.inaUon Progressive assessment calculus. the prlnctples of matrix algebra and its Nicholson. Walter 1987• Intermediate Microeconomics Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) and Content application to input/output analysis and Itnear Macroeconomics II (ECON251) programming. and IIsAppUcations. 4th edn. Dryden Press. Chicago This course is essentially an introduction to Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester substantial issues in the theory. design and Texts Tisdell. C.A. 1982. Microeconomics oJMarkets. Wiley. Brlsbane Examination 3 hour exam and progreSSive appitcaUon of macroeconomic policy in planning Chiang. A. 1984. Fundamental Methods oj assessment contexts. Mathematical Economics. McGraw-Hili ECON251 MACROECONOMICS II lOcp Content Emphasis is placed on the logiC. specification and ReJerences Lecturer W F Mitchell and M.J.Watts structure of planning designs. rather than on The theory and analysis of International trade and Archibald. G.C. and Lipsey. RG. 1967. An Prerequisite Macroeconomics I (ECON I II) statistical esUmation. A number of case studies are policy. This covers the role and scope for International Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment oj sUJVeyed. bu t emphasis Is placed on policy planning Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 tutorlal hour per week specialtzation. the gains from trade. optimal trade EcorwmJcs. Wetdenfeld and Nicholson for market economics. including Australia. Examination One 3 hour paper Intervention. the effects of trade at the national and Dowling. E.T. 1967. Mathematics Jor Ecorwmfsls. international levels and the theory of preferential ReJerences Content: Schaum Outline Series trading. Australian illustrations are used wherever Bowles. R.. and Whynes. D.K. 1979. Macroeconomic The broad relationships between the aggregates In possible. Planning. Allen and Unwin ECON250 MICROECONOMICS II lOcp the economy are analysed in this course. The Text Eatwell. J., Milgate. M.• and Newman. P. 1990. Lecturers P.RAnderson.A. Mahmood and C.W.Stahl prlnclpal part of the course Is focused on the Problems oJthe Planned Ecorwmy: the NewPalgrave. determination of the level of economic activity in the To be advised. Prerequisite Microeconomics I (ECONllO) Macmtllan macroeconomy. This focus necessarlly embraces ReJerence Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week the factors which Influence aggregate demand. the Krugman. P and Obstfeld. M. 1991, International ECON309 URBAN ECONOMICS lOcp Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive level of in terest rates. the price level. and the level of Ecorwmlcs. 2nd edn. Harper Collins Lecturer S.N.Jacobl assessment employment. Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) lm!I Content: As such the complex Interactions between the ECON307 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICSB lOcp Macroeconomics II (ECON25I) This section covers some specialised microeconomic product. money and labour markets are the key Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester topics not covered in Microeconomics I. The follOWing areas of study. This analysts Is complicated by the Lecturers To be advised recognition that the Australian economy Is open subjects are amongst those considered: Theorles of Prerequisite International Economics A (ECON306) Assessment To be determined production and consumption: Paretlan optimality and htghly dependent on the International economy. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester conditions. market power. special aspects of The course discusses exchange rate detenninatlon and the factors influencing the domestic economy. Faculty of Flculty of Section FIve Economic. Section Five Economics Soclll Science SubJect De.crlptlon. Social Science SubJect Descriptions

Content these determinants might be altered by poUcy. Topics Other References Other References This course provides a survey ofthe economic Issues Included are: factor mobfllty; regional problems; Baumol. W.J. and Oates. W.E. 1979. Economics. Browning. E.K. & Browning. J.M. 1983. arising within the particular framework of the urban regional growth; techniques of regional analysIs EnvlronmentalPoilcyand the QualityofUfe. Prentice MicroeconomicTheoryandAppllcations. Little. Brown or metropolitan environment with emphasis on the (e.g. export base models. shift-share. Input-output Hall Caves. R. eta!. 1988. Australian Industry: Structure. majorcontemporarysocto-economlclssues: poverty. mooels. econometric models); contemporarypattems Common. M. 1988. Environmental and Resource Conduct and PerJormnnce. Prentice-Hall crime. congestion, sprawl. slum development. and of regional change in Australia: an introduction to Economics: An Introduction. Longman regional questions in other contexts; policy Issues. Peterson. H.C. & Lewis. W.C .. ManagerialEconomics. decl1ne In the quality ofUfe. The course also Includes Harrts. S. & Taylor. G. 1982. Resource Development Macmllian discussion of the follOwing topics: the relation of References and the FUture ofAustralian Society. CRES cities to the national and regional economy; central Plndyck. S.R.. and Rublnfeld. L.D. 1989. Armstrong. H. &Taylor.J. 1987. ReglonalEconomlcs Hartwick. J.M. and Olemler. N.D. 1986. The Microeconomics. Macmillan place theory and location analysts; housing and and Policy. Phfllp Allan land use theory; urban economic development and Economics ofNatural Resource Use. Harper and Row Salvatore. D. 1993. Managerial Economics in Global Chisholm. M. 1990. Regions in Recession and growth; urban SOCiology; urban planning; public Johansson. P. 1987. The Economic Theory and Economy. McGraw-HUI Resurgence. Unwin Hyman poUcy and welfare. Measurement ofEnvironmental Ben<:ftJs. Cambridge Scherer. F.M. & Ross. D. 1990. Industrial Market Hoover, E.M. and Giarratanl. F. 1984,Anlntroduction References Unlverslty Press. Cambridge Structure and Economic Performance. Houghton to Regional economics. Knopf Blsh. R.L. & Nourse. H.O. 1975. Urban Economics Kneese. A.V. and Sweeney. J.L. (eds) Handbook of Millin Co. Richardson. H.W. 1979, Regional Economics, and Policy Analysis. McGraw·Hill Natural Resource and Energy Economics. North University of llInols Press Holland ECON313 GROWTH AND Brown. D.M. 1974.lntroductlonro Urban Economics. FLUCTUATIONS lOcp Brown. A.J. & Burrows, E.M. 1977. Reglonal Academic Press Seneca. J.J. & Taussig. M.K. 1984. environmental Economic Problems. Allen & Unwin economics. Prentice-Hall Lecturers A.C.Oakley. W.F.Mltchell Edel. M. & Rothenburg. J. 1974. Readings in Urban Gore. C. 1984. Regions in Question: Space. Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) and Economics. Macmtllan Simon. J. 1981. The Ultimate Resource. Martin Development theory and Regional Policy. Methuen Robertson Macroeconomics II (ECON251) Hirsch. W.Z. 1973. Urban Economic Analysis. Butler. G.J.& Mandeville. T.D. 1981. Regional Hotus 2 lecture hours for one semester McGraw·Hlll World Commission on Environment and Economics: An Australian Introduction, ugP Development 1987. Our Common FUture. Oxford Assessment One 2 hour paper and progressive Leahy. W.H .. McKee. D.L .. & Dean. R.D. 1970. University Press assessment Urban Economics. Free Press ECON311 ENVlRONMENTALECONOMICSlOcp Content Neutze. M. 1978. Australian Urban Policy. Allen & Lecturer J A Doeleman. M T Gordon. C W Stahl ECON312 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS lOcp The course Is devoted to a study of the various Unwin Lecturer A. Mahmood Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) and dimensions of the evolution and 'motion' of the Perloff. H.S. & Wingo. L. 1968. Issues in Urban Macroeconomics II (ECON251) Prerequisite Microeconomics 11 (ECON250) IIIll capitalist economic system through time. Itconslders Economics. John Hopkins UP Hotus 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Macroeconomics II (ECON251) explanations ofcapital accumulation and structural Richardson. H. 1978. Urban Economics. Dayden Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive Hours -2 lecture hours per week for one semester change. real economic growth and fluctuations in Schreiber. Gatons & Clemmer 1971. Economics of assessment Examination One 3 hour paper and progressive growth rates. Specific topiCS will Include expanding reproduction and balanced growth, capital Urban Problems. Houghton·Mlllln Content assessment accumulation and income distribution. short-tenn ECON310 REGIONAL ECONOMICS lOcp Topics cover economic analysis of pollution (inclUding Content fluctuations, and the role of Innovations and global warming). of natural resource exploitation. of Lecturer M.T. Gordon This Is an applied microeconomics course involving technological change In growth and fluctuations. conservation and ofpopulation growth. Externalities. the application of microeconomics to managerial References Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) and cost-benefit techniques and discounttngare amongst decision making. The topics covered Include: Macroeconomics 11 (ECON251) the conceptual tools common to these topics. econom.c optimization. demand theory. production Hams. D.J. 1978. CapltalAccunw/atlonandlnoome Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Furthennore. the course discusses issues of life and cost theory, market structure. forecasting. linear DIstribution. Routledge style and economic growth. both In the Australian Examination Progressive Assessment programming. risk and uncertainty. regulation. and Kalecld. M. 1971. Selected Essays on the Dynamics context and international setting. capital budgeting. of the Copltallst Economy. Cambridge UP Content Main Reference Texts Main References: Kregel. J. 1971. Rate of Proflt. Dlstrtbutlon and The focus of this course Is the region as a unit of Growth: n.vo Views. Macmillan economic activity and. In particular. the region as a Pearce. D.W. & Turner. R.K. 1990. Economics of Pappas. J.L. & Hlrschey. M. 1990. Managerial sub-unit of the national economy. The coursewtll be Natural Resources and the Envlrorunent. HalVester Economics, Dryden Press Lowe. A. 1976, The Path oj Economic Growth. Wheatsheaf concerned with the principles underlying the Peppers. L.C. & Bans. D.G. 1987. Managertal Cambridge UP formation of regional units, wtth the functioning of Tletenberg. T. 1988. Environmental & Natural Economics. Prentice Hall Oakley. A. 1990. &humpeter's Theory of Capitalist regional economies. and with Investigating the Resource Economics, 2nd edn. Scott Foresman & Co. Motion. Edward Elgar determinants of regional growth or decltne and how Faculty of Section Flv. Economics Faculty of Section Flv. Economics Social SCMmce Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Pastnettl, L, 1974, Growth and Income Distribution, Content ECON317 ECONOMIC DOCTRINES AND ECON31S ECONOMIC DOCTRINES AND METHODS A lOcp METHODS B lOcp Cambrtdge UP The effects ofgovernmenttnterventlon In the economy Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon Lecturers B.L.J. Gordon, A.C.Oakley ECON314 TOPICS IN ECONOMIC through the budget and inter-governmental fiscal DEVELOPMENT lOcp relationships are examined. Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) !II! Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) m Macroeconomics II (ECON25I) Macroeconomics II (ECON25I) Lecturers A. Hossain & B McFarlane At the microeconomic level. there Is an analysIs of the effects of tax and expenditure pollcles on, In Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Advisory Prerequisite Problems of Developing particular. community welfare and incentives. At Examination One 2 hour paper, plus progressive Assessment Examination plus progressive Countries (ECON218) the macroeconomic level. aggregate models are used assessment assessment Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) and to analyse the relation of fiscal polley to other Macroeconomics II (ECON25I) economic pollcles for stability and growth. Content Content Hours 2 lecture hours per week References Study of earlier economic thought has a number of The course Is concerned with leading contrtbutions rationales. These Include the opportunity for to Economics during the nineteenth and early Examination One 3 hour paper and progressive Brown, C.V. & Jackson, P.M. 1982, Public Seeler increased awareness of the ways in which major decades of the twentieth century. Topics Include: assessment EconomJcs. Martin Robertson economists Integrated their Ideas. and the the development ofBrltlsh economic orthodoxy from Content Buchanan,J.M. & Flowers, M.R ThePublIcFlnances, opportunity to judge the present scope and current David Ricardo to Alfred Marshall; the general Topics include dual economy models. mobilisation hwln preoccupations of professional Economics from the equtltbrtum economics of Leon Walras: the political of resources. labour migration. industrialisation Groenewegen, P.D. 1990, Public Finance tnAustralla: perspectives of Its former dimensions. economy of Karl Marx, Including a study of hls strategies in East and Southeast Asia. and the Theory and Practice, Prentice-Hall In this course we are concerned With the emergence methodology, theory of value. production and distribution theories; and 'laws of motion' of the Green Revolution. planning and the market in Houghton, RW. (ed) 1970, Public Finance, Penguin of EconomiCS as a distinct field of Inquiry. and with developing countries; models for accelerated growth. the types of economic analysis which preceeded capitalist system; and. Joseph Schumpeter's theory Johansen, L. 1965, PublIcEconomlcs, North Holland of economic development and business cycles in the References that emergence. A major focus Is the thought of Mlshan, E.J. 1982, Cost-Benefit Analysis, Allen & Adam Smith (1723-90) who Is generally regarded as capitalist economic system. Arlff, M. & Hill, H. 1985, Export-Oriented Unwin the founder of classical political economy. Text Industrialisation: The ASEAN Experience, Allen & Mercantilism and Physiocracy, the economics of Unwin Musgrage,RA.&P.B.1984,PublIcFlnancetnTheory Blaug, M. 1985, Economic Theory InRetrospec~ 4th and Practice, McGraw-Hill which were rejected by Smith. are also surveyed. edn, Cambrtdge, UP Booth. A. 1988. Agricultural Development in The remainder of the course deals with the evolu tion Indonesia. Allen & Unwin Shoup, C.S. 1969, Public Finance, Weldenfeld & Spiegel, H.W. 1991, The GrowthofEconomicThought, Nicolson of economic analysts from the writings of the Greek GUlis, M" Perkins D. et al. 1983, economics of philosopher ArIstotle to the seventeenth century. Rtiferences Development. Norton ECON316 AUSTRALIAN PUBLIC Texts carver, T. (ed) 1975, Karl Marx: Texts on Method, FINANCE lOcp Hughes, H. 1988, Achieving Industrialisation In East Spiegel, H.W. 1991, The GrowthofEconornlcThought, Blackwell Asia, Cambrtdge UP Lecturer P.R.Anderson 3rd edn, Duke UP Hollander, S. 1987, Classical economics, Blackwell Kalecki, M. 1976, Essays on Deueloplng economies, Prerequisite Public Finance (ECON315) Prtbram, K. 1983, A History ofEconomic Reasoning, Howard, M.andKtng,J. 1975, ThePoUticalEconomy Harvester Press Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester John Hopkins UP of Marx. Longman McFarlane. Bruce 1991. Other Economic Systems. Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive References Marx, K. Capital, volumes I, 11 and 1II Oxford UP, Melbourne assessment Lowry, S" Todd (ed), 1987, Pre-Classical Economic Oakley, A. 1990, Schumpeter's Theory of Capitalist Meier, G.M. (ed) 1988, Leading Issues In Economic Content Thought. Kluwer Motion, Elgar Deuelopmen~ 5th edn, Oxford UP The first part of the course places a heavy emphasis Lowry, S.T. 1987, The Archaeology of Economic O'Brten, D.P. The Classical Economists, Oxford UP Todaro, M.P. 1988, economic Deuelopment In the on the economics of taxation in the Australian Ideas, Duke, UP Schumpeter, J.A. 1951. The Theory of EconomIc Third World. 4th edn, Longman Cheshire context. Thts Is followed by a segment which Gordon, B. 1975, economic Analysis Before Adam Deuelopme~ Harvard UP) ECON315 PUBLIC FINANCE lOcp discusses Australtan public finance from a Smith, Macmillan macroeconomic point ofview. The course is rounded Schumpeter, J.A. 1939, Business Cycles, McGraw­ Lecturer To be advised off with an examination ofvartous specialised aspects Langholm, O. 1992, EconomIcs In the Medieual Hill Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) ~ of Australian pubUc finance. Schools, BrtlI Schumpeter,J.A. 1959, HisfDryofEconcm/cAnalysls, Macroeconomics II (ECON251) References Hollander, S. 1973, The Economics ofAdam Smith. Oxford Heinemann Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester To be advised Examinat10n One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment Faculty of Section Flv. Economics Faculty of Section Flv. Economic. Social Science Subject Descriptions Socia' Science Subject Descriptions

ECON319 ECONOMIC DOCTR1NE8 AND HOlUS 2 lecture hours per week examined in detaU.ln particular. the interrelationship Niland. J. and Clarke. O. (eds) 1991. Agendajor METHODS C lOcp Examination One 3 hour paper between changes in monetary poUey and changes in Change: An International Analysis oj Industrial Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon. R.H. Green the structure of the financial system are considered. Relations In JransiUon, Allen & Unwin Content The Impact of theoretical developments Is also Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) IIIlI References This course begins with an examination of the highlighted. Macroeconomics II (ECON251) controversy concerning the definition of money. and Bean. R 1987. Comparative Industrial Relations Text Hotus 2 lecture hours per week for one semester proceeds to a brief overview of the financial system. DoerInger. P. (ed) 1981. Industrial Relations In To be advised Examfnation One 2 hour paper. plus progressive The classical. Keynesian and Monetarist theories of International Perspecttve assessment the role of money In the economy are examined and References Peetz. D .. Preston. A.. and Docherty. J. (eds) compared. and their polley implications are analysed. Content Davis. K. and Lewis. M. (eds) 1981. AuslTalfan Workplace Bargaining In the International Context. Topics such as the supply and demand for money Monetary Economics. Longman Cheshire Federal Department of Industrial Relations The aim of this course Is to examine the background and the relationship of the real and monetary sectors to certain of the currents in modem economic of the economy are considered in depth. Hicks. John R. & Wheller. Denise (eds) 1990. Money ECON326 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS mB lOcp debate. One focus is the evolution of the Austrian and GapUal Markets In AuslTalia, Harcourt Brace Theories of Interest rates. such as the loanable Lecturer D.K.Macdonald school of economics. including a treatment of the Jovanovich funds approach and the liquidity preference theol)'. Prerequisite Industrial Relations liB (ECON22 J) major works of the first generation -Menger. von are studied and alternative theorles of the tenn Hunt. B .. & Terry. C. 1993. FInancial Instrwnents Wieser. and Bohm-Bawerk - plus some of the leading structure of Interest rates are examined. A monetary and Markets. Thomas Nelson Australia Hours Two lecture hours per week ideas of their successors. Including Misesand Hayek model of the interest rate Is also developed. Juttner. D. Johannes 1990. Financial Markets, Examination One 2 hour paper plus progressive A second focus is the development of the thought of Addltlonal topics such as the monetary dynamics of Interest Rates and Monetary Economtcs. 2nd edn. assessment John Maynard Keynes. following through from such Longman Cheshire early works as The Economic ConRequeDCet of hyper-tnflatlon and the eXamination of the roles of Content the Peace to the General Theory and Its aftennath. monetary factors in both exchange ratesand balance Juttner. D. Johannes 1992. International Finance Building on the foundations laid in the earlier There is also treatment of the role of the 'surplus' of payments detennination. are also Included. The and Global FInancial Markets. 2nd edn. Longman industrial relations courses, this course will focus approach to value and distribUtion based on modem course ends with an examination of the neoclassical Cheshire on recent developments and contemporary issues Interpretations of classical economics and the monetary growth models. Moore. D. et aI. 1988. FInancial Institutions and such as award restructuring. enterprise bargaining. relationship to Keyne's prinCiple of effective demand. References Markets. Serendlp Publications wages polley. occupational health and safety and disadvantaged groups In the labour market. References To be advised. Sherris. Michael 1991. Money and Capital Markets: Prldng Yield and AMlysis. Allen & Unwin Text Spiegel. H.W. 1991. The Growth oJEconomicThought. ECON323 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 3rd edn. Duke UP AND POLICY lOcp ECON325 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IDA IOcp DeeI)'. S. and Plowman. D. 1991. AuslTaltan Industrial Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw-HUI . Blaug. M. 1985. Economic Theory In Retr05pect 4th Lecturer P.R.Anderson. M.A.Hossa!n Lecturer R.H. Green edn. Cambridge UP References Prerequisite MonetaI)' Theol)' (ECON322) Prerequisite Industrial Relations liB (ECON221) Fitzgibbons. A. 1988. Keynes's Vision. Clarendon Dufty. N. and Fells. R 1989. DynamicsoJIndustrial Hours 2 lecture hours per week Hotus 2 lecture hours per week Relations In Australia, Prentice Hall Schumpeter. J.A. 1959. HistDry oJEconomicAMlysis. Oxford Examination One 3 hour paper Examination One 2 hour paper plus progressive Dabscheck. B .. Griffin. G .. & Teicher. J. 1992. assessment Eatwell. J. and Mllgate. M. (eds) 1984. Keynes's Content Contemporary AuslTallan Industrial Relations. Economics and the Theory oJValue and Distribution, Thtscourse examines the Australian financial system Content Longman Cheshire Duckworth in detaU. considering the main financiallnstitutlons This course covers International and comparative ECON330 TIlE ECONOMICS OF Llttiechlld. S .. (ed.) 1990. Austrian Economics. 3 and markets. The causes of. and effects of. the major industrial relations. In particular. It compares the EMPLOYMENT vols. Elgar changes which have occurred in the post World War framework. conduct and perfonnance of industrial AND UNEMPLOYMENT lOcp II period are considered. Special focus Is placed on relations In a number of countries and draws Wood.J.C .• (ed.) 1983.JohnMaynardKeynes:Critical recent development In financing in Australia. but implications for Australia. ThecountIies to be studied Lecturers B. Hughes Assessments. Vol. 2. Croom Helm aspects oflnternational finance and global financial Include the United States. Britain. Gennany. France. PrerequisUes Introductory Labour EconomiCS O·Donneli. R 1989. Keynes' Philosophy. Economics markets are also reviewed. Italy. Sweden. Canada. New Zealand. Japan and (ECON230) and Microeconomics I! (ECON250) and and Politics. Macmlilan A second main theme of the course Is the study of South Korea. Macroeconomics II (ECON25J). This course Is also available to students who have passed the old Australian monetary policy. The main changes that Texts ECON322 MONETARY THEORY IOcp ECON206 or ECON207. have occurred in relation to the nature and Bamber. G. and Lansbul)'. R (eds) 1993. International Lecturers P.R. Anderson and M.A. Hossain HolUS One 2 hour lecture per week effectiveness of monetary policy (and broader and Comparative Industrial Relations. Allen & Unwin Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) Yll financial policies) pursued by the Australian EXamination End of semester examination and Macroeconomics II (ECON251) authorities during the post World War II period are progressive assessment. FlICulty of hetlO" Fiv. Economics FoCUltyol s.cllonFl.o Economics Social Science Subject DelCrlptlons Social Science Subject OelCrlptlona

Content modelling) and topics in choice of functional form. ECON342 APPLIED ECONOMETRICS II IOcp Content This course covers topiCS related to labour market dummy Variables, structural change, GeneraUsed Lecturers To be advised This course is designed to extend the application of adjustments between the status of employment, Least Squares, autocorrelation. heteroscedasticlty, Prerequtslte Applied Econometrics I(ECON242) (or mathematical tools used In economics and unemployment and not In the labour force, with multicolltnearlty, errors in variables and stochastic econometrics. The topics dealt with include the regressors. Econometrics I (ECON241) conditional on the special reference to the Beveridge Curve. approval of the Lecturer In Charge) soluUonofftrstorder. second order and simultaneous Text Students are expected to complete an applied difference and differential equations and their econometrics project using econometrics packages Hours 2 lecture hours. one tutorial hour economic appUcations, game theory, revision of Elliot. R.F. Labour Economics: A Comparatlve Text. SHAZAM and PC-GIVE and the dX database. Examination One 2 hour examination and linear programming and introduction to non-linear McGraw-H!ll References progressive assessment programming. References Doornick. J.A. & HendIy. D.F. 1992. PC-GIVE V7 Content Text A list of references will be distributed in the first ReJerence Manual. Oxford Further testing of applied econometric models Is Chiang. A. 1984. Fundamental Methods oj lecture. Judge. G .. Carter H!ll. R.. Griffiths. W.. Lutkepohl. covered, including distributed lags. diagnostic Mathematical Economics. McGraw -Hill ECON33I CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN H. & Lee. T.C. 1988. Introduction to the Theory and checking, model selection and specification, References LABOUR ECONOMICS IOcp Practice oj Econometrics. Wiley econometric forecasting. time sertes analysis and simultaneous equation models (with spectal reference Hoel. P.G. 1974. Finite Mathematics and Calculus Lecturers M. Watts Johnston. J. 1984. Econometric Methods. 3rd edn. to Australian models). Extensive use Is made of with ApplicatiDns k> Business. Wiley Prerequisites Introductory Labour Economics McGraw-H!ll SHAZAM. PC-GIVE and the dX data base. Holden. J. and Pearson. A.W. 1983. Introductory (ECON230) and Microeconomics II (ECON250) I!IlI Mathematics Jor Economists, Macmillan Maddala. G.S. 1988. Introduction to Econometrics. References Macroeconomics II (ECON251). The course Is also Macmlllan Brown W.S. 1991. Introducing Econometrics. West Horadam. E.M. 1983. Pr1nciples oJMathematicsJor available to students who have passed the old Plndyck. R.S. and Rubinfeld. D.L. 1991. Econometric Economists. Angus and Robertson ECON206 or ECON207. Publishing Co. Models and Economic Forecasts. McGraw-H!ll Intriliqator. M.D. 1971. Mathematical Optimisation Hours One two hour lecture per week Dotl. J.L. and Adibi. E. 1988. EconometricAnalysis. Ramanathan. R 1992. Introductory Econometrics Prentice-Hall and Economic Theory. Prentice-Hail Examination End of semester examination and with Applications. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich Theil. H .. Boot,J.C.G. and Kloek. T. 1965. Operations progressive assessment. Holden. K. Peel. D.A. and Thompson J.L. 1991. White. K.J. et aI. SHAZAM Users ReJerence Manual. Economic Forecasting: An Introduction, Cambridge Research and Quantitative Economics :AnI!lementary Content McGraw-HUl University Press Introduction. McGraw-H!Il This course will examine Issues arising from the ECON34 I ECONOMETRICS III IOcp Gujaratl. D.N. 1988. Basic Econometrics. McGraw­ R,iferences functioning of the Australian labour market, with a H!ll Same as for Applied Econometrics [ (ECON242) parttcular emphasis on theoretical analysIs and Lecturers To be advised policy fonnulation. Topics Include labour market Prerequtslte Econometrics II (ECON340) Lott. W.F.. & S.C. Ray 1992. Applied Econometrics ECON350 PIlILOSOpmCAL ISSUES Problems wUhDataSets, HarcourtBraceJovanovich segregation and wage Inequality, inflation and Hours 2 lecture hours plus one tutorial hour IN ECONOMICS IOcp unemployment and the Impact of enterprise Maddala. G.S. 1992, Introduction to Ecorwmetrtcs, Examinations One 2 hour examination plus Lecturers S.N.Jacobi. A.C. Oakley bargaining. Macmtllan progressive assessment Hours 2 hour lecture per week for one semester References PlndyckR.S. and Rubinfeld. D.L. 1991. Econometric Content Assessment Written assessments; details to be Models and Economic Forecasts, 3rd edn, McGraw­ A list of references will be distributed in the first advised lecture. Topics tn stngle equation modelltng include Hill specification errors, distributed lags and Content Ramanathan. R. 1992. Introductory Econometrics ECON340 ECONOMETRICS II IOcp expectations, qualitative dependent Variables, Box­ with Applications, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich This course will Critically examine the follOwing Lecturers To be advised Jenkins methods. unit roots and cotntegratlon. major Issues: ECON343 MATHEMATICAL Prerequtsite Econometrics I (ECON241) Topics In simultaneous equation modelling include What are the appropriate criteria for demarcating Identification, recursive systems, SURE. 2SLS and ECONOMICSB IOcp Hours 2 lecture hours plus one tutorial hour science from non-science?; what are the appropriate 3SLS and forecasttng. Lecturers To be advised criteria for demarcating 'hard' science from 'soft' Examination One 2 hour examination plus Students are expected to complete an applied Prerequtsite Microeconomics II (ECON250) IIDd science, or natural science from social science?; progressive assessment econometrics project using econometrics packages Macroeconomics II (ECON251) and Mathematical whatclatmscan economics make for being a science?; Content SHAZAM and PC-GIVE and the dX database. Economics A (ECON243) and wbat methodological alternatives are available for economics relative to these criteria? This course In econometric theory Includes a Texts Hours 2 Lecture hours discussion ofeconometric methodology (emphasising The Investigation of these Issues wtll Involve As for Econometrics II (ECON340) Exwnination One 2 hour paper and progressive general to specific compared to specific to general consideration of the follOwing topics: an overview of assessment the major positions and debates In the phHosophyof Section Five EconolTllcl Faculty of s.ctlon Flv. Economic. Subject DeKrlptlonl Social Science Subject Description.

science during the 20th century; a review of the ~n Final examination and progreSSive taken, subject to approval from the Head of the Toplcsoffered by the DepartmentofHlstory. philosophical foundations of econometrics from a assessment Department of Economics. Management or Sociology and approved by variety of perspectives; the concept of rationality the Head of the Department of EconomiCS; Content ECON404 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IV 40cp and human agenL)" in economic decision-making, a and An extension and development of topics In applied ECON405 40cp discussion of selected major phHosophlcalissues in c) Aresearch theslsofapproximateJy20.000words contemporary economic thought. macroeconomic theory and poUcy that were covered Full-time candidates will enrol In ECON404 and in Macroeconomics II. ECON405. SUBJECTS AVAILABLE ONLY TO HONOURS References References Part-tlme candidates will enrol In ECON4041n the STUDENTS BJaug. M. 1980. The Methodology oj Economics. first year and ECON405 tn the second year. Cambridge UP To be advlsed ECONOMETRICS IV 20cp It I. recommended that potential Honour. Lecturer To be advlsed Caldwell. B. 1990. Beyond Positivism. 2nd edn. ECON401 ECONOMICS IV 40cp .tudent. conoult with the Head of Department Allen & Unwin ECON402 40cp towards the end of the yeu prior to that in which Prerequisites Requirements for Economics IV enrolment and Econometrics III Chalmers. A 1979. What is this Thing calledScience? Full-time candidates will enrol In ECON40 1 and they intend to enrol. Unl of gld Press ECON402. Prerequisites As llsted In Schedule (refer to Faculty Hours 2 lecture hours per week for two semesters Hollis. M. 1977. Models oj Man. Cambridge UP Part-time candidates will enrol In ECON4011n the of Economics & Commerce Handbook) Examination 1\vo 2 hour papers Lowe.A 1977. OnEconomicKnow/edge. M.E. Sharpe first year and ECON402 in the second year. Entry into these subjects reqUires the written Content Inc. It I. recommended that potential Honours approval ofthe Head of the DepartmentofEconomlcs. This honours course builds upon the single equation, Machlup. F. 1978. Methodology oj Economics and .tudenu consult with the Head of Department Content simultaneous equation modelling and time series Other Social Sciences. Academic Press to.... ds the end of the yeu prior to that in which modelling techniques introduced In Econometrics they intend to enrol. Students may choose their program in accordance Wagner. H. 1983. Phenomenology oJConsdousness with the foJlowing guldellnes and with the approval Ill. and SocIology oJthe Life World. Unl of Alberta Press Prerequlsiles As llsted In Schedule. (refer to of the Head of Department of Economics. Each student Is expected to complete a major applled Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook) For the students in BEc: econometrics project using packages such as ECON360 MICROECONOMICS III lOcp with the general reqUirement that candidates have SHAZAM. PC-GIVE. PC-FIML. RATS and dX. achieved a credit or better average In their degree a) Industrial Relations Theory and Pollcy; and Lecturers P J C Stanton References studies. This requirement may be waived at the Prerequlsile Microeconomics II (ECON250) b) Either Macroeconomic Analysis or discretion of the Head of Department. Mtcroeconomtc Analysts; and Challen. D. W. & Hagger. AJ. 1983. MacroerorwmelJ1c Hours 2 lecture hours per week plus 1 seminar hour Systems Construction. Validation and Applications. Entry to these subjects requires thewrttten approval per fortnight cJ 1\vo of the follOwing; Macmlllan of the Head of the Department of Economics . Examination Final examination and progressive Labour Economic III Dhrymes, P. 1970, Econometrics, Statistical Content assessment Contemporary Issues tn Industrial Relations FoWldations and Applications. Harper & Row Content Students are reqUired to take 6 semester subjects and to submit a research essay not to exceed 10.000 Workplace Industrial Relations Engle. RF .• & Granger. C. W.J. et aJ. 1991. Long-Run This course deals with topics in applied words. Any Economics IV topic Economic Relationships -Readings in Cointegratlon. microeconomlc analysis. Students are encouraged Oxford UP Subjects Topics offered by the DepartmentofHlstory. to use the theory and tools they have acqUired to Management or SOCiology and approved by Fishman. O.S. 1969. Spectral Methods in Students may choose from subjects and topics assess and question the rationale, aims and likely the Head of the Department of Economics; Econometrics, Harvard UP currently offered at the third and fourth year level by effects of government policy In selected topic areas, and Granger. C.W.J. 1990. Modelling Economic Serles. using an economic perspective. The policy areas the Department of Economics. d) A research thesis of approximately 20.000words Oxford vary from year to year according to the research Topics offered at the fourth year level Include: Interests of the lecturers. For students enrolled In BCom. and BA: Harvey. AC.. The Econometric Analysis oj Time Econometrics IV Serles. Oxford PhHlp Allan References a) Industrial Relations Theory and Polley; and Macroeconomic AnalySIS Holden. K.. Peel. D.A. and Thompson. J.L. 1990. To be advlsed. b) Three of the foJlowing: Microeconomlc Analysts Economic Forecasting: An Introduction, Cambridge ECON361 MACROECONOMICS ID lOcp Labour Economics III Labour Economics III Hood. W.C. & Koopmans. T.C .. StudlesinEconometTic Contemporary Issues In Industrial Relations Lecturer B.Hughes Issues in Australian Economic History Method. WHey (ECON504 (MBA)) Prerequisite Macroeconomics II (ECON251) Special Topic A Intrillgator. M.D .. Econometric Models. Techniques Workplace Industrial Relations (ECON505 and Applications. North -Holland Hours 2 lecture hours per week plus one seminar Special Topic B (MBA)) hour per fortnight Judge. G .. Griffiths. Hlll. W. et al .. The Theory and Addttlonally. up to 2 semester units from suitable Any Economic IV topic Practice oj Econometrics. Wlley programs offered by other Departments may be Economics Foeulty of SectIon Ave Economics Faculty of Section Flv. Social ScJence Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Klein. L.R et a1 .. Econometric GamIng. Macmillan Content Content Examination One 3 hour examination and progressive assessment Maddala. G.S. 1977. Econometrics. McGraw-Hill Microeconomlc theol)' Is developed with polley This course will analyse the principal theoretical perspectives on the employment relationship. on Content Mallnvaud. E. 1970. Stat!st!cal Methods of applications in m1nd. Toplcstnc1ude: recent advances trade unionism and on management and wtll relate Econometrics. North-Holland In demand and production theol)'. equillbrtum In this course different theoretical approaches to theoriesofmarketsand the correspondence principle, them to policy prescriptions at both the macro and explaining the Incidence and persistence of Mills. T.C. 1991. TIme Series Techniques for Parettan opttmality. market failure Including mJcro levels. unemployment In Western Economies are critlcally Economists. Cambridge UP decreasing costs. uncertainty. second-bestso1utions. References assessed. Particular attention Is paid to the Post P1ndyck. RS. & Rublnfeld. D.L. 1991. Econometric recent developments tn oligopoly theory. an Keynesian. New Keynesian and New Classical To be advised. Models and Economic Forecasts. McGraw-Hill examJnation of variations with market structure. perspectives. Reference is also made to relevant Theil. H .. PrInciples of Econometrics. North-Holland resources allocation over time. implications of ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN empirical literature. uncerta1ntiy and learning for economic behaviour ECONOMIC HISTORY lOcp References MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS IOcp and planning. and various topics tn cost-benefit Lecturers J.R. Fisher To be advised Lecturer W.F. Mitchell analysis. Prerequisites Requirements for Honours enrolment Prerequisfte Requirements for Honours enrolment. References SPECIAL TOPIC A IOcp HolUs 2 lecture hours per week for one semester including Microeconomics 111 (ECON360) and No single text Is suitable and a full reading list will SPECIAL TOPIC B lOcp Macroeconomics 111 (ECON361) be supplied. Background texts of relevance Include: Examination ProgreSSive assessment Lecturer To be advised HolUS 2 lecture hours per week for one semester and Becker. G. 1971. Economic Theory. Knopf Content 1 seminar hour per week for one semester Prerequisite Requirements for Honours enrolment Ferguson. C.E. 1972. Mlcroeronomlc Theory. Irwin The nature and problems of the contemporary &:amination Sixty per cent tn fonnal examination, Australian economy can only be understood through HolUS Two lecture hours per week Henderson. J .M. & Quandt. RE. 1980. MIcroec<>nomlc forty per cent tn essays/seminars the study of its historical development. Accordingly EKamtnation To be advised Theory. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill this course provides an ovelView of Australian content Content Horowitz. I. 1970. Decision Making and Theory ofthe economic growth during the past century with The course examines the historical evolution of FInn. Holt Rinehart & WInston particular emphasis on the pattern of booms and The subjects covered by the Special Topic A and contemporary macroeconomic theory and current Special Topic B vary from year to year. Details for Intrtligator. M.D. 1971. Mathematical Optimization slumps. structural adjustment and the changing issues in macroeconomic policy. 1994 may be obtained from the Head of Department and Economic Theory. Prentice-Hall role of government In the economy. References at the time of program approval. Katzner. D. 1988. Walrasian Economics. Addison­ Text Ar~. V. 1992. Australian MacroeconomlcPoltcy Ina Wesley Maddock. R and McLean. I.W. (eds) 1987. The changing World Environment. Allen and Unwin Ng. Y.K. 1979. Welfare Economics. Macmillan Australian Economy In the Long Run. Cambridge UP ChIck. V. 1983. MacroeconomlcsAfterKeynes. Philip Malinvaud. E. 1972. Lectures on Mlcroeronomlc References Allan. Oxford Theory. North-Holland Butlln. N.G .. Barnard A. and Pincus. J.J. 1972. Coddington. A. 1976. Keynesian Economics: the Koutsoylannls, A. 1982. Non·Prlce Decisions. InvestrnentlnAustraJianEconomlcDevelopment 1861- Searchfor FIrst Prtnciples. Allen and Unwin. London Macmtllan 1900. Australian National UP LeiJonhufvud. A. 1971. Keynes and the Classics. Samuelson. P.A. 1947. Foundations of Economic Builln. N.G. Barnard. A. and Pincus. J.J. 1982. Institute of Economic Affairs. London Analysis. HalVard UP Goverrvnent and Capitalism. Allen & Unwin Freedman, R 1973. Marx on Economtcs. Penguin. Tisdell. C. 1972. Microeconomics: The Theory of Chapman. B. (ed) 1989. Australian EconomIc Growth. Hannondsworth Economic AUocation. Wiley Macmillan Thurow. L. 1983. Dangerous Currents: The State of Varian. A. 1984. Mtcroeronomlc Analysis. Norton Duncan. T. & Fogarty. J. 1984. Australia and Economics. Oxford UnIversity Press Argentina: On Parallel Paths. Melbourne UP INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS lOcp Forster C. (ed) 1970. Australian Economic THEORY AND POLICY lOcp Development In the 1Wentfeth Century. Allen & Unwin Lecturer To be advised Lecturers D.K.Macdonald. RH.Green Prerequisites Requirements for Honours enrolment. LABOUR ECONOMICS III lOcp Prerequisite Requirements for Industrial Relations Including Microeconomics III and Macroeconomics IV enrolment Lecturers M. Watts III HalUs 1\vo hours per week Prerequisites Requirements for Honours enrolment HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week for one semester and Labour Economics II Examination One 2 hour paper plus essay and Examination One 2 hour paper plus assignments assignments Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Goography Faculty of Section Five Geography Faculty 01 Secdon Five Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science

GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Choose flve other subjects from Level 200. HOUTS 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practlcal Prerequisite GEOG 10 I. work per week for one semester. A one day field Geography Is the study of the Earth and Its people. Year 3 HoW'S 4 hours per week for one semester. excursion. giving emphasis to the interactions among the EXamination Progressive assessment. physical. economic and social elements of the GEOG302. GEOG306. GEOG309. and GEOG315 .&:aminaUon Progresstve assessment and one 2 environment. Modem Geography may be divided Choose four other subjects from Level 300. hour paper at the end of the semester. Content An introduction to statistics and computing for Into studies In HUman Geography (Program A) and Year 4 Content Physical Geography (Program B). but students may PhYSical Geography. Study of cartographic. advantageously combine units from Human and GEOG401 and GE0G402. An Introduction to physical geography Including photographic and aerial photographic methods In Physical Geography (Program C). Major In Physical Geography meteorology and climate; the influence ofgeomorphic geography. processes on landforms; weathering. rivers. ice. Year 1 Human Geography (Program A) analyses the factors frost. wind and the sea: the physical. chemical and GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN and processes that govern the distribution of people GEOGIOI and GEOGI02. biological characteristics of the soil and the GEOGRAPHY IOcp and their economic. social and cultural activities. Choose six other subjects from Level 100. development of soil profiles; environmental and Offered Semester 1 Changes in distribution patterns and activities historical factors that influence plant distribution. through time reqUire study of past processes and Year 2 Prerequisite GEOG 102. Practical work includes an introduction to the study prediction for the future from analysis of present GEOG201. GEOG203 and GEOG204. HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester. trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity Is ofclimatic data and maps. and the use of topographic Choose five other subjects from Level 200. .&:wnlnaUon Progressive assessment and one 2 aVailable for graduates in pI1vate business and maps and aerial photographs for landform analysIs. Year 3 hour paper at the end of the semester. public service departments especially In areas that Text GEOG301. GEOG304. GEOG305 and GEOG311 Content involve planning. social and economic analysts. Briggs. D. & Smithson. P .• 1985. Fundamentals oj PhYSical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors Choose four other subjects from Level 300. Physical Geography. paperback Hutchinson. Introductory methods appropriate to Human and processes that Influence the distributions of Year 4 Geography descriptive and inferential statistics will GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN phenomena tn the physical environment. Emphasis GEOG401 and GEOG402. be emphasised and there will be an introduction to Is placed on study of the processes that develop GEOGRAPHY IOcp computing. survey analysis and research design. Major In Geography landfonns and soils. on the meteorological processes Offered Semester 1 GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND that cause variations In cltmate. and on the factors Year 1 Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that CLIMATOLOGY IOcp that influence variations In vegetation communities GEOG 10 I and GEOG 102. GEOG 10 I and GEOG 102 are prerequisites for the Offered Semester 1 andantmaldlstrtbuttons. Employmentopportunities Choose six other subjects from Level 100. Geography Major In Arts and Science. and for are good both In the prtvate and pu bUc sector which Geography Honours GEOG401 and GEOG402. Prerequisite GEOG 10 I. Is currently demanding graduates with a good Year 2 HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days Choose THREE subjects from GEOG20 I. GEOG202. HOUTS 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical understanding of environmental issues and their Held work. management. GEOG203. GEOG204. GEOG207. GEOG208. work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion. ExaminaUon Progressive assessment and one 2 Geography (Program C) combines units from Human Choose five other subjects from Level 200. EXamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester. Geography and PhYSical Geography at the 200 and Year 3" hour paper at the end of the semester. Content 300 levels with other subjects from the Faculties of Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG30I. GEOG302. Content Arts. Economics. Education and Science and GEOG304. GEOG305. GEOG306. GEOG309. An introduction to biogeography. Definition and Mathematics. Thts program can be taken to Major GEOG311 and GEOG315. An IntrodUction to human geography tnclu

Pears. N.. 1985. Basic Biogeography. 2nd edn. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days methods. compu ter aided mapping and geogmphlc over those periods. Descrtbes anthropogenic Impacts Longman. field work. infonnation systems. on climate. through air pollution. on local. regional W!lliams. J.B. Harden. G.J. et al. 1984. 'Irees and EKaminatton Progressive assessment and one 2 'NB The field trip may be scheduled prior to the and global scales. Evaluates near-future possible shrubs in rainforests of NSW and Southern hour paper at the end of the semester. begtnning of second semester. climate variations over the next century. Queensland. University of New England. Text Content GEOG304 THE BIOSPHERE AND Reference The course examines the changing nature and CONSERVATION lOep Bridgman. H.A.. 1990. GlobalAIrPollutionProblems Jor the 1990s. paperback Belhaven Press. Attenborough. D .. 1981. UJe on Earth Fontana/ distribution of fundamental aspects of human Offered Semester I Collins. geography; urban settlement and the mode of Recommended Reading Prerequisites GEOG 20 I plus GEOG203 and production. These themes are tllustrated by case GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF GEOG204. Bmdley. R.S .. 1985. QuotemaryPaleaocUmatology. studies of dtles, industries. regions and AUSTRAUA lOep Allen & Unwin. communities. HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester; 4 days Offered Semester 2 fieldwork. Elsom. D .. 1992. Atmospheric Pollution. 2nd edn.. Topics Include: regtonal growth and Industrlal Blackwells. Prerequisite GEOG 10 I. development; processes of urban and regional Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 Hours 4 hours per week for one semester: 2 days change; urban hierarchies; internal structure of the hour paper at the end of the semester. GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA: field work. city; social Impact of change; policy and planning. Content AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE IOcp Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN Biogeography: EmphaSis on plant geography. with hour paper at the end of the semester. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY lOep examination of both the ecological and historical Offered Semester 1 aspects of the subject. A small herbarium collection Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or Content Offered Semester 1 is required of each student. GEOG208. Rocks and their weather1ng. structural landforms. Prerequisites GEOG20 I plus either GEOG203 or BiolOgical Conservation: An introduction to the sol1s. slope development and mass movements. GEOG204. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days flUVial. aeolian and coastal processes and landforms. subject. in which the importance of a field work. This course consists of a 5-day field excursion (I.e. genetically-based approach Is emphasised. glacial and perlglaclal processes and landforms. 40 hours of the 56-hour course) together with 2 EKamination Progressive assessment and one 2 hours per week for 8 weeks). Soils: Processes of son erosion. soH conservation hour paper at the end of the semester. GEOG207 POPULATION. CULTURE issues and methods. AND RESOURCES 100p EKamination Progressive assessment. Content Texts Offered Semester 2 Content Selected aspects of the population. settlement and Houghton. P.D. & Charman. P.E.V.. 1986. Glossary land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied Prerequisite GEOG 102. The course includes a field excursion to evaluate ofTerms used in Soil Conservation. SoIl Conseroation include exploratory Images. image-makers and Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days Sydney'sairpollutlon problems. Emissions. sources, Service ojN.S. W. distorters. and visions of AustraUa before 1900; air pollution monitoring. meteorology and possible field work. Smith. David. 1990. Continent In crisis. Penguin. migration to the New World; population of Australia preventative measures will be assessed. The Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 1788-1981; urbanisation In Australia: agricultural remaining time wHl be devoted to methodology and WUlIams. J.B. and Harden. G.J .. 1980. RalnJorest hour paper at the end of the semester. land use 1788 to 1914. analysis related to data collected on the field h1p. Climbing Planls. University of New England. Content The field trip wHl take place prior to the first semester. Reference GEOG309 SOCIETY 8< SPACE IOcp The course examines three themes: population and GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN Kellman. M.C. 1980. Plont Geography. 2nd edn. Offered Semester 2 migration; culture and technology; resource use. HUMAN GEOGRAPHY IOcp Methuen. Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or These themes are lIlustrated by historical and GEOG208. contemporary case studies at a variety of spatial Offered Semester 2 GEOG305 CLIMATIC PROBLEMS 100p Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days scales. PrereqUisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or Offered Semester 2 GEOG208. fieldwork/ project work. Topics include: world and regtonal population Prerequisites GEOG20 I and GEOG203. growth; migration. population growth and settlement; Thts course mainly involves a major field excursion. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 culture. plural societies and development; culture. HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester; 1 day hour paper at the end of the semester. EKaminatfon Progressive assessment. fieldwork. technology and resource use; agricultural origins. Content Content diffusion and practices. EKamination Progressive assessment and one 2 This course examines the interaction of social groups This course includes a major field excursion to hour paper at the end of the semester. GEOG208 CITIES AND REGIONS lOep with each other and With the urban enVironment. A investigate a contemporary human geography issue. Content variety of social groups defined by ethnic and Offered Semester 1 Methods include survey design. questionnaire Introduces palaeoclimates in the Pleistocene and socio-economic status. family structure and gender construction. social analysis, qualttative field Prerequisite GEOG 102. Holocene. and the reasons behind climate changes will be studied. The course will use a variety of Faculty of Section Five Geography Facultyo! Section Flv. History Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject DescrlptJons

methodological approaches to socio-spatial Asia-Pacific basin. and from site visits. Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours H1atory Subject De8Criptlona behaviour. should notifY the Head of the Department by I The study of History I. concerned with knowing and Texts October In the final year of the undergraduate interpreting the societies and cultures. the people GEOG310 DIRECTED STUDIES IN Dicken. P.. 1992. Global Shift. 2nd edn. Paul degree and must confinn this as soon as final results and events, ofthe past. It Involves both theawakenlng HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOep Chapman. for the year are known. Candidates are expected to and expansion of the historical imagination and a commence work on their thesis after completion of dlsclpUned. crltlcal useof evidence. Through studies Not offered 1994 GEOG316 DIRECTED STUDIES IN their undergraduate degree. mainlyof the "ma1ristrearn" areas ofHlstOIY - as seen PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY lOep GEOG311 HYDROLOGY lOep from an Australian perspective - the Department Offered Semester 2 Not offered 1994 offers a basis by which students can appraise both their own cultural tradition and ways In which Prerequis(/es GEOG20 I and GEOG203. GEOG40l) HONOURS IN 40+4Ocp GEOG402) GEOGRAPHY neighbouring societies and cultures have evolved. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days Bellevtng that precision of thought and language are fieldwork. Prerequisites GEOG 10 I and GEOG 102 plus either essential In the Humanities. the Department requires Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 GEOG201 and GEOG301 or GEOG202 and that students develop wrltlng skiUs during their hour paper at the end of the semester. GEOG302 Including 30 cp from 200 level and 40 cp course of studies. from 300 GEOG level obtaining at least a Credit Content grade average. In first-year the main dayttme subjects are HlSTI 0 I The course examines the dlstribu tion ofwater in the and HISfl02. two semesters which focus on the To qualifY for admission to Geography Honours. a evolution of Australian society. from Its British environment. Most attention will be given to student must normally have completed sufficient atmospheric mOisture. the hydrologic cycle. foundations. In evening hours. two semester subjects. training In geographical methods (I.e. GEOG201 HlSTI03and HlSTl04, Introduce the essential Ideas catchments. runoff. sediment and solute transport. and GEOG3O I for Physical Geography; GEOG202 soU water and water resources. and InstitutionsofEastem Civtllzations and Western and GEOG302 for Human Geography). and have CIvilizations respectively. Satisfactory completion of Text completed a Major In Geography that Includes any two semester subjects fulfils the normal Ward. R.C. and Robinson. M.. 1989. Principles of GEOG 10 1. GEOG 102, 30 credit points from level requirement for the first year of the History major. Hydrology. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill. 200 courses and 40 credit points from level 300 HlSTl03 Is also Ustedas an Inter-disciplinary subject courses. To proceed to Geography Honours a (IEAC) for students. Including History majors, wishing GEOG315 PRODUCTION. WORK AND candidate must have obtained at least a Credttgrade to develop an Asian specialisation. TERRITORY IOcp average In the 300 level Geography subjects taken Most other options may be taken at either 200 or 300 Offered Semester I for the major plus at least 20 other points at credit level tn their university courses. The student must level (though the same subject cannot. of course. be Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or also satisfY the Head of the Department of her/his taken at both levels). The standard 200/300 level GEOG208. abtlJlyln the area ofstudy within which the proposed subject involves 3 to 4 hours of formal contact per week for a semester. and merits 15 credit points. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days research topic lies. fieldwork. However. semester subjects units may be linked to Hours 48 hours per week for two semesters. make up year-long sequences worth 30 credit points Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 Examination External and Internal examination of In seven subject areas: Australian History. British hour paper at the end of the semester. a research thesis. and Internal assessment of the History. European History. American History. East Content coursework. Asian History. Pacific History and Indian History. The course examines contemporary changes In Content Although the first semester of paired subjects may production. distribution and consumption. by not necessarily be strictly a prerequisite for the The Honours program extends over two semesters of referring to agriculture. manufacturing and seJVtces. second. students are strongly recommended to take full-time study or Its part-time equivalent. and It focuses on the geography of employment and the two together and In appropriate sequence. It consists of Industrial change; and the evolution of food supply should be noted that some 200/300 subjects merit systems. (I) a thesis embodying the results of an original 10 credit points. Investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Topics Include: the territorial organisation of HlST353 Is a special subject of Australian History, Department. production. the role of large corporations. for 15 credit points. It Involves detatled study of technological change. diVisions of labour and the (it) coursework. consisting of reViews of research selected themes. and is likely to serve the interests changing nature of work. and the changing role of progress in major subject areas of geography. of students thinking of proceeding to fourth-year the state. Each student will. under supeJVtsion. select a study. Including Austrailan thesis work. HIST352 Is subject area for review. and present It as a a reflective subject focusing on the nature of the Case studies of impacts of economic change on seminar and as an essay. discipline of History and the practice of historians. people and communities are drawn from the Faculty of Section Five HI.lory Fleully of Section Five HI.lory Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Sub/oct Desc~pllon.

The nonnal prerequisite for 200 level subjects Is the Departments as adequate prerequisites for upper­ Content looking at the "celebration of a nation". the 1988 completion of 20 credit points at 100 level. The level HIStory subjects. In 1993 students who have This subject surveys the development of the Blcentenaryofwhtte settlement. and ask what kind normal prerequisite for 300 level subjects is the passed two semesters ofEconomic History (ECON 102 Australian Colonies in the Nineteenth Century from of a people we have become over nearly a century of completion of 30 credit pOints at 200 level. and ECON 103) !II CLAS 10 1 and CLAS201 and 202 their British antecedents. concentrating on the change. (Equivalents from the old 9 unit degree - History I or will beaccepted as having completed the prerequisite exploration and settlement of the continent. the Preliminmy reading History II will. ofcourse. be recogrtlsed.) Any request for HIStory 200 level subjects. impact of the frontier. the effects of convtctism. the Rickard J 1988. Australia - A Cultural History. for waiving of prerequisites must be made to the The Departmentalsoacceptscertatn subjects taught alienation of land. the struggle for self government. Longmans Head of Department. In other Departments as appropriate to be counted the treatment of Aborigines and the emergence of White R 1981. /rwenting Australia, Allen & Unwin All subjects may be modified according to staff towards the History major. to a maximum of 10 independent colonial societies. Students will be aVailability. credit points at 200 level and 10 credit points at 300 introduced to different interpretations of Australian Recommended reading experience and trained in hlstorlca1 analySiS through When the same subject is offered at both 200 and level. The subjects so recognised at present are: A set of required readings will be aVailable for reading. discussion and essay writing. 300 level. assessment of the 300 level work may be CLAS205/305 Roman Britain and Anglo-Saxon purchase from the Department at the end of first varied as staff consider appropriate and will in any England PreUrnlnary reading semester. case be at a higher standard. ECON202/302 European Economic History Clark. C M H. A Slwrt History ojAustralia, PengUin HISTI03/ EAST ASIAN CIVILISATIONS lOcp The books listed In the subject entrles are for ECON203/303 Asian Economic History I Molony. J 1988. The Penguin BicentennlalHistory oj IEAClOl Introductory purposes. Full lists will be aVailable at Australia, Penguin ECON204/304 Asian EconomiC History n Lecturer Mr H.D.M. Chan the beginning of semester. Rickard. J 1988. Australia - A Cultural History. ECON205/305 Asian Economic History III Prerequisites Nil It is the Department's practice to offer some of its Longmans subjects during the day and some in the evening. In IDS201 Gender Studies. Feminism: Hours 2 lectures and one tutorial per week plus a White. R 1981, /nventingAustralla, Allen & Unwin 1994. Pacific History will be offered In the evening. Historical and cross-cultural weekly workshop. HlST352 (History and Society) and HlST353 perspectives Recommended books Offered Semester I. evenings only. Callaghan (Australian History) will be offered at 5.00 p.m. IDS202 Gender Studies. Gender and A set of required readings will be aVailable for campus. Semester II. evenings only, Central Coast HISTlOI and HISf102 will be offered In the day; knowledge purchase from the Department at beginnlngofterm. campus. HIST103 and HISflO4 In the evening. ECON220 Industrial Relations lIA HISTI02 AUSTRALIA IN THE Examination By coursework and examination. Central Coast Campus ECON221 Industrial Relations IlB 20TH CENTURY lOcp Content In 1994 the 100 level subjects to be offered at ECON325 Industrial Relations IlIA Lecturer Dr H.M. Carey This subject considers the development of Chinese OUrimbah will be HISTlO4 (Foundations of Western Prerequisite NIL Ideas. valuesandinstltutlons that make upacultural Civilisation) in Semester I and HISTI03 (East Asian ECON326 Industrlal Relations lIlB tradition that is shared by the major economic Civtltsations) in Semester II. 1beupperlevel subjects GEOG306 Geography of Australia: An Hours 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week plus weekly powers tn Asia today. Japan, Korea. Taiwan. Hong offered will be HIST234/334 Nationalism and Historical Perspective videos and films. Kong and Singapore. as well as by Vietnam. The Fascism In Europe and HIST336 World War I MNGTl13 Australian Government and Offered Semester n. day only. Callaghan Campus. historical context within which Chinese Ideas about (Semester I) andHIST233/333The French Revolution Politics Exam1nation By course work and examination. humanity. society and politics. religion. and nature and Its Aftennath (Semester 11). All History subjects were developed and modified will be examined by Introductory Aboriginal Studies: will be held In the evening at Central Coast Campus SOCA212/312 Content focussing on two periods: ancient China up to Culture and Politics In 1994. Australian society was transfonned In the course of 220AD. and the eighth to sixteenth centuries. Thus Ml\lorlng In mstory SOCA214/314 Indonesian SOCiety and Culture the twentieth century. HISTl02 will examine the the subject will Introduce students to the history of "great events" of this period: two world wars. the 20 credit poln ts at 100 level. at least 30 credit points FIRST YEAR SUBJECTS Chinese civilisation and Its east Asian variants up to depression. the political tunnotl caused by the Labor at 200 level and at least 40 credit points at 300 level the beginnings of their modem Interaction with mSTIOl THE FOUNDATIONS OF split. the prosperity of the Menzies era and the new are required to major In History. European ctviltsation in the sixteenth century. AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY lOcp society ushered In by the Whitlam government. Students will be trained In historical analysis through Please note that the degree rules of the BA and BA Lecturer Associate Professor J. Turner Social developments to be considered include large reading. discussion. and essay writing. and will be (Psych) nonnally restrict enrolment to 20 credit scale migration. the growing influence of America. Prerequisites Nil expected to read and discuss Chinese texts in English points at 100 level!n a single dlsclpltne. Therefore. the impact of radio and television. youth culture translation. students are pennltted to undertake a maximum of Hours 2 lectures and 1 tu torial per week plus weekly with its pop stars. music and ethos of rebellton. the Recommended Reading two (2) of the 100 level subjects offered by the videos and films. radical politics which rose out of resistance to the de Bary. WT 1988. EastAslanClvUfzatlons. Harvard Department of History. Offered Semester I. day only. Callaghan Campus. Vietnam War. "Women's Lib". the New Right. the Ecology movement. the economic rationalism of the University Press, paperback Subjects from other dlsclpUnes Examinations By course work and examination if 1980s and the nagging quest for an Australian Ropp. P S (ed) 1990. Heritage ojChhw.. University of From time to time the HlstOlY Department will reqUired. Identity among all classes of SOCiety. We will end by Caltfomla Press, paperback recognise specified subjects taught In other Faculty of Section Five History Faculty of s.ctlon Flv. History Soclel Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Schwartz. Benjamin 11990. The World oJThoughtin lIPPER-lEVEL SUBJECTS Content Prerequisites For HISf233. either 20 credit polntsln AndentChlna, Harvand University Press. paperback HiStory at 100 level. or eqUivalent. For HIST333. WST230) TRADmONAL AND EARLY The advent of European coloniaUsm to India; soctal Chu Hsi 1990. Learning to be a Sage. University of either 30 credit points In History at 200 level or W8T330) MODERN INDlA 16cp and religious change and reform in the nineteenth CaUfom!a Press. paperback. century; political nationaUsm; Independent India equivalent. Lecturer Don Wright Gernet. Jacques 1985. A History oj Chinese and Pakistan. (Appropriate attention Is given to the Hours 2 lectures and one tutorial per week. Ctvafzatlon, Cambridge University Press. paperback Prerequisite For HIST230. either 20 credit points In role of women throughou t.] Offered Semester I; day only In 1994 at Callaghan. HiStory at 100 level. or eqUivalent. For HIST330. Note: ThIs subject will be accepted as sufficient RecommendedJor purchase Semester II; evening only In 1994 at Central Coast either 30 credit points In History at 200 level. or Campus. prerequisite for non-History students wishing to equivalent. Wolpert. SA 1993. A New History oJIndia, 4th edn. take HISf240/340. HISf241 /341 orHIST242/342. OUP Assessment One long essay. tutorial work and a Other students wishing to enter 200 level History Hours 2 lectures plus one tutorial per week. Recommended reading one-hour test. subjects. or to take the History major. will need 20 Offered Semester I; day only In 1994. Content credit points at 100 level. Brown. J. 1984. Modem India. OUP Assessment Tutorial work. in-class test. one long Cambridge. Economlc History oj India, Cambridge The subject covers European history from 1789 to WSTIM THE JI'OUNDATIONS OF essay. ca 1800 and deals In detall with the great French WESTERN CULTURE 10cp Content Masselos. H. Indian Nationalism. A History. Sterling Revolution from the crisis of the Ancien Regime to Prerequisites Nil The development of traditional Hindu society, Thapar. R & Spear. P. A History oj India, Vol 2. the coming of Napoleon to power. PelUcan. 2vv Hours 2 lectures and 1 tutOrial per week. plus including Its philosophy. art and architecture; the RecommendedJor purchase optional videos and films. advent of Islam to India; the Mughal Empire. WST232) GANDHI AND Doyle. W 1990. The OxJord History oj the French [Appropriate attention Is paid to the role and position WST332) MODERN INDlA 10cp Revolution, OUP Offered Semester I. evening only. Central Coast of women throughout.) campus. Semester II. evening only. at Callaghan Lecturer Don Wright Wright.D.1. 1992. TheFrenchRevolution:Introductory campus. Recommended Jor purchase: Prerequisite For HISf232 20 credit points In History Docwnents. Fast Books (Obtalnable at History Office) Examination By coursework and examination. Embree. A T 1972. The Hindu 1TaditJon, Vintage at 100 level or eqUIvalent. For HIST332 30 credit Recommended reading Content Wolpert. S A 1993. A New History ojIndia, 4th edn. points In History at 200 level or eqUivalent. though Doyle. W. Origins oJthe French Revolution. Oxford. OUP this course would be largely unintelligible to a The cMJisation which originated on the shores of the new edition student who had not completed HIST229/329 or Mediterranean has formed the basis of European Recommended reading: HIST230/330 and HISf231/331. Cobhan. A. History oJModem France Vol I. Pelican history for overtwo thousandyears. HISTI04explores Basham. A L 1967. The Wonder That Was India, Furet. F and Rlchet. D 1970. French RevolutJon, HOUTS 1\vo hours per week formal. others to be the development and transfonnation of Ideas. beliefs SIdgw!ck & Jackson Macmtllan and institutions from the ancient world until the arranged as necessary. Herman. A L 1991. A BrreJIntroductk>n to Hinduism. sixteenth century. The course will not attempt to Offered Semester n. day only In 1994. Hampson. N 1966. A Social History oj the French WesMew Revolution, Routledge provideacomprehenslveovervIewofseveralcenturies Assessment Essays. tutorial work. class test. of Western HIstory. Rather It will examine key Kolenda. Pauline 1978. Caste inContemporory India. Lefebvre. G 1966. The Coming oj the French Issues and events which have informed our cultural Cummings Content Revolution, Routledge Inheritance. And these studies will provide 'hands Thapar. R & Spear. P. A History oj India, vol I. Gandhi as social. religious and political reformer in HIST234) NATIONALISM AND 16cp on· experience of history: the lectures and tutorials Pelican. 2w. 19th and 20th century South Africa and India. W8T334) FASCISM IN EUROPE wtll encourage students to draw as much as possible Zaehner. R C 1977. Hinduism. Opus Recommended Reading on prtmary documents and contemporary accounts Lecturer Associate Professor E M Andrews Brown. JudIth 1989. Gandhi, Yale of the past. It Is hoped that by the end of the course WST231) 19TH AND 20TH Prerequisites For HISf234.20 credit points In students wtll have acquired sufficient knowledge W8T331) CENTURY INDIA 16cp Gandhi. M K 1966. Autobiography or The Story oJmy History at 100 level or eqUivalent. For HIST334. 30 and understanding to assess the strengths and Lecturer Don Wright Experiments with 1Tuth, Cape credit points In HIstory at 200 level or equivalent. It Umltations of Western Civiltsatlon as It survives In Bondurant. J 1969. Conquest oJ Violence. UCP Is recommended that students should have the world today. Prerequisite For HlST231. either 20 credit points In History at 100 level. or eqUivalent. For HIST331. Iyer. R N. Moral and Political Wrillngs oj Mahatma completed HISf235/335 European SociaUsm and Recommended reading either 30 credit points In HIstory at 200 level. or Gandhi the Russian Revolution or its equivalent before taking this subject. HKlnder&WHllgemann 1975. The Penguin Atlas oJ equivalent. EUROPEAN HISTORY Hours Two lectures and a one-hour tutorial per World History. Volwne I: From the Beginning oj Hours 2 lectures plus one tutorial per week. World History to the Eve oj the French RevolutJon, WST233) THE FRENCH REVOLUTION week. Offered Semester ll; day only In 1994. Harmondsworth. Penguin HI8T333) AND 1TS AFTERMATH 16cp Offered Semester I. evening only In 1994. Central Assessment Tutorial work. tn-class test. one long H G Koenlgsberger 1987. Medfevol Europe 400 . Lecturer Don Wright Coast campus. Semester II. day only in 1994. 1500. London essay. Callaghan campus. Faculty of SecUon FIve History Faculty of Section Five History Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Description.

Assessment One long essay, tutorial mark and one result of the long-standing situation In Russia, the Marwlck. A. Brilaln In the Century oJTota! War HIST238, AMERICAN HISTORY AFTER two-hour exam. FIrst World War and the RUSSian Revolution. The Taylor. A J P. The First World War: an illustrated HIST338) THE CIVlL WAR 16cp Content causes and events of that revolution are studied in History Lecturer Dr Chris Dixon depth. as well as the Impact of Lenin on communist ThIs subject Is designed to continue and complement James. A B. War and Logistics 1861-1918'. History Prerequisites For HIST238. either 20 credit points the study begun In HIST235/335 European theory and practice. and the rule of Stalin. The subject ends by considering the light this throws on Today. September 1964. pp.597-607. In Hlstol)' at 100 level or eqUivalent. For HIST338. Socialism and the Russian Revolution and covers either 30 credit points at 200 level or eqUivalent European political history and International relations totalitarianism and the current situation In the AMERICAN HISTORY from I815to 1990. Itlooks at nationalism In Europe. communist world. HoW'S 2 lectures per week and a weekly tutorial. HIST237) AMERICAN HISTORY the creation ofa united ltalyand Germany, and their Required reading Offered Semester II. day only In 1994. callaghan HIST337) TO THE CIVlL WAR lScp effect on the European balance of power. After a Bender F L (ed) 1988. Karl Marx: the Communist campus Lecturer Dr Chris Dixon study of the causes, course and results of the World Manifesto. Norton Assessment To be advised. War I. It turns to the rise of Fascism. notoniy In Italy Prerequisites For HIST237. either 20 credit points Recommended reading Content and Germany but also In other European countries. In History at 100 level or equivalent. For HIST337. It then looks at the polley of appeasement and World Adams. A E 1960. The Russian Revolutton and either 30 credit points at 200 level or eqUivalent ThIs subject surveys the domestic hiStory and foreign War II. appralses the efforts of both the League of Bolshevik Victory: why and how? Heath relations of the United States since the Civil War. Hours 2 lectures per week and a weekly tutorial. After War Nations and the United Nations. and the attempts to Halperin. F W 1989. The Russian Revolutions oj considering post-Civil Reconstruction. create International law. and ends with the collapse 1917. Anvil Offered Semester I. day only In 1994. callaghan the course examines industriallsation,lmmlgration. of the power blocs and an assessment of the current campus and reform in the late nineteenth and early twentieth Wood. A 1979. The Russian Revolution. Longman problems facing the world today. Assessment To be advised. centuries. Attention Is then paid to the clash between Recommended Reading HIST338 WORLD WAR I IOcp traditional and modem values In the 19205; the Content Depression; and the social. economic, and political Lecturer ASSOCiate Professor E Andrews Carote. F 1867. The Rise oJFasclsm, Methuen This subject SUlVeyS American history from the changes accompanying the New Deal. For the post­ Craig. GA 1974. Europe Since IBIS. Holt Prerequisites This subject Is Intended for students early seventeenth century to 1865. Following a World War II period. the main Issue Is the ongoing who have completed 30 credit points of History at discussion of the transplantation and adaptatlon of struggle between lIberaltsrn and conservatism. This Rock. R 1977. British Appeasement In the 1930s. European institutions and Ideas in the New World, Arnold 200 levellnc1udlng at least one subject of European will entail consideration of McCarthylsm. the Civil History or are currently enrolled in either HIST233/ the course considers the American Revolution. Due Rights movement, and the conservative resurgence. Schapiro. J S 1958. Uberallsrrc Its Meaning and 333 or HIST234/334. attention will be given to America's struggle for In foreign policy, the major theme Is the persistent History. Anvil Hours Two hours per week for one semester. independence from Britain, but we will also assess tension between Isolationism and Internationalism. Welss.J.1977 Conservatism In Europe. 1770-1945. the extent to which the American Revolution was Particular attention Is paid to America's quest for Offered Semester I, Central Coast campus, evening Thames & Hudson truly "revolutionary". Other themes Include: the empire durlng the late nineteenth century, the only tn 1994. Semester II, Callaghan campus, day Impact of colonisation on native American controversies surrounding US entry Into both World AND only In 1994. HIST235) EUROPEAN SOCIALISM civtllsations; Manifest Destiny and territorial Wars; the Cold War; and American involvement in HIST335) THE RUSSIAN REVOWTION IScp Assessment One essay, one tutorial mark and one expansion; women in colonial antebellum societies; the Vietnam War. Lecturer Or W Reynolds 1.5 hour exam. social reform; slavery; and the Impending conflict Recommended reading Content between the agrarian South and an Increasingly Prerequisites For HIST235. 20 credit points In TIndall. G BandShl. 0 E 1992. America: aNarrrulve History at 100 level; for HISf335. 30 credit points In Industrialised North. The course concludes by This subject looks at the tnter-relationshlp between examlnlngthe Civil War. which preserved the Union. History. 3rd edn. Norton History at 200 level. war. politics and socle\)' during the First World War. and led to the abolition of slaveI)'. but which failed Degler. Carl. N 1984. Out oj Our Past: The Forces Mtera lecture on warfare through the ages, students Hours 2 one-hour lectures and one tu torlal per week to secure equaUty for black Americans. 1hat shaped Modem America, 3rd edn. Harper for the semester. consider 19th century technology; the origins and Torchbooks causes of the war; the failure of Schl1effen's master Recommended reading Offered Semester I. Callaghan Campus. day only In carroll. Peter N and Noble. David W 1988. The Free 1994. plan; various attempts to avoid stalemate on the TIndall. G Band Shl. 0 E 1992. America: aNarratlve western front (such as the Galllpoli expedition and History. 3rd edn. Norton and the Urifree: A New History oJthe United Slates. Examination One essay, one tutorial mark and one naval warfare); one major battle; the problems of 2nd edn. Penguin two-hour exam. Degler. carl. N. 1984. Out oJOur Past The Forces generalship; relations between mtlttary and 1hat shaped Modem America. 3rd edn. Harper HIST339 AMERICAN HISTORY. Content politicians In both Germany and Britain; the events Torchbooks DIRECTED READING lOcp of 1918; the economic and social impact of the war; This subject looks at the Industrial Revolution and carroll. Peter N and Noble. David W 1988. The Free Lecturer Dr Chrts Dixon the story of European socialism which resulted from morality In war and the literature and art the war provoked. and the UnJree: A New History oj the United States. Corequ(s{tes For students who have completed It. After considering the early soclaltsts, it studies 2nd edn. Penguin the theories of Karl Marx, and the way they were Recommended Reading American History at 200/300 level or who are enrolled In HISf337/338. modified by the development of communism as a Fuller. J F C. The Conduct oJWar Faculty of Section Fiv. History Faculty of Section Flv. History Social Science Subject Description. Social Science Subject Deocrlpllons

Hours One 2-hour seminar weekly. Students WIll also be asked to consider the ways In 1920; the development and nature of Chinese Jean-Pierre Lehmann 1982. The Roots oj Modem Offered Day only In Semester I. Callaghan campus which Chinese and Europeans constructed. Images nationaUsm and Chinese efforts at nation-building Japan, Macmillan of each other and of their own societies during this Assessment One major essay, a book review, and in the twentieth century; the Chinese adoption of Harry Wray & Hilary Conroy (eds) 1983. Japan period. participation in seminar discussions. Marxism in the early twentieth century; and the EmmIned- Perspect1vesonModemJapaneseHistory. problems of building a socialist society WIthin a Content Though this subject should be of partlcular Interest University of Hawafl Press to students who have studied EastAsIan andWestern Chinese cultural context since 1949. Slavety and Freedom: An American Dilemma Tetsuo NaJlta 1974. Japan. The Intellectual clv1l!sations at the 100 level. the subject W1ll also Recommended reading FoWldatlons qfModemJapanese Politics. University As well as being a central aspect of the black provide an introduction to East ASian hlstoty for Spence. Jonathan 1991. The Search Jor Modem of Chicago Press experience In the Un tted States, slavery has been students who have studted Australian history at the China. Norlon one of the most controversial and provocative topicS 100 level. ConradTotman 1981. Japan beJore Perry. University Jenner. William 1994. The Tyranny oj HistDry. of CalIfornia Press in American historiography. This Course examines a Recommended Reading number of themes: the African slave trade; changing Penguin Carol Gluck 1985.Japan's ModemMyths. Princeton views of slavety; the slave famtly: slave resistance, Spence. Jonathan 1991. The Search Jor Modem Ogden. Suzanne. 1992. Chlna's Unresolved Issues. University Press China, Norton rel!g!on and folklore; "free" blacks In slave society; 2nd edn. Prentice Hall Beasley. W G 1991. Japanese Imperialism 1894- proslavery and antislavery Ideology; blacks In tbe Goldstone. Jack 1991. Revolution and RebeUion in Glttings.John 1990. ChinaChangesFru:e. TheRoad 1945. Oxford University Press University of California Press clvt1 War and Reconstruction. Early Modem World. JromRevolution 1949-1989. Oxford University Press Recommended Reading Adas. Michael 1989. Machines as the Measure oj PACIFIC HISTORY Men. Sctence. Technology and the IdeologieS oj HI8T242) STATE, SOCIE1T AND IDEOLOGY To be advised by Lecturer. HIST342) IN EARLY MODERN JAPAN lOcp HI8T244) THE SOUTH PACIFIC: Western Dominance, Cornell University Press HIST344) COLONISATION EAST ASIAN HISTORY Kennedy. Paul 1988. The Rise and FaU oJ the Great Lecturer Mr H D MChan AND CULTURE CHANGE 16cp HI8T240) CHINA AND EUROPE: CULTURE Powers, Unwin Hyman Prerequisites For HIST242. either 20 credit points at Lecturers Professor Alan Ward 100 level or HISTI03/IEACIOI or eqUivalent. For HIST340) CONTACT AND CONTRASTS 16c~ Jacobs. Margaret 1988. The Cultural Meantngojthe Prerequisites For HIST244. 20 credit points In Sctent!fic Revolution. Knopf HIST342. either 30 credit points In History at 200 Lecturer Mr H D MChan level or eqUivalent. History at 100 level. or eqUivalent. For HIST344. HI8T241) CULTURE, NATION AND SOCIE1T either 30 credit points in History at 200 level or Prerequisites For HIST240. 20 credit points In Hours 2 hours per week of seminars. History at 100 level or HISTl03/IEACI01 or HIST341) IN MODERN CHINA 16cp eqUivalent. Offered Semester I; day only In 1994. equivalent. For HIST340. 30 credit points In History Lecturer Mr H D MChan Hours Two one-hour lectures and one 90 minute at 200 level. ~tion One essay. one seminar paper as a seminar per week. Prerequisites For HIST241. either 20 credit points In preliminary draft of the essay, and a course journal. Hours 3 hours perweek oflectures and/or seminars. History at 100 level or HISTl03/IEACI01 or Offered Semester I; callaghan campus; evening Offered Semester I; day only In 1994. eqUivalent. For HIST341, etther 30 credtt points at Content only In 1994. Assessment Two essays and a course journal. 200 level or eqUivalent The Japanese trajectory to the present day has been Assessmeont A combination of essays of 700/0 value markedly different from that adopted by China. This and tests of up to 30% value. Content Hours 3 hours perweekoflecturers and/or seminars. subject considers the nature of the Japanese Offered Semester II; day only In 1994. Content The intellectual and political revolutions that trajectory, how it was set In the late sixteenth and occurred In China and Japan as well as in Europe Examination Two essays and a course journal. early seventeenth century, and Its course to the end A study of interactions between people from the Industr!allsed societies and the Island peoples of the during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries are Content of the MelJI In 1912. A series of seminars will central to understanding modem culture and the consider the follOwing topics and issues: the nature South Pacific. Topics will Include the populating of The events in Ttananmen Square In 1989 and their modem world. The divergent Chinese, Japanese, and effect of the "Eurasian general crisis" in Japan the region by Melanesian and Polynesian peoples aftermath demonstrate that China's modern Crisis, and European trajectories to the present day were 1550-1650; the rise and fall of the Tokugawa state; and key features of their cultures; the processes of the beginnings of which can be traced to the early set by the dtfferent responses the three societies the nature of the Tokugawa social and Ideologtclal culture change; the meeting of Pacific peoples with made to the Intellectual and soclo-pol1tical crises, nineteenth century. has still to be resolved. What Is order; the formation of modem science during the European explorers. traders, missionaries and the "Eurasian general crises" that struck all three the nature of China's nineteenth and twentieth Tokugawa; the causes and consequences of the settlers; the nature of European colonisation. and century crisis? Why have the various reform, societies during the period 1550 to 1650. This MelJI Restoration; MelJI modernization and Its social Islanders' responses.lncludtng organised resistance, revolutionary, and Marxist solUtions so far failed to subject will consider the cultural Interaction between consequences; the sources, formation, and nature "cargo cults" and Incipient naUonal1sm; the manage the crisis? This subject considers the last China and Europe during the period 1550 to 1800; of MelJI Ideology; and MelJI nationalism and introduction of centralised government and law, hundred years of Chinese history by focussing on the different responses of the two societies to the Imperialism. and Its Impact upon land tenure. Films will be how Chinese attitudes toward their culture have shown In some lecture slots. soclo-economic and political crises that struck them Recommended Reading during the period 1550 to 1650; and the different hindered efforts at social. economic and political Recommended introductory reading natures and consequences of the seventeenth­ reform. In particular the subject will examine the Janet E Hunter 1989. The Emergence oj Modem period of cultural and political crisis from 1890 to Japan, Longman Quanchl. M and Adams. Ron. (eds) 1993. Culttue century scientific revolution In Europeand In China. Contact in the Pac!fic. Cambridge UP Fecully of Section Five History Faculty of Section Five History Socia' Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Scarr. D 1990. The History ofthe PacjJlc: Kingdoms Assessment Two seminar papers and one long begins wllb lbe establishment of Tudor legitimacy rich. lbe 'mlddllng sort' and the poor - lived. loved. wul Reefs. MacMillan essay. under Henry VII, and then explores the RefOImatlon worked and played during a period which some Campbell. I C 1990. A HlslDry ofthe Pacific Islands. Content and the growth of the modem nation state under hlstortans have dubbed as lbe age of lbe great UQP Henry VIII. Ellzabelb I seemed to unite England transformation. Due weight wUl be given to the The subject will seek to explore In some depth key through the cult of "Gloriana" , and her success as a broad pattern of change during lbese years In the Howe. K 1984. Where the Waves FaI~ Allen and issues tn the contact history of the South Pacific. Unwin female monarch will be examtned before proceeding areas of Industrial and urban development, Including Australia and New Zealand. Issues to lbe political and religious divisions of the following population growth. and lbe re-structuring of society. Denlng. G 1980. OflslCJJ1ds wul Beaches. MUP proposed for study In 1994 include: lbe Mabo century, which culmillatedin c1vll war and revolutlon. But the lectures and tutorials which comprise the decision - Its antecedents and Its aftennath; the The constitutional and reltgtous causes of these programme wlll be designed to bring tbe past to life HIST245) THE SOUTH PACIFIC: AN influence of the Wa1tangt TI1bunal tn New Zealand; HIST345) HISTORICAL SURVEY 15cp upheavals will be discussed In considerable detail. by Introducing us to Its inhabitants; real people who the mutiny on the B~ new writings on the and theirramlflcations pursued Into the later Stuart left their traces In words, pictures and rnaterla1 Lecturer Professor Alan Ward Pacific - ethnographic history and historical period. concluding with the "Glorious Revolution" of objects. And the story will unravel as a mystery tour anthropology: Indigenous and non-indigenous Prerequisite For HIST245. either 20 credit potnts In 1688. rather than a journey with a known destination, History at 100 level or equivalent. For HIST345. Interpretations of the past. Recommended readings since we will have to discover the route ourselves, either 30 credit points at 200 level or equivalent Recommended Readings using these traces as signposts. Students who Coward. B 1980. The Stuart Age. Longman. HOlUS Two one-hour lectures and one 90 minute Rose. Deborah Bird 1991. HtddenHlslDrtes: Black complete the subject will therefore develop their seminar per week. Stortes from Victoria River Downs. Humbert River Guy. J A 1988. Thdor England. Oxford University 'detective skills', In addition to locating part of the Press. Australian cultural inheritance. Offered Semester II, Callaghan Campus, evening wul Wave Hal Statfans. Aboriginal Studies Press. only in 1994. Canberra Smith. Alan G R 1984. The Emergence qf a Nation Recommended Readings State: The Commonwealth ofEnglwul. 1529-1660. Assessment A combination of essays of 70% value Walker. Ranglnul 1990. Ka Whawhal Tonu MalDu: Clark. J C D 1985. English Soctety 1688-1832. Longman and tests of up to 30% value. Struggle Wttlwut End. Penguin Cambridge University Press. Wrightson. Keith 1982. English Soctety. 1580·/660. Content BRITISH HISTORY Evans. E J 1983. The Forging of the Modem State: Hutchtnson Early Industrtal Britain 1783-1870. Longman. As for HIST244/344 but with especial focus on the HIST247) ENGLAND FROM REFORMATION HIST246 ENGUSH SOCIETY IN THE Porter. R 1990. English Soctety In the Eighteenth impact of World War II and post-war geo-politlcs. TO REVOLUTION 15cpe nationalist movements. land rights movements In 1STH AND EARLY 19TH Century. 2nd edn. Penguin Australia and New Zealand; independence and after HIST355) ENGLAND FROM REFORMATION CENTURIES 15cpe Thompson. E P 1977. Whigs and Hunters. Penguin. in Vanuatu; New Caledonia; the military coups In TO REVOLUTION 20cpe HIST356 ENGUSH SOCIETY IN THE HIST250) WOMEN'S HISTORY 15cp FIJi; the Bougainville crisis. Lecturer Dr D Lemmings 18TH AND EARLY 19TH HIST350) Recommended Readings Prerequisites For HIST247. 20 credit points In CENTURIES 20cpe Lecturer Dr H.M. Carey Roble. D 1989. Blood on their Banner. Natfana1lst History at 100 level. For HlST355. 30 credit points Lecturer Dr D Lemmings Struggles In the South PacjJIc. Pluto Press In History at 200 level. Prerequisites For HIST250. 20 credit points In Prerequisites For HIST248. 20 credit points In History at 100 level or eqUivalent. For HIST350, 30 Henntngham. S 1992. France and the South Pactjlc; Hours For HIST 247. one two hour workshop History at 100 level. For HIST356. 30 credit points credit points In History at 200 level or eqUivalent. a contemporary history. Allen and Unwin (comprising lectures and discussion of primary tn History at 200 level. HolUs Three to four hours per week, consisting of Dorney. Sean 1990. Papua New Guinea; people sources) per week and one hourly tutorial per week. HolUs For HIST 248. one two hour workshop two hours oflectures and a two hour seminar and/ For HIST 355. one two hour workshop (comprising politics and history since 1975. Random House (comprising lectures and discussion of primary or film session. lectures and discussion of primary sources) per sources) per week and one hourly tutorial per week. HIST346) SELECTED ISSUES IN Offered Semester I. day only In 1994. Callaghan week, one hourly tutorial per week and personal For HIST 356. one two hour workshop (comprising PACIFIC HISTORY lOcpe discussion of essays. campus lectures and discussion of primary sources) per Lecturers Professor A Ward Offered Semester I. day only In 1994. week, one hourly tutorial per week and personal Content Prerequisites This subject Is intended for students Assessment For HIST 247, two 2,000 word essays discussion of essays. Women's History alms to Introduce second and who bave completed 30 credit points of History at and one examination. For HIST 355, two 3,000 word Offered Semester II. day only In 1994. thtrdyear students to the rich scholarly literature of 200 level including at least one subject of Pacific essays and one examination. women's history and the hlstoryofwomen in medieval History or are currently enrolled tn either HIST224/ Assessment For HIST 248, two 2,000 word essays Content EUrope. It will Include concepts ofwomen's culture, 324 or HIST235/335. and one examination. For HIST 356, two 3,000 word work, religious life and participation in the domtnan t essays and one examination. Hours One two and a half hour workshop per week. The English killed their king In 1849. The act of society of western Europe, the I1se of the family and regicide is a focal point for this course, which deals Content the stories of famous women such as Hildegard of Offered Semester II. day only In 1994. Callaghan with the development of the English nation state campus. This subject Is about people and change. I t examines Bingen, Cathertne of Siena, Eleanor of Aquttalne and its relationship with the protestant cause. It the ways In which EngUsh men and women - the and Christine de Plsan. Faculty of Section Five History Social Selence Flcully of Section Five History Subject DeKrlptlon. Social Science Subject Description.

Students taking this subject may choose to combine van Krteken, Robert 1992, ChUdren and the State: Prerequisites 30 credit points In History at 200 level Content It with Interdlsclplimuy Subjects In Gender Studies: Social Control and the Jormatlon ojAustralian Chl1d or eqUivalent. "History and Society" Is a reflective subject for 108201 Femlnlsm: HlstortcaJ and Cross-Cultura! Welfare, Allen & Unwin students, especially prospective Honours students. Perspectives Hows 1 lecture and seminar totalling two to three HIST254) CHILDHOOD IN COLONIAL AND hours per week. who wish to explore the nature of hiStory. both as a 108202 Gender and Knowledge HIST354) POST-COLONIAL AUSTRALIA 15ep OJfered Semester Il; evening only In 1994. profeSSional activity and as created or used In public life. Various lecturers discuss the scope of history - (See InterdiSCiplinary Subjects section of Handbook) Lecturer Associate Professor John Ramsland Assessment Based upon two seminar papers, archaeology, the great historians of the past. Recommended Reading Prerequisites For HIST254,. 20 credit points In contributions to the seminar series and a class problemsofblas. theuseofdocuments.andwomen·s Shahar,Shulamlth 1983, TheFourthEstate,Ahlstory History at 100 level. For HIST354, 30 credit points examination. history. The course concludes with a series of case oj women in the Middle Ages. Methuen In History at 200 level. Content studies in historical controvery and Interpretation. HIST251) AUSTRAUAN SOCIAL Hows 2 lectures and one tutorial per week. Intended to allow senior students to study In depth from medieval and renaissance studies. to the Impact of Europeans In our area and of the Industrial HIST351) WELFARE HISTORY 15ep OJfered Semester Il, evening only In 1994, Callaghan some of the key Issues tn Australian History. this campus. course will be based mainly on pertodlcal articles revolutions on the world. Lecturer Associate Professor John Ramsland and related documents: it will be an Ideal preparation Recommended reading Prerequisites For HIST251, 20 credit points In Examination Seminar exercises. essay and test. for honours and post-graduate research. After a Orwell, George, 1984 History at 100 level. For HIST351, 30 credit points Content preparatory lecture to open up the topic. the seminars Carr, E H, Whot is History or In History at 200 level. For SSW students. successful The subject explores the nature of child life and the will be used to examine controversial Interpretations completion ofHISTI01 required. experience of youth in colonial and post-colonial of Australia's past. In 1993, topics will Include Marwlck, A, The Nature oj History HolUs 2 lectures and one tutorial per week. Australia between 1788 and 1960wlth consideration Health Issues at Botany Bay. convicts as workers. HIST401 HISTORY HONOURS to provisions made for formal education by the Cato Street Conspirators, the New Australta OJfered Semester I, day only In 1994, Callaghan HIST402 government, church and private agenCies. Discussion experiment. the International Workers of the World campus. HlST403 will be organised around changing patterns and and Newcastle miners in 1909 and the rise and fall Examination Seminar exercises. essay and test. notions of child reartng and child health care, the of the Australian left. Mter a careful reading of Rob Prerequisites Content experience of growtng up In rural and urban Pascoe. The Mam.ifacture of Australian History. In order to qualify for admission to History Honours. This subject examines the development of social communities, the development ofyouth movements students should prepare for particular seminar a student must satisfy the Head of Department that welfare in Australia from the time of the first convict and organisations between the 1890s and the 1940s. topiCS using: . his/her overall perfonnance in History subjects settlement in Sydney Cove. Discussion is organised and the depiction of children In colonial and post­ Hogan, T 1976, IndextoArticlesonAustrallanHistory, makes him/her a suitable candidate. A satisfactory around the origins and developmen t of various colonial literature and art. A central focus will be University of New England perfonnance will nonnally Include an overall credit placed on problematic youth: neglected. abandoned average in previous History subjects,lncluding Part categories of needy or neglected people in AustraHa Crittenden. Victor & Thawley. John. and their Identlficlatlon and classification by both and transported conVict children in the penal colony, III or 300 level subjects. HIST40l Is normally a political authorities and community groups. "the bush barbartans" of the 1860s , child labour In Index to Journal Articles on Australian History single year full-time course; It Is available as a two­ Consideration Is given to the causal factors involved colonial Australia, the larrtkln gangs or "pushes" of 1974-1978 year part-time course (HIST402 and HIST403) at the in the development of poverty and neglect and to the the 1880s and 1890s, boy conscrtptlon In the 19OOs, Index to Journal Articles on Australian History for discretion of the Head of Department. the expertence of childhood during World War I, the IdeolOgies of vartous helping groups, whether they 1979 Examinations be In the fonn of government agencies or In the fonn gathering acceptance of juvenile delinquency as a Index to Journal Articles on Australian History for Bywrltten examination and progressive assessment. of voluntary groups wtthin the community. The social problem In the 193Os, "problem"youthdurtng 1980 Examinations will be In July and November as motives and functions ofameliorating organisations World War II. and the moral panic aSSOCiated with AustraHan Public Affairs Infonnation Service. APAIS reqUired. such as the Benevolent Society of New South Wales. the supposed youth rebellion In the 1950s together the Society for the Refief of Deslltu te Children, the wtth an exploration of the actiVities of 'bodgie' and REFlECTIVE HISTORY Content Sydney Inflnnary. the various colonial and state 'wldgie' gangs In Australian cities. Consideration (a) a minor thesis of between 10,000 and 15,000 Boarding-out Systems. Orphan Asylums and City throughout the course wtll be given to the analysIs HIST352 HISTORY AND SOCIETY 15ep words based upon acceptable primary and MiSSions wtll be explored In some depth. and Interpretation of various primary source Offered Semester I, evening only In 1994 secondary sources; documents. including contemporary Uteraryworks. Recommended Readings Lecturers This course is a composite one. provided (h) a "core" course consisting of The Theory and Recommended Readings Dickey, Brtan 1980, No Charity There: A Short by different lecturers Practice of History (2 hours per week for 1_ To be advised. History oj Social Welfare in Australia. Nelson, PrereqUisites 30 credit points In History at the 200 semesters); Melbourne HIST353 ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN level or eqUivalent. (c) two other Special Studies (each Involving 2 Garton, Stephen 1990, OutoJLuck: PoorAustrallans HISTORY 15ep Hows ApprOximately 3 hours per week hours per week In first semester) chosen from & a number of options which may be varied from and SoctaJ Welfare, Allen Unwin, Sydney Lecturers ASSOCiate Professor J. Turner Assessment Essays and class exercises. time to time by the Head of the Department. In 1994 these Special Studies. avat1able subject to Faculty of Secdon Five HI.tory Foeulty of Section Five History Social Science Subject DescrlptJon. Social Science Subject Description.

reasonable demand and the exigencies of SemIoar.: approaching the study from whatever angle appeals communications bases on the Australian mainland; staffing. are: Schools and HistOrical Scholars to them. the changes to the ANZUS Alliance since the Guam Doctrine and the onset of problems assoctated with (I) War and Society (Associate Professor Positivists and Empiricists Assessment is by one essay and one three-hour Andrews) paper. "imperial overstretch"; and the developments of The 'Gentleman-Hlstorian' and the Essayists trade antagonism since 1973. (tI) The Nature of Biography (Associate Recommended reading Economic Determinism and its Adherents Recommended readings Professor Hempenstall)(N/A In 1994) The best Introductory reading would be:· History from Below Des Ball. The TIes that Bind (ttl) The Pacific 10 the ey"" of the DoveUot Fuller. J F C. 'The Conduct of War. 1789·1961 (Professor Ward) Annales and the History of Mentallt!es Roberi Mann. The Petrov l\Ifafr Blatney. G. The Causes of War (Iv) Authority. Power and Rl,ht.: the Feminism and Women's History Ross Babbage. A Coost Too Long Comparative Blotmy ofPoUtical Thought AUTHORITY. POWER AND RIGHTS: THE Anthropology/Sociology and History Robert Morton. Fire Across the Desert 10 Chlo. and Europe (Mr Chan) COMPARATIVE HISTORY OF POLITICAL Ethnographic History THOUGHT IN CHINA AND EUROPE Peter Edwards. Crises and Conunitments (v) The Development of the HUDter Valley and Ito Ioduotriea 1801-1946 (Associate Structuralists and Post-structuralists This subject considers the history of European Paul Kennedy. 'TheRiseandF'aHoftheGreatPowers Professor Turner) Feminism and Women's History Ideas of democracy and human rights and why a Gregory Pemberton. AU the Way: AusfTalta's Road to dtfTerent tradttlon of political thought developed In Post-modernism, Critical Theory and Cultural Vietnam (vi) LawandSoclet;yIoEarlyModemEngland China. It wlll commence with an examination of the Studies and her Colonies (Dr Lemmings) context and content of political discourse In ancient Norman Harper. A Great and Powerful Fliend (viI) Australian Relations with the United Heritage Greece and ancient China before focussing on the THE NATURE OF BIOGRAPHY (N/ A In 1994) States alnce the Great Depre.. lon (Dr W. Oral History period from Machiavelli to Marx durtng which Reynolds) Chinese and Europeans proposed different solu tions Psycho-history (viti) Topics 10 Medieval msto." (Dr H. to the problem of absolute political power and its carey) Preliminary reading: abuses. Itwlll conclude byconsldertng contemporary discussions about authoritarianism. democracy. NOTE Burke. P. 1991, New Perspect:tves on Histortcal Writing. Pollty and human rights both In China and In the West. Prospective History Honours students must consult Hlmmelfarb.G. 1977. 'The New History and the Old: Recommenced preliminary reading the Head ofthe Department as soon as possible after CrUicalEssays andReapproisals. Harvard University the publication of the examination results for 1993 John Dunn 1993. Western Political 'Theory in the Press to ascertain whether they are acceptable candidates. Face of the Future. cambrtdge University Press. and to hold preliminary discussions regarding a SPECIAL STUDIES Canto thesis topic. It Is expected that accepted candidates DetaUs of these should be sought from the staff G E R Lloyd 1990. Demystifylng Mentalities. will begin work on their thesis over the longvacatlon. member concerned. Descriptions of some of the Cambridge University Press THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF HISTORY options are as follows:- Richard Rorty 1989, Contingency, Irony and Convenor Dr lemmings WAR AND SOCIETY Solidarity. cambridge University Press The aim of this subject is to encourage advanced This semester-long course is not purely mtlttary Henry Rosemont 1991. A Chinese Mirror. Moral students to reflect on the theoretical origins or history, but rather an analysIs of the relationship Reflecttons on Political Economy and Society. Open Implications of history and history-writing. and to between war and SOCiety. Of necessity It begins with Court equip them with the methodology and research a sUNey of warfare from the French Revolution to Thomas Metzger (ed) 1994. Culture and Democracy: sktlls necessary to write their theses In the Vietnam, hut the underlying focus Is on the Issues A Symposium, Stanford University Press which have been raised by changes during the invogoratlng climate of current historical practice. AUSTRALIAN RELATIONS WITH THE UNITED twentieth century: the effect of the accelerating Thirteen seminars devoted to 'schools and historical STATES SINCE THE GREAT DEPRESSION scholars' will direct attention to some of the Ideas technology of the last 100 years; the problems of and methodologies which have been most Influential generalship and command In war; the Inter­ This course will trace relations between Australia among contemporary historians. and encourage relationship between war, politics and politicians; and the US from 1930 - covering trade tn the 1930s; critical discussion of their use in practice. It Is also the Increasing Impact of war on modern societies; the reasons for the US mtlttary alliance tn 1941; the hoped toorganisevtsits which will Introduce students morality In warfare (as ratsed by the total warfare attempts to develop a post-war system of to relevant archives In the Auchmuty Library and concept. the strategiC bombing of Germany. and the Commonwealth defence Including the Woomera the Mitchell Library. Sydney. atomic bombing of Japan). It ends by looking at the Range and the Atomic Tests; the evolu tion of causes of wars and possible methods of avoiding Australian-American relations through the Cold them In the future. Students have the option of War; the "Atom Bomb" spies and the Petrov case; and the Vietnam war; the installation of the US Faculty of Section Rve Justice Studies Faculty of Section Five Justice Studle. Social Science Descriptions Social Science Descriptions

BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (JUSTICE Social Sciences from a psychological perspective. JUST204 ETHICS IOcp Lusher and Avery developments. Key themes will be STUDIES) Topics will be Introduced in lectures and explored in PrerequisUe Nil Community-Based Poltclng; Administrative Devolution and Management Change. JUST102 INTERPERSONAL tutorial sessions through practical exercises. Hours Three teaching hours per week PSYCHOLOGY lA IOcp Thxts n.us LeclllTer Glen Albrecht Lecturer Robert Brown De Vito, J.A 1990, Messages Butldtng Interpersonal Chappell, Duncan and Wilson, Paul, Australkm Assessment Continuous Communtca&n SkIlLs, New York, Harper & Row. Poltcing: Contemporary Issues, Bu tterworths, 1989. PrerequisUe Nil TUley, A 1990, An Introduction to Psych%gtca1 Content HOUTS Three teaching hours per week JUST30S JUSTICE STUDIES 3 IOcp Research and Statistics, Austraila, Pineapple Press. Police work Is Intrtnslcally ethical In that it entails Offered Semester 1 contact with the public In domains where an HOUTS Three teaching hours per week JUST104 JUSTICE STUDIES 1 IOcp Assessment Continuous institutional authority is used to control,defuse or Lecturer To be advised Prerequisite Nil remove sources ofactual or potential conflict between Assessment Continuous Content Ind!v1duals and groups of people. Behind the Hours Three teaching hours per week for one Contents This subject proVides a broad Introduction to the Semester prescriptions of the law and the power given to the psychologyofthe Individual within the framework of police force is an ethical base to the co-operative This subject examines issues.movements and Lecturer Robert Brown lifespan development. VariOUS theoretical enterprise we all SOCiety. Hence.a subject which initlatlves In social policy and social administration perspectives will be examined to prOVide the student Assessment Continuous Including seminars. Introduces police to ethical Issues at as these relate to the achievement of social justice. With alternative Viewpoints within each topiC area. assignment and semester exercises. personal,professlonal.lnstltutlonal and soctallevels Forms of social actlon.agents of social change and This matertal will be further explored In tutortal Content Is justlftable on the grounds that pollee work is agents of social control are considered In relation to sessions. In this subject students will examine a range of predicted on an ethical foundation which involves several contemporary issues. Topic areas wtll Include: biological bases of social and personal Issues which are experienced in the identification and resolution of value or ethical Text conflict. behaviour.cognltion and learning. social the course of everyday Ufe. They will consider the No set text. development.and personality development. ways in which societies, individuals and communities Texts JUST306 POUClNG PRACTICE 3 IOcp Texts respond to the conflicts which arise from such Elliston, F.& Feldberg, (eds), 1985, Moral Issues In issues as Inequallty,exploitation and prejudice. Berger, K.1988, The Developing Person Through the Police Work. Tokowa,New Jersey:Rowman and Lecturer Robert Brown UJe Span. New York, Worth Publishers. Texts AIIanheld. Assessment Continuous Including seminar, Morgan, G.H. and Allegrttti, 1.1992, Social Problems extended essay. JUST103 INTERPERSONAL JUST208 JUSTICE STUDIES 2 lOep an AustrallanPerspectlve., Wentworth Falls, Social Content PSYCHOLOGY lB IOcp Science Press. Lecturer Wayne Reynolds The student will investigate a major current issue Lecturer Robert Brown Assessment Research Paper,Seminar Presentation Averbach, J.S.(l983), Justtee Without the Law, New relating to policing or the field ofjustice. Prerequisite Nil York,OUP. and 2 hour examination Recommended Reading Hours Three teaching hours per week Content JUsnos POUClNG PRACTICE 1 IOcp Relevant journal, media and police publications This subject will trace the broad background to the Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite Nil pertinent to the Issues being discussed. criminal justice system In Australia since 1788w1th Assessment Continuous HOUTS Three teaching hours per week for the full particular reference to the major Issues that shaped Elective. Content year the Police Service. While the focus will be on New JUST202 ADMINISTRATION IOcp There will be two strands within this subject: Lecturer Robert Brown South Wales. national and international HoLUs Three teaching hours per week Strand llnterperaonal Communication - 1 hour Assessment Continuous Including seminars, developments In pollctng will also be addressed. per week assignment and semester exercises. Text Lecturer Arthur McCulloch and Robert Brown This strand will Introduce the student to the basic Content Finnane, Mark, Policing in Australia: Historical Assessment Continuous processes underlying Interpersonal communication. In this subject the student will investigate the Perspectives. NSW University Press, 1987. Content These processes will be explored in a tutorlal/ origins and development of the police profeSSion in JUST207 POUClNG PRACTICE 2 IOcp This subject will expose the students to varlous workshop situation with an emphasis on developing NSWas well as conduct comparative studies of the theories of management allOwing them to develop a Lecturer Wayne Reynolds practical skills and promoting an awareness of one's police services In other Australian states. critical analysis oftheir own vocational environment. own ablltty to communicate. Assessment Research Paper.Semlnar Presentation The nature of the police role,culture and demeanour Italso seeks to five each student a working knowledge and 2 hourexamlnatlon Strand 2 Baalc Methodology and Statistics - 2 will also be investigated Including the e/Teets of of the functions of management and how these hours per week policing on the police family. Content functions are applied In a large service organisation. Strand 2 will proVide an introduction to basic research Swanton, B.1984, The PoltceoJSydney, Australian This subject traces formative developments on methodology and statistics as appHcabl~ to the Institute of Criminology. poliCing since 1977.focuslng especially on post- Faculty of Section FIve Justice Studle. Focultyof SectIon Five Juod.. StudlM Social Science Descriptions SoclolSc_ Doocrlpdono

Text JU8T210 8TRATEGIC 8TUDIES 1 lOep Content JU8T310 8TRA'J1!)QIC STUDIES 2 lOep Frances Donovan & Allen Jackson, 199!, Managing Prerequisite Nil ThlssubJectlntroducesstudentstocrlslslnterventlon Prerequisite JUST210 HumanSerotceOrganlsatfDns,Sydney, Prentice HaJI. HOlUS Three teaching hours per week for one theory and practice. It will eqUip them with a broad HOUTS Three teaching hours per week for one perspective and understanding of the psychologlcal JUST205 INTERPERSONAL RELATIONS lOep semester semester and physiological determlnanls of slre8s and crlsl. Lecturer Wayne Reynolds Lecturer Wayne Reynolds Lectwer Robert Brown response. The alm Is to proVIde an Integrated Prerequisite JUSTl 02 and JUST 103 Assessment Continuous understanding of Ufe stresses and crisis theory and Assessment Continuous HalUs Three teaching hours per week Content the abillty to Identify and assist those IndlVlduais at Content risk In emergency situations and day-to-daysettlngs. Offered Semester I This course will focus on Australia's changing 11l1scoursewillfocusonAustraItassecurltyrelatlons strategic environment as we move closer to Asia and The concept of crisis.crisis IntelVention theories and and the Intelllgence Community. There will be a Assessment Continuous away from tradttional AnglO-Saxon "Great and recent researchare examined. InteIVention strategies study of the structure and operations of UKUSA Content Powerful Friends". There w1l1 be a particular focus andskllls areconsldered In relation to such situations Anglo-Saxon) Intelllgence services since 1947 and This subject will introduce the student to areas of on the radical challenges that now confront many of asdomestic violence. sexual assault.death.irrational an assessment or directions after the Cold War - psychology such as attitudes,beltefs and values; Australia's traditional institUtions and assumptions behaviour.substance abuse and disasters. organised crlme,terrorlsm. social attraction and relationships. - defence,crlme,trade,soclal polIcy. The nature and functions of fonnal and informal Texts social groups are considered In relation to Stress and crisis management. Material presented Texts Ball, Desmond, 1988, The TIes that Bind. In lectures will be further explored In a tutorial contingency planning. mobtltsatlon and victim and Babbage, R, 1988, A Coast Too Long. Barnett, Harvey 1988, Tale of the ScorpIoTL situation with helping professions as a focus. worker support. WheelWright, T. 1989, The Third Wave: Australia Toohey, Brian 1990, Ollster: The Story of the Text Text and ASian Capitalism. Australian Secret lnteUlgence Serotce. Sears, D.O. Peplau, L.A. 1991, Social Psychology, Hoif,L.A.1989,People in Crisis Understanding and JUST211 CRIMINAL JUSTICE 7th edn, Prentice Hall, NJ. Helping, 8YSTEMS 1 lOep 3rd edn,C.Addlson-Wesley. JUST208 LAW AND GOVERNMENT I 100p HOlUS Three teaching hours per week for one year JU8T304 HUMAN RELATIONS lOep Prerequisite Nil Lectwer To be advised Lecturer Robert Brown HalUs Three teaching hours per week for one Assessment Continuous including semester semlnar,asslgnment and semester exercises. Prerequisite Interpersonal Psychology Lecturer Larry Hafey Content Hours Four teaching hours per week Assessment Continuous Students will considervarlous perspectives on crime Offered Semester I Content anddeviance,the development and establishment of Assessment Continuous the concept of corrections and the domain of A study of the foundations, precedents and modem Content criminological research and its application to influences on our legal system. prevention and correction. Students will examine in This subject famlllarises students with the concepts Text detail several areas of contemporary concern in of normal and abnonnal behaviour and examines To be advised. criminological research such as sexual assault,chtld aspects of psychopathology In order to proVIde the abuse,white-collar crime,Aborigtnes and student with an oveJVtew of the various problems JU8T209 LAW AND GOVERNMENT 2 lOep pol1clng,juventle justice. and approaches to abnonnal behaviour and its implications for the human services. Key concepts Prerequisite Nil Text and classtftcatton systems are considered. HalUs Three teaching hours per week for one To be advised. semester Several theoretical and research orientations are JUST303 CRl81S INTERVENTION lOep considered in relation to specific conditions Including Lecturer Larry Hafey anxiety reactions. affective dlsorders,personality Lectwer Robert Brown Assessment Continuous disorders.delirtum,dementia and substance abuse. Prerequisite JUSTl02 and JUSTI03 Content Therapeutic strategies are described and thevarious Hours Four teaching hours per week roles of welfare workers are considered. A study of the foundations, precedents and modem influences on our legal system. Offered Semester 2 Texts Text Assessment Continuous DaVIson, G. & Neale,J. 1986, Abnormal Psychology, 4th edn, NY, John Wiley and Sons. To be advised Feculty of Section Five Law Subject Flculty of Section Five Linguistic. Soclol Science Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

lAW SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS UNGmSTIcs SUBJECT DESCRlPfIONS one way of speaking to another as the situation LAWIOI FOUNDATIONS OF LAW IOcp Linguistics is the study of the structure and changes? How do people judge different ways of Offered Semester 1 functioning of language. In particular, It seeks to speaktng, and why? In what ways do social discover what is common to the structure of AIL groups differ from each other In the linguistic Lecturer Callaghan Campus - C. Abela. Central language so that the basic principles by whlch It "repertoires"? Therewillalso be some discussion Coast Campus - G. Brown. works will be understood. It therefore has natural ofthe linguistic situation InAustral1a, including Prerequisite Nil for students enrolled In a Bachelor common borders with other language subjects, social factors relaUng to mlgrantandAbor!gtnal of Social Science (Welfare Studies) or Bachelor of including English, but It Is not essential to have languages and the development and current Social Work degree courses. expertise in a foreign language in order to study the status of English In Australia. Hours 2 lecture hours. 1 tutorial hour per week. subject. (b) Language Acquisition and Development ExamInatIon One (I) mid-semester test and one (1) Linguistics bears on the relationship between Linguists are interested in studying the end of semester examination. language and thought and has among Its special development of language In children for two interests the acquisition and development of Content main reasons: language In children and the Interaction oflanguage (I) the contribution that It can make to Topics include: The sources oflaw in Australia; The and society. TI1USit has importantconnectlons with knowledge about child growth and status of Aboriginal Law; Important provisions of such subjects as Education, Philosophy, Psychology development; and the State and Federal Constitutions; The Court and Sociology. helrarchy and Jurisdiction; Alternative methods of (II) the light It can shed on the nature of dispute resolution; Precedent; Statutory UNGIOI INTRODUCTION TO language In general. LINGUISTICS 20cp interpretatlon; Aspects of fonnatlon of contract; ThecoursewUl glvean account ofthe main techniques Aspects of professional negligence. Offered Full year used by linguiSts In pursuing these goals and will Suggested Preliminary Reoding Prerequisite Nil survey present knowledge. Derham. D.P. et al 1991. AnIntroduction to Law. 6th Hours 4 hours per week lectures and tutorials. full Recommended reodlng edn, Law Book Co. year. Altchlson, J .. The Articulate Marrvnal, Hutchinson. Texts &amtnatton To be advised Hudson. R.. Invitation to Linguistics, Martin To be advised Content Robertson. References The course provides a general introduction to central Texts Bird, R 1993, Osborn's Concise Law Dictionary, 9th issues in Ungulstlcs and will cover the follOwing Fromldn, V. (et all, An Introduction to Language, 2nd edn, SWeet and Maxwell. areas: Australian edn, Holt Rinehart. Enright, C. 1991. Studying Law, 4th edn, Branxton I. Language Structure Wardhaugh, R., An InfToduction to Sociolinguistics, Press. This section of the course introduces basic theoretical 2nd edn, Basil Blackwell. Lane, P.H. 1990, An InfToductlon to the Australian and methodological prinCiples of linguistics. Some References important techniques of investigation used by Constttutlon, 5th edn, Law Book Co. Bolinger, D. & Sears, E .. Aspects of Language, 3rd lingUiSts will be In troduced and discussion will McRae, H. et al 1991, Aboriginal Legal Issues, Law edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. focus on ways of describing how language works at Book Co. the levels of phonology, syntax and semantics. Crysial, David, Red!scover Grammar, Longman. Pearce, D.C. and Geddes, RS. 1988, Statutory Examples will be drawn from a numberoflanguages, Lyons, J .• Langucge and Linguisttcs, Cambridge Interpretation In AusfTalia, 3rd Edn, Butterworth. Including Australian Aboriginal languages to University Press. illustrate the different ways In which Infonnatlon Trudglll, P .. Sociollngulsttcs: AnIntroductlon, Penguin. may be organised within a Unguistlc system. The courseinc1udesadetalleddescrlptionofthestructure Wardhaugh, R .. Investigating Language, Blackwell. of English from a scientific point of view. LlNG201 UNGUISTIC DESCRIPTION 20cp 2. Language Use and Language learning NOTE that LlNG20lIs a pre- or co-requisite for most (a) Language and Society Linguistics 200 level subjects and a prerequisite for The role of soctal context in language use: An LING301. investigation tnto the relationship between Offered Full Year language use and social structures. Involving Prerequisite LING 10 1 such questions as: Why do people switch from Foeullyof SocdonFl.I UnguIIIIco Focully of Section Five Ungulltica SocIIIS.1ence Subjocl Deocrlpllonl SociolScIence Subloc! Deocrlpllonl

LINGUISTICS 300 lEVEL SUBJECTS HOUTS 2 hours per week. full year LlNG214 STRUCTURE OF LANGUAGES Ccntent Examination Essays and other wrttten assignments LINGS 14 0TlIEII. THAN ENGLISH lOcp Study of selected topiCS. chosen for the Interest of LlNGSOl LlNGUI8T1C THEORY 20cp the issues they raise for current linguistic Prerequisite for UNG214 Is LING 10 1 Note: L1NG301 Is a pre or corequlslte for all other Content investigation. Topics may include: conjunction; Prerequisite for UNG3141s LING201 Linguistics 300 level subjects. and a prerequisite for An investigation of language structure and agreement phenomena; relative clauses; etc. entry to Ungulstlcs Honours. techniques of linguistic analysis with parttcular CorequIsIte for UNG2141s LING201 emphasis on the following areas: CorequIsIte for UNG3141s L1NG301 LlNG219 ANALYSIS OF SPEECH lOcp Prerequisite UNG201 LINGS 19 (I) IlemaDU... : Lexical and sentence semantics: Hours 2 hours per week Hours 2 hours per week PrerequisIte for UNG219 Is LING 101 sense relations in the lexicon; problems of Offered Semester 1 Offered Full Year Prerequisite for LING3191s LING201 reference; modality; presupposition and Emmlnatton Written assignments Examfnatton Essays and other written assignments tmpUcature. Corequlslte for LING2191s L1NG201 Content Content (tl) Synta: Introduction to syntactic theory and Corequlslte for LING3191s LING301 (From 1995. Its role In explaining the properties of language Investigation and comparison of certain syntactic LING221/321 will be a pre or corequlslte for Syntactic Theory phenomena in selected languages. LING219/319.) and the Ungul~tlc competence of the speaker/ Government/BlndingTheory and the explanation of hearer. The nature of linguistic generalisations References Hours 2 hours per week language universals as well as the range ofvariation andthecritertawhlchmaybemetbyanadequate To be advised. Offered Semester 2 observed among languages. and the acquisition of theory will be discussed. competence. Particular attention is given to the Examinatton Written aSSignments References LlNG215 LANGUAGE IN MULTICULTURAL formal properties and organisation of the theory. LINGS 15 SOCIETIES lOcp Content and Its application to English and selectedadditlona! Leech. J .• Semantics. 2nd edn. Penguin. Prerequisite for LING2151s LINGJOI or SOCAllI This course will examtne the physIcs of speech and languages. This course is a continuation of the Lyons. J.. Semantics. Vols 1 and 2. Cambridge Prerequisite for UNG315 Is LING201 the Instruments used to analyse speech. and will Syntax component of UNG20 I. Unlverslty Press. Corequlslte for LING3151s LING301 Introduce students to experimental design in IlemaDti... phonetics research. LlNG211 LANGUAGE AND COGNITION lOcp HOlUS 2 hours per week Problems of semantic analysts within generative LINGS 11 References grammar and other theoretical frameworks. Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite for UNG2111s LING 101 To be advised Ten ExaminaUon Essays and assignments Prerequisite for UNG311 Is LING201 Cook. V.. Chomsky's UnJversal Grammar. Basil Content LlNG221 PHONETICS AND Corequlslte for L1NG2111s L1NG201 LlNG321 PHONOLOGY lOcp Blackwell. Corequlslte for LING311 Is LING30 1 The interaction of language and social contexts; the Prerequisite for UNG2211s LINGlOI Reference HOUTS 2 hours per week ethnography of communication; language Prerequisite for LING321 Is L1NG201 Radford. A.. Transformational Grammar. Cambridge Offered Semester 1 maintenance and language shtft In multicultural societies; national language poliCies. Corequlsite for UNG32 1 Is LING30 1 UP. Emminatton Essays and otherwrttten assignments References HOlUS 2 lecture hours and 1 laboratory hour per In addJtlon to the matertallistedas textand reference. Content relevant Journal articles will be assigned and To be advised. week dJscussed. Language processing and hemispheric specialisation; Offered Semester I Chomskyan and Plagettan views of language LlNG217 HISTORICAL LINGUISTICS lOcp Examtnotion To be advised. LlNGS02 RESEARCH/MINOR THESIS lOcp acquisition; the relationship between language LlNGS17 Note: L1NG302 Is a prerequisite for entry to development and the development ofother cognitive Not offered In 1994 Content Linguistics Honours. capaclUes; untversals of language development. The analysis and deSCription of speech sounds. with LlNG21S TOPICS IN SYNTAX lOcp Recommended Reading parttcular emphasis on articulatOIY phonetics. and PrerequisIte UNG201 LlNGS1S segmental and suprasegmental phonology. In the Springer. S. & Deutsch. G .. Left Brain. Right Brain. Corequlslle LING30 1 Prerequisite for UNG218 Is LING 10 1 laboratory sessions. students wUl be given the W.H. Freeman. Offered Full year or Semester 2 Prerequisite for UNG3181s LING201 opportunity to focus on specific areas such as the Examtnotion A minor thesiS of approximately 6.000 LlNG212 SECOND LANGUAGE Corequlslte for LING2181s L1NG201 phonologyoflanguages other than English. variation words. LINGS 12 ACQUISITION lOcp Corequlslte for LING318 Is LING30 1 In Australian English or the phonetics of disordered speech. Content Not offered In 1994 HOlUS 2 hours per week References An area of linguistic research. approved by the LlNG213 CONVERSATIONAL ANALYSIS lOcp Offered Semester 2 To be advised. Department. LINGS 13 Examfnatton Wrttten assignments Not offered In 1994 Faculty of hctSon Five Linguistics Faculty of Section Five Philosophy Social Science Subject Descriptions Social ScJence SubJecl Description.

UNG303 RESEARCH/MINOR THESIS lOcp Content PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Frankena. W.K. and Granrose.J.T. (eds).lntroductory Prerequisite UNG20 I. passed at Credit level or A seminar course focussing on issues from recent The 100 level subject PHILIO 1 offers a broadlybased ReadIngs In EthIcs. Prentice-Hall. better developments In linguistic theory. Issues to be Introduction to the main areas of philosophy. namely Johnson. O.A. (ed). Ethics. Holt. Rinehart and Investigated may Include the follOwing: functional metaphYSiCS, eptstemology, value theory and Winston. Corequlsite 40cp In Linguistics subjects at 300 reasoning. Each of these areas Is explored at greater level. frameworks; grammatical relations; Universal Singer. P. (ed). A Companion to EthIcs, Blackwell. Grammar and Ungulstic typology: neuroUngulstics. depth In the 200 and 300 level subjects. some of Offered Full year or Semester 2 whlch are offered In alternate years to permit wider Smart. J.J.C. and WllUams. B. UItIitarlanIsm: Por ExanUnation A minor thesis of approximately 6000 UNG320 SPEECH AND LANGUAGE choice. The Department also requires that students and Agalns~ Carobridge. words. DISORDERS lOcp majoring In Philosophy take a spread of courses across theseareas to ensure balance and integration. Content Prerequisite LING201 The subject at 100 level Is worth 20 credit points. CorequlsUe LlNG301 An area of ltnguisttc research. approved by the whtle most of those at 200 or 300 level are worth 10 Department. Hours 2 hours per week. credit points. There Is one 400 level (Honours) subject. consisting of an honours thesis and UNG304 DIRECTED READING lOcp Offered Semester 2 prescribed coursework. The availability of subjects Examination Essays and otherwrttten aSSignments. Prerequisite UNG201. passed at Credit level or depends in every case upon the enrolment of a better Content sufficient number of students and the aVailabtlity of Corequlsite 30cp In Linguistics subjects at 300 Language breakdown and impairment in staff. For further Information about subjects. level. and pennission of Head of Department. comprehension and production; phonological. including reference lists and subjects likely to be offered next year. seeThe PhtlosophyManual. which Offered Semester 1. Semester 2 or full year syntactic and semantic deficits in aphaSia; problems of defining agrammatism and dyslexia. Is available from the Department of Philosophy. Examination Essays and otherwrttten assignments. 100 LEVEL SUBJECTS Content UNG401) UNGUISTICS HONOURS SOcp UNG402) PHIL268 SOCIAL WORK ETmCS lOcp A directed reading course in specified areas of UNG403) current linguistic interest Lecturer Dr Dockrlll PrerequisIte Students will be accepted Into the Prerequisite This subject Is offered within the Faculty UNG306 SPECIAL TOPIC IN Linguisttcs Honours programme at the discretton of of Social Science and Is avatlable only to students UNGUISTICS lOep the Head of Department. In order to qUalify for entry who have not preViously passed PHILI0l to Llngulstlcs Honours. a student must nonnally Prerequisite UNG201. passed at Credit level or Introduction to Philosophy or an eqUivalent first have completed a major sequence tn Lingulsttcs. better. year Phllosophy SUbject for which standing has with at least 40 credit points at the 300 level. Corequlsite 30cp In Linguistics subjects at 300 been gl"anted. Including LING30 I and LING302. with a Credit level. and permission of Head of Department. average or better. Corequlslte SOCW20 1 Hours 2 hours per week for one semester. Hours To be advised. HoLUS 3 hours per week. first semester Emmfnattons Essays and otherwrttten assignments. Offered Full year. Examlnation Assignments and examinatton. Content Examination An honours thesis of at least 12000 Content Lectures and seminars on a topic of significance In words. and other written work prescrlbed by the The subject is a general Introduction to some main current ltnguisttc research. The particular topic Department. types of ethical theory and discusses some of the studied will vary from year to year depending on staff Content issues in utllltarlan and "practical" ethics raised by aVailabtltty and student interest. '. philosophers such asJ .J.C. Smart. Bernard Williams LING401 will involve work in current lingulsttcs. and Peter Singer. UNG306 CURRENT ISSUES IN Wherever poSSible. students will be given the LINGUISTICS lOcp opportunity to extend their knowledge In areas that Texts Prerequisite UNG201. passed at Credit level or are of special Interest to them. Frankene. W.K. Ethics. Prentice Hall. . better. Raphael. D.D. EthIcs. Oxford. Corequlslte 30cp In Linguistics subjects at 300 Singer. P. Practical Ethics. Cambridge. level. and permission of Head of Department. Singer. P. (ed) Applied Ethics. Cambridge. Hours 2 hours per week for one semester. References Emmfnations Essaysand otherwrltten assignments. Beauchamp. T. PhUosophical Ethics, McGraw-HilI. Focultyof Section Five Poychology Foeulty of Section Flv. Plychologv SoclolSeIonC4l Subj.ct DeKrlpllona Soelol Seleneo Subloct DelCrlptlonl

PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS There wlll also be Laboratory work which requires Rtiferences The lectures wlll be accompanied by a tutorial and PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY the submlsslon of two written reports. as well as the Baddeley. A. 1983. Your memory: A user's guide. laboratory workshop series In which practical INTRODUCTION I lOop submission of a workbook on a weekly basis. Penguin Books. experience will be given In the appllcatlon of the Texts topics descrtbed above using computer-assisted Prerequisite A Terllary Entrance Rank. orequ!valent. Baddeley. A. 1990. Human memory: Theory and packages. equal to or greater than the TER required for General practise. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Hove. UK. Texts admlsslon to enter either the Bachelor of Science Welten. W. 1992. Psyclwlogy:Themesand variations. Goldstein. E.B. 1989. SensatIon & perception, 3rd (Psychology) or the Bachelor of Arts (Psychology). CalIfornia: Brooks/Cole. edn. Wadsworth. Belmont. CA. Heathcote. A. 1993. Lecture and computing notesJor whichever 1s the lesser. _rtmentol methodology. Other texts to be advised. Martindale. C .• 1991. Cognitive psyclwlcgy: A neural­ Hours 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hOUTS network approach. Brooks/Cole. Paclftc Grove. CA. Howell. D.C. 1992. StatisticalmerlwdsJorpsyclwlogy. per week lectures. 2 hours per week laboratory) PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES lOop 3rd edn. PWS-Kent. Boston. St. James. J. & Schneider. W. 1991. MEL LAB: EXamination One 3 hour paper. Prerequisite PSYC 102 Experiments in perception. cognition. sodal References Content Corequlslte PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) psyclwlcgy and humanJactors. Psychology Software Hedderson.J. 1987. SPSS'madeslmple. Wadsworth This subject will introduce students to the Hours 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester Tools. PIttsburg. PA. Puhllshlng Company. Belmont. CA. fundamental concepts of psychology. The topics together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of Schwartz. B. 1990. Psychology oj learning and PSYC20S PSYCHOmOLOGY lOep covered Include; 2 hours duration per: week. behaviour. 3rd edn. W.W. Norton. New York. Prerequisite PSYC 102 Statistics and Methodology; Perception. with &:amInatIon Students may be assessed by class PSYC205 APPLIED TOPICS IN Corequlslte PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) emphasis on the visual system; Learning. with an tests. laboratory assignments and end of semester PSYCHOLOGY I lOep introduction to Pavlovian conditioning and examination. HolUS 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester Not offered In 1994. Instrumental learning; SocIal Psychology. examining Content together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of Indlvldual and group processes. 2 hours duration per week. This suhject generally examines such psycholOgical PSYC206 APPLIED TOPICS IN There will also be Laboratory work which reqUires processes as perceptton. human Information PSYCHOLOGY 2 lOop EXamination Students may be assessed by class the submission of two written reports. as well as the processing. memory. soclo-llngulstlcs. and learning. Not offered In 1994. tests, laboratory assignments and end of semester submission of a workbook on a weekly basis. Both animal and human models may be considered. examination. PSYC207 EXPERIMENTAL Texts Content The Cognition topic will examlne the experimental METHODOLOGY lOep General evidence supporting various models for human This subject examines the biological basis of Prerequisite PSYC 102 Welten.W.I992.Psyclwlogy:Themesandvariations. memory. Emphaslswlll be placed on applledaspects psychology • Including neuroanatomy. psychobiology HolUS 2 hours oflectures per week for one semester CalIfornla: Brooks/Cole. of cognition and memory as well as an introduction and neuroscience. The aim Is to broaden the to neural network concepts. together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of understanding of some of these topics Introduced In For Methodology and Statistics 2 hours duration per week. The Perception section will deal prlmartly with the first year and to examine their relevance to Howell. D.C. 1989. FUndamental statistlcsJor the audition. The following topics will he covered; EXamInation Students may be assessed by class psychology. The laboratory program will focus behavioural scfences. 2nd edn. Boston: PWS-Kent. structure of the auditory system. subjective tests, laboratory assignments and end of semester primarlly on neuroanatomy and research methods Other texts to be advised. dimensions of sound. sound localisation and examination. In psychohlology. elementaty aspects of speech perception. Texts PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY Content INTRODUCTION n lOop The learning topiC will explore Ideas about the (I) a selection of topics In statistics and compu ling To be advised. nature and mechanism of associative learning. The which will focus on the haslcs of t -testing. Prerequisite PSYC 101 References conditions under which learning occurs and the ANOVA, non-parametric testing, and univariate Becker. J.B.. Breedlove. S.M. et aI (eds) 1992. Hotus 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours nature of the representations underlying learning linear regression. Students will be shown how Behavioural endocrinology. Boston. MIT Press. per week lectures. 2 hours per week laboratory) will be described. The Impltcations of these Ideas for to use software packages to manipulate data EXamination One 3 hour paper. the application oflearnlng theory to Issues such as and perform statistical analyses. Carlson. N.R 1992. Physiology oJbehavlor. 4th edn. drug tolerance and addiction will be considered. Allyn and Bacon. Boston. Content (II) topics In descriptive and graphical analySIS of Tutorial and laboratory exercises dealing with the Kandal. E.R & Schwartz. J.H. 1985. Prtndples oj This subject extends the knowledge base gained In data and research methodology. The ftrst section above topiCS will be used to demonstrate these basic neural science. 2nd or later edn. Elsevier. Amsterdam. PSYCIOI. Topics covered Include; Biological wIlldeaIwith graphlcalanddescrlptlve statistical psychological processes. foundations of behaviour; Cognition. Including methods for understanding data patterns as PSYC209 PERSONAUTY AND SOCIAL human memory and thought processes; Text well as methods for preparing data forlnferentlal PROCESSES lOop analySiS. The second section will focus on Issues Development. Including sexuality. and the ageing Schwartz. B. & Relsberg. D. 1991. Learning and of research methodology and the design of Prerequisite PSYC 102 process. memory. W. W. Norton & Co .. New York. experiments. Corequlslte PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) Faculty of Section Flve Psychology Focultyol Section FlYe Psychology Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject DescrlptJons

Hours 2 hours oflectures per week for one semester References PBYCS02 lNDEPENDENT PROJECT lOcp Content together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of To be advised. Prerequfslte PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j This subject wtll extend the examination of basic 2 hours duration per week. Corequfsite PSYC30 I processes covered in PSYC303. The subject will be P8YCSOl ADVANCED FOUNDATION8 &amlnation Students may be assessed by class complemented by either a laboratory or workshop FOR PSYCHOLOGY lOcp Hours 2 hours per week for the full year. tests. laboratory assignments and end of semester program run over about 4-5 weeks. Examination Submission of a written report examination. Prerequfsites PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j Rtiferences containing Introduction. methods. results and Hours 4 hours per week for one semester Content discussion not more than thirty pages in length due A series of readings will be recommended as the This subject comprises two strands. One strand. Examination A combination of fonnal examination early October. course progresses. practical social psychology. wtll examine current and continuous assessment. Content P8YC305 lNDMDUAL PROCE88E8 lOcp issues such as attitude change. perception of social Content situations. group deciSion-making and leadership The project consists of an experiment or series of Prerequfslte PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j This course consists of the following topiCS: structures In both lectures and workshop sessions. experiments, SUlVeyS or tests designed to explore a Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. (a) Experimental design prinCiples in psychology hypothesis. Each student will be supervised by an with an emphasis on the practical work and the Examination One 2 hour exam paper. and a ranging from naturalistic observation to academic staff member of the Department of development of relevant skills. The other strand will laboratory report. examine a number of approaches to personality experimental and quasi-experimental designs. Psychology. The list of research areas will be available which have been Influential In tenns of theory. Including single-case studies. at the beginning of the academic year. Students are Content methodology and practical applicattons In clinical (b) Practical computation techniques for the advised that this subject Is a prerequisite for entry Thts subject will Include cognitive development and and occupational settings. analysis of experimental designs tn tnto an Honours year In Psychology. two themes In social development. The subject will Text psychological research, using MINITAB, BMDP References be complemented by a laboratory run over about 4- andSPSS/X Sweeks. To be advised. Students are expected to read a wide range of (c) Introduction to multivariate statistical current literature In the area chosen for the research References References techniques such as Multiple Linear Regression. project. Small, M.J. 1990, Cognltlvedeuelopment, Harcourt, To be advised. Discriminant Analysis and Cluster Analysis. P8YCS03 BABIC PROCESSES 1 lOcp Brace and Jovanovich. San Diego. (d) The MEL laboratory programs will be used to PSYC210 DEVELOPMENTAL Prerequfslte PSYC20 I (or PSYC207) A series of readings will also be recommended as the PSYCHOLOGY lOCP collect data in the tutorial periods. course progresses. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. Prerequisite PSYC \02 References Emminatfon One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory P8YCS06 ADVANCED SOCIAL Shaughnessy, J.J. & Zechmeister, E.B. 1990, Corequfsite PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) report. PROCESSES lOcp Research Methods in Psychology, 2nd edn, and Hours 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester Prerequfslte PSYC20 I (or PSYC207) Practfcal Introduction to ResearchMethods, McGraw­ Content together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of Htll Publishing Co. Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. 2 hours duration per week. This subject wtll examine bastc processes tn Psychology such as perception. cognition. memory Emminatton Bya combtnation offonnal examination Examination Students may be assessed by class Howell, D. C. 1987, StatlstfcalmethodsJorpsychology, 3rd edn, and Solutions Manual, 3rd edn, PWS-Kent and learning and the effects of early experience. and practical workshop asstgnments. tests. laboratory asSignments and end of semester Publishing Co. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with Content examination. in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be Winer, B.J.. Brown, D.R. et al 1991, Statistical Content considered. The subject will be supplemented with This unit uses the topiC of motivation to provtde an principles inexpertmentaldeslgn. McGraw-Htll.lnc.. a laboratory program which wtll run over 4-5 weeks. Integration of a wide variety of explanatory models This subject will deal with the development of New York. and research tn psychology. and to put the subject perceptual. psychobiological. cognitive and social References St. James, J. & Schneider, W. 1991. MEL LAB: Into a context of philosophical and theoretical processes during infancy, childhood and adulthood. Experiments in perceptlon, cognition, social Baddeley, A. 1990, Human memory theory and development generally. A number of motivational Topics such as the deveiopmentof object recognition. psychology and humanJactors, Psychology Software pracitce, Erlbaum. models are studied (bIolOgical. learned behaviourI memory and categorisation. language. problem­ Tools, Pittsburgh, PA. FrIsby, J.1979, Seeing, Oxford Univ. Press. cognition and social ecology) and applied to work solving. aggression. attachment. peer relations. social and clinical problems. Problem based workshops Tabachnik, B.G. and Flddell, L.S. 1989, Using skills, andsexualitywlll becovered. Weekly laboratory Sekuler, R. & Blake, R. 1985, Perception. Knopf. will be Integrated with the lectures and regular sessions will be conducted to elaborate on these Multivariate Statistics, Harper and Row, New York. P8YC304 BABIC PROCESSES 2 lOcp aSSignments will be based on these workshops. topics and teach research skills tn developmental DtekhofT, G. 1992, Statlstlcs Jor the Social and References psychology. Behavioural Sclences. Wm. C. Brown. Dubuque. Prerequfslte PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j Text Indiana. HotUS 4 hours per week for one semester. Readings and references will be available during the lecture series. To be advised. EJca.minatton One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report. Foeully 01 SecUon Five Psychology Focullyol SecUon Five Social Science Subloct Descriptions Psychology Social Science Subject DescrlptJonl

PSYC307 ADVANCED APPUED TOPICS PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 Exomtno1ion ThesIs wtll be assessed Independently PSYC404 PSYCHOLOGY 404 50cp IN PSYCHOLOGY 1 IOcp (SEMINARS) 40cp by two members of the Department. other than the Prerequisite Candidates must be enrolled for the BA Prerequisite PSYC20 I (or PSYC207) Prerequisite AcompletedBAor BSc or three complete supervisor. (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the years of a BA(Psych) or BSc(psych) tncludlng the HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester. Content equivalent of three full tlme years of the degree. subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. at least 40 credit Examlnalion One 2 hour exam paper plus hurdle tncludlng passes or above In the subjects PSYC 10 1 poInts of Psychology at the 200 level tncludlng PSYC402 comprfses half of the ftna1 Honours In requirements. and PSYC I 02. at least40 credit poInts of Psychology PSYC207 (or PSYC201). andatleast 60 credit potnts Psychology. Full-tlme students enrol tn PSYC401 as at the 200 level tncludlng PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). Content of Psychology at the 300 level tncludlng PSYC30 I well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 tn the and at least 60 credlt poInts of Psychology at the 300 ThIs unit wfll examIne the theory underlying and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtatned at first year and PSYC402 In the second. PSYC402 consists of the development, conduct, analySIS. and level Including PSYC30 1. psychological test construction. and will introduce a least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level range of psychologtcal tests through practlcum Psychology subjects IncludIng PSYC301 and reporting of a pIece of orfgtnal empfrfcal research. Corequfslte PSYC403 The thesIs Is a formal presentation of this research sessIons tn whIch traInIng wtll be gIven tn test PSYC302. Hours 16 hours per week for the full year and must be tn APA format. There Is a limit of fifty admtnlstratlon and tnterpretatlon. The underlying Hours 12 hours per week for the full year Examination Reports wtll be assessed by two or basis of Interviewing and assessment techniques pages. Each student wfll be supervised by a member Examination To be advised ofthe Psychology Department. Students are strongly more members of the Department. Placement will be wfll also be studied and tratnlng wfll be gtven In assessed on the basis of supervisor's report and a intetvlew1ng techniques. content advised to discuss potential proJectswfth approprfate staff members well In advance. Involvement with student essay. PSYC40 I comprfses half of the final Honours In References external agenCies must be through official Content Psychology. Full-time students enrol In PSYC402 as AnastasI. Psyclwlogfcal testing. MacM!llan. departmental channels. well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 tn the PSYC404 comprfses two-thirds of the final year of Keats. Sldlled interviewing. ACER. first year and PSYC402 In the second. PSYC40 I Texts and References the BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-time students conSists of five seminar sertes, including one To be advised. are expected to enrol In PSYC403 as well. Part-tlme PSYC308 ADVANCED APPUED TOPICS students complete PSYC403 In the first year and IN PSYCHOLOGY 2 IOcp compulsory untton theoretical issues in Psychology, achoiceoftwo units in mathematical orphysiologtcal PSYC403 PSYCHOLOGY 403 30cp PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists of two Prerequisite PSYC201 (or PSYC207) PsYChology, and a choice of two units in appUed or Prerequisite candidates must be enrolled for the BA equally-wefghtedsectlonsapleceofOrfgtnalemplrfcal HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester. social Psychology. Each unit will include seminars (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the research. and a placement. The research proJectwlll be supervised by a member of the Psychology Examinatton Assessment will be by a combination atwhtch attendance and participation tscompulsO'IY, eqUivalent of three full time years of the degree. Departmentand mustbetn an appUed area. A report of Connal examination, essays and wrltten reports and wfll be assessed by essay. examtnatlon. oral tncludlng passes or above In the subjects PSYC 101 In APA fonnat. ofapproximately twenty five pages,is on the practical experience. presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of and PSYC I 02. at least 40 credit potnts of Psychology the seminars vary from year to year depending on at the 200 level Including PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). required. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss Content staff aVaflab!l!ty. One semInar may be replaced wfth and at least 60 credit poInts of Psychology at the 300 potential projects wfth approprfate staff members Thts course will examine a number of different areas a practical placement and associated essay. There Is level tncludlng PSYC30 1. well In advance. The placement component involves Introductory semInars on ethIcal and professIonal tn whIch Psychology Is applied. It wfll examtne some overlap wfth PSYC403. Hours 8 hours per week for the full year Issues; supervlsedexpertencetnacommunltyfac!llty behavioural health care wfth particular emphasIs Texts and References on community-based intelVentions In establishing Exomtnation To be advised in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an behavioural change. In addition, topics In To be advised. Content essay relating the practical activities to psychologtcal theory and technique. psychologIcal pathology. psychotherapy and PSYC402 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 PSYC403 comprfses one thIrd of the final year of the abnormal psychology wfll be covered. The unIt wfll (THESIS) 40cp BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych). Full-tlme students are Texts and References be complemented with some practical experience In expected to enrol In PSYC404 as well. Part-time To be advised. applied settings. Prerequisite Acompleted BA or BSc. or three complete years of a BA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) IncludIng the students complete PSYC403 tn the first year and References subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. at least 40 credit PSYC404 tn the second. PSYC403 consIsts of three Ktng. N. & Remenyl. A. (eds.) 1986. Health care: A poInts of Psychology at the 200 level tncludtng seminar series, including one compulsory unit on behavioural approach. Grune & Stratton. PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). and at least 60 credit poInts theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice of two of Psychology at the 300 level Including PSYC30 I optional unIts. Each unit wfll Include semInars at Additional references wtll be made available which attendance and partictpatlon Is compulsory, throughout the course. and PSYC302. candidates must have ohtalned at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level and will be assessed by essay, examination. oral PSYC309 TOPICS IN NEURAL SCIENCE IOcp Psychology subjects Including PSYC30 I and presentation. or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on Not offered In 1994. PSYC302. staffavaUablUty. There Is someoverlapwfth PSYC40 I. Corequlslte PSYC40 I Texts and References Hours 12 hours per week for the full year To be advised. Faculty of Section Five Recreation & Tourism Faculty of Section Five Recreation & Tourism Social Science SubJect Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE the leadership and management techniques involved Kelly. J. 1983. Leisure Identities and Interactions. Coalter. F. 1986. Rationale Jor Public Sector (RECREATION AND TOURISM) In the design and Implementation of recreation and Allen & Unwtn. London. Involvement in Leisure. UK Sports CouncU and LElSlol INTRODUCTION TO LEISURE tourism programmes. As a component of this Rapaport. R & R .. Leisure and the FamUy UJe-CYcle. Economic and Social Research Council. London. SroDlE8 lOcp subject students will organise and conduct a special Routledge and Kegan Paul. London. Davts. G. et aI 1988. Public Policy inAustralta. Allen event In a community setting. Lecturer Michael Labone Sears. D. et aI 1991. Social Psychology. Prentice­ & Unwin. Sydney. ReJerences Hall. Englewood-Cliffs. Prerequistle Nil Goodale. J.T. and Witt. P. 1980. Recreation and Edgtnton. C.R et aI 1992. Recreation and Leisure Slavin. RE. 1988. Educational Psychology in Theory Leisure: Issues In an Era of Change. Venture Hours Three teaching hours per week Programming. Saunders College. Philadelphia. and Practice. Random House. New York. Publishing. Pennsylvania. Offered Semester 1 Rossman. J.R. 1989. Recreation Programming. LElSl04 AN iNTRODUCTION TO Prosser. G. 1991. The Australian Recreation. Sport Assessment Continuous and Fitness Industries: Economic and Employment Sagamore. New York. LEISURE ORGANISATION Characterlsllcs. DASElT. Canberra. Content LEISI03 LEISURE BEHAVIOUR AND AND PUBUC POUCY lOcp The Held of Leisure Studies is an interdisciplinary or UFE SPAN DEVEWPMENT lOcp Lecturers Peter Brown and Georgia Young LEIS201 LEISURE. TOURISM AND multi-disciplinary field of inquiry. and leisure Lecturer Sue Muloln Prerequlstle LEIS 10 I POPULAR CULnJRE lOcp behaviour and organisation can be understood from Lecturer Georgia Young a variety of perspectives. This subject Introduces Prerequisite Nil Hours Three hours teaching per week students to the major disciplinary perspectives Hours Three hours teaching per week Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite SOCAIII or eqUivalent Hours Three hours teaching per week applied to the study of leisure. These perspectives Offered Semester 1 Assessment Continuous assessment and include psychology. social-psychology. sociology. examination Offered Semester I history. geography. anthropology. ecology. politics Assessment Continuous assessment and Assessment Continuous and law_ Throughout the semester these disciplinary examination Content perspectives are examined through case studies of Content This subject focuses upon the pr

lEIS203 lEISURE. TOURISM AND Content ReJerences lEI8209 INTRODUCTION TO THE PERSONS WITH SPECIFIC This subject Introduces students to basic concepts Howard. D. & Crompton, P. 1980, FInancing. TOURISM INDUSTRY lQep ~S l~p and research In the Soctal Psychology of Letsure. Managing and Marketing Park and Recreation Lecturer Harold Richins Resources. Wm C. Brown. Iowa. Lecturer Sue Muloln After defining leisure from a social psychological Prerequlstle MNGfl11 or LEISI04 perspecttve and becomtng famtUarwtth termtnology. Prerequlstle LElS103 or equivalent Edglnton. C. & Williams. J. 1987, Productive Hours Three teaching hours per week current research methods and key Issues relattng to Management oj Leisure Orgarnsattons, John Wiley, Hours Three hours teaching per week leisure needs and motives wtll be examined. The New York. Offered Semester 1 Offered Semester I Impact of social psychological research and theol)' Torklldsen. G. 1992. Leisure and Recreation Assessment To be advtsed on selected areas of recreation and tourism wt1l be Assessment Continuous assessment and Manageme~ E. & F.N. Spon. London. Content examination explored. The subject concludes with a discussion on the application ofleisure counselling and leisure lEIS207 RESEARCH METHODS The aims of this subject are to review the historical content education. IN LEISURE AND TOURISM 1 lOcp development of tourism. analyse the components This subject introduces the student to the leisure within tourism and examine the organisation. ReJerences Lecturers Peter Brown and Betty Weiler needs and abtllttes of persons from the followtng management and structure of the tourism industry. groups: Indlvtduals wtth physical and Intellectual Goodale. T. & Witt. P. (eds) 1985. Recreation and Prerequlstle LEIS 104 Tourism in a global context is examined.. with special Leisure Issues In anEraoJChange. State College. PA. dlsabtltttes. older adults. persons of Aboriginal Hours Three teaching hours per week emphasis on the Australian tourism industry as descent and non-Engltsh speaking residents. The Venture. part of a global phenomenon. The unit introduces Offered Semester 2 subject provtdes an overview of "disabtltttes" and Iso-Ahola. S. 1980. The SoctalPsychologyoJLelsure students to tourism and the tourism industry. their classification. and explores barrlers to leisure and Recreation. Wm C. Brown. Dubuque. Assessment Continuous and examination organisations with the industry and to relevant particlpatton. Historical aspects of the treatment Pearce. P. 1982. The SoctoI Psychology oj Tourist Content dlsclpUnal)' and InterdlsclpUnaty approaches to their study. Trends and career opportunities In and care of people wtth "spectftc needs" wtll be Behaviour. Pergamon, Oxford. Research is a process of inquiry in some field of examined. The subject concludes with a review of tourism are covered. Sears. D .. Peplau, L. & Taylor. S. 1991, Soctal knowledge for the purpose of dtscovering and the current status of leisure services. including establishing facts and prinCiples relevant to that References travelopportuntttes. forpersonswtth "spectftcneeds". Psychology. 7th edn, Prenttce-Hall. Englewood CUffs. field. The motive for doing research might be to Frldgen. J.D. 1991. Dtmenstons oj Tourism. where the role of the leisure "profeSSional" will be LEIS206 lEISURE MANAGEMENT contribute to the development of theory. or may be Educational Institute. East Lansing. examined. PRACTICE 20cp geared to the solution of problems which arise in a Ryan. C. 1991, Recreational Tourism, Routledge. References policy. planntng or management situation. Thts Lecturers Peter Brown and Harold RicWns London. subject introduces studen ts to the range of research Hutchison. P. &Lord.J. 1979. Recreationintegrallons Prerequisite LEIS 102 Issues and Alternatives In Leisure Serofces and approaches and methods that are used in leisure Hall. M. 1991, Tourism In Australia, Longman. HOUTS Three teaching hours per week Melbourne. Community Invo!vemen~ Lelsurabtllty PubUcattons. and tourism research. planning and management. Offered Year-long subject The use of non-survey methods. in particular. Is Ottawa. lEIS211 TOURIST BEHAVIOUR Assessment Continuous and examination emphasised In this subject. These Include Schlelen. S.J. & Ray. M.T. 1988. Conununlty AND INTERACTIONS lQep observation research. ethnography. action research. Recreation and Persons with DlsabUII1es Strategies Content content and textual analysis, and the use of Lecturers Georgia Young and Betty Wetter Jor Integration. Paul H. Brookes. Sydney. Effective management in leisure services is concerned consensus methods in research. Students are also Prerequisite LElS209 Wolfensberger. W. 1972. The Princtple oj wtth setttnggoais and meettngol:!1ecttvesand targets. introduced to the stages involved In developing a Hours Three hours teaching per week Nomu:dlzatIDn fnHuman Serotces. National Institute achlevtngopttma1useofhuman.flnanclalandphyslca1 research proposal. This subject is a necessary on Mental Retardation. Toronto. resources, meettng priority needs and offering the prerequisite for LEIS307. which focuses on the Offered Semester 2 most attractiVe servicesto meetrecreatlon and tourism application of survey methods In leisure and tourism Assessment Continuous lEIS204 THE SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY demands. Through a series ofcase studies. vtslts and research. Content OF LEISURE l~p structured acttvtttes. students wt11 be exposed to a ReJerences Lecturer Sue Mulotn range of management practtces employed In leisure This elective subject seeks to provtde students with service organisations. The subject is taught from a Batley. K. 1982. Methods oj Social Research. The an overview of theories and models of tourist Prerequisite LEIS 103 or PSYC 102 or eqUivalent problem-solvtng basis, whereby students wtll be Free Press. New York. behavtour. Consideration is given to the various HOUTS Three hours teaching per week encouraged to apply theories to management practice Henderson. K. 1991. Dimensions oj Choice: A motivations which underpin travel and destination Offered Semester 2 and to relate their knowledge and skt1ls to the field QualfJativeApproach toRecreationParks and Leisure choices. and how this knowledge Is applied In Professional skills In decision-making. team bUilding, marketing deciSions. The subject Is also concerned Assessment Continuous assessment and Research. Venture Publtshlng. State College P.A. leadership and communlcatton wt11 also be developed with the Impact oftourists and tourism development examination Veal. A 1992. Research Methods Leisure and through this approach to learning. Thts SUbject Jor on host communities. The perceptions of host builds on concepts developed In LEIS 104 and Is a Tourism. Longman. London. communities to tourists and tourlsm are discussed, necessal)' pre-requisite for LEIS303. and the Importance of developing host-guest Faculty of Recreation & Tourilm Section FIve Faculty of Section Five Recr.. tlon & Tourism Social Science SubJect Descriptions Social Sc'-nce Subject Descriptions

relationships in creating a sustainable tourism 1E18301 lEISURE THEORY lOcp References Stanley. P. 1989. AccounUng for Non Accountants. Industry assessed. Lecturer Michael Labone Veal. AJ. 1991. Research MetlwdsJor Leisure and Schwartz & W!lldnson. Melbourne. ReJerences Prerequisite lEIS201 and LEIS204 Tourtsm. School of Leisure and TOUrism Studies. 1E18306 lEISURE AND REGIONAL ursSydney. Frldgen. J.D. 1991. D!menslons oj Tourism, Hours Three teaching hours per week PLANNING lOcp Educatlonal Instltute. East lansing. Offered Semester 1 1E18303 lEISURE/TOURISM Lecturers Betty Weller and Kevin Markwell Mathieson. A. & Wall. G. 1982. Tourism EconomIc. APPLIED STUDY lOcp Prerequisite U;:ISI04 Physical and Social Impacts. Longman. London. Assessment Continuous Lecturers Georgia Young. Michael Labone. Sue Content Hours Three teaching hours per week Murphy. P. 1985. Tourism A Comnwnlty Approach, Muloin and Peter Brown Methuen. London. This subject explores 'leisure' as a theoretical concept Offered Semester 2 (commencing 1995) Prerequisite LEIS206 and LEIS207 or eqUivalent and Critically examines the value ofletsure theory as Assessment Continuous and examination IEIS212 NATURE BASED RECREATIONIOcp a basis for understanding leisure behaviour and Hours 300 hours directed study/field placement Content Lecturer Michael Labone organisation. The subject draws on the literature Offered Year-long subject from a number of diSCiplinary areas which have This subject seeks to develop an understanding of Prerequisite Nil Assessment Continuous been applied to the study of leisure and reviews the geographic concepts and planning processes as Hours Three teaching hours per week plus five days contributions of each to the theoretical debates in Content they relate to leisure selVices. Geography is of field excursions Leisure Studies. These diSCiplines will Include Subject content will be established at the beginning concerned with the spatial distribution ofphenomena Offered Semester 1 philosophy. psychology. SOCial-psychology and of the semester through a "learning contract". This and the relationship between people and the Assessment Continuous SOCiology. The central themes ofkeywrlters such as contract will be based on a fonnal proposal to environment. Planning Is concerned with Aristotle. Simmel. Mead. HuiZInga. Bateson. Kelly. undertake an applied studywlth a specific agency or antlclpatlng the future and guiding change through Content Parker. Deem. Elias and Rojek will be analysed and organisation in the leisure/tourism field. the allocation of resources. This subject explores This subject examines nature and natural the relevance of these concepts to the organisation discussed. The subjectWill provide students With an opportunity environments as an Important dimension of oflelsure by focusing on planning and development Burlon. T. & Jackson. E. 1990. Understanding to further deVelop and apply research and recreation behaviour and introduces students to the issues In the Hunter Region. Leisure and Recreation Mapping the Pas~ Charting management skills in an organisation ofthetrchoice. theory and practice of outdoor recreation the Future. Venture. State College Pa. and under the supeIVIslon of University staff. References programming. The theoretical component of the subject Includes topics In human ecology. philosophy Rojek. C. 1985. Capitalism and Leisure Theory. References Dean. J. & Judd. B. 1985. Tourist Developments In Australia. RAIA Educatlon Division. Canberra. and environmental psychology. The practlcal Tavistock. London. To be advised component provides an ove:rvtew of the skills and 1E18302 RESEARCH METHODS IN Farrier. D. 1988. Erwlronmental Law Handbook lEl8304 FINANCING lEISURE resources necessary to conduct nature based lEISURE AND TOURISM 20cp PlanntngandLand Use In NSW. Redfern Legal Centre. recreation programmes. During the semester SERVICES lOcp Sydney. Lecturers Peter Brown and Betty Weiler students will plan and Implement a series of field Lecturer Michael Labone Marriott. K.L. 1990. Recreation Planning: A Manual excursions which will focus on programme areas Prerequisite LEIS201 and LEIS202 Prerequisite LEIS202 Jor Local Government, Department ofRecreatlon and such as environmental education. personal and Haws Three teaching hours per week Sport. South Australia social development. stafftraining and tourism. These Haws Three teaching hours per week McLaughlln.J.B. & Huxley. M. 1986. UrbanPIannIng field trips will also give students first hand experience Offered Year-long subject Offered Semester 2 In Australia: Critical Readings. Longman Cheshire. of nature based activities such as bushwalking and Assessment Continuous and examination Assessment Continuous Melbourne. llght-welght camping as they relate to the various Content Content programme areas. Research Is a process of inquiry In some field of IEIS307 RESEARCH METHODS IN This subject presents an overview of financial References knowledge for the purpose of discovering and lEISURE AND TOURISM 2 lOcp management practices In leisure service establishing facts and prinCiples relevant to that Lecturers Peter Brown and Betty Wetler Bammel. G. and Bammel. L. 1992. Leisure and organisations. The subject Will focus on costing. field. The moUve for doing research might be to Human Behaviour. Wm C. Brown. Dubuque. pricing and budgetlng procedures as they apply to Prerequisite LEIS207 contribue to the development of theory. or may be Ford. P. & Blanchard. J. 1988. Leadership and leisure seIVIces. Students will also be introduced to geared to the solution of problems which arise In a Haws Three teaching hours per week Administration oJOutdoor Pursuits. Venture. State techniques for seeking and obtaining funds In the Offered Semester 1 (commencing 1995) College P.A. policy. planning or management situation. This fonn of both government grants and commercial subject introduces students to the range of research sponsorship for the provision of leisure seJVIces. Assessment Continuous and examination Ibrahim. H. & Cordes. K.A. 1993.0utdoorRecreotfon, approaches and methods that are used in leisure Content Brown and Benchmark. Dubuque. and tourism research. planning and management. References Tyler Mmer. G. & Armstrong. P. 1987. Uvlng In the Consideration is also given to the devleopment and Howard. D. & Crompton. P. 1980. Financlng This subject builds on concepts and skUls developed Environment. Nelson Wadsworth. Melbourne. implementation of research proposals. Managing and Marketing Park and Recreation In LEIS207. with an emphasis on sUIvey methods Resources. Wm C. Brown. Iowa. and their application to leisure and tourism research. Faculty of Section Five Recreation. Tourl ..... Faculty of Section Five Recreation & Tourism Social SCience Subject Description. Social Scltince SUbJect Descriptions

Refereru::es based tourism as well as resort and destination planning and management. Students wUl be Stoddart, B. 1986, Saturdayliftemoon Fever, Sport planning. The roles of !he publtc and !he prtvate introduced to the concepts and procedures involved In the Australian Culture .. Angus & Robertson, Wetler, B. & Hall, M. 1991, Special Interest Tourism, sectors are evaluated as well as the nature. In sampUng, developing questionnaIres, Interviewing, Sydney. Belhaven Press. parameters and constraints attached. to tourism carroll, P. et al (ed) 1991, Tourism In Australia, SUlVey management, data analysIs using SI'SS, as development. Additional aims of the subject are to well as research report writing. LEl8312 TOURISM IN DEVELOPING Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. Sydney. COUNTRIES lOcp create an understandtngofpubltcpoltcyanddeciston Refereru::es making for tourism planning and prOVide an Lecturer Georgia Young LEl8314 PROGRAMMING FOR Balley, K. 1982, Methods oj Social Research, The PERSONS WITH appreciation of poltcies and models for !he planning Free Press, New York. Prerequisite IEIS211 SPECIFIC NEEDS lOcp of tourism areas. Hours Three hours teaching per week Commonwealth Department of Health 1985. Lecturer Sue Mulotn References Comnwnity Suroeys: A Practical Guide, AGPS, Offered Not available In 1994 Prerequisite LEIS203 Gunn, C. 1988, Tourisml'lann/ng, Taylor & Francis, Canberra. New York. Assessment To be advised Hours Three hours teaching per week Veal, A. 1992, Research Methods Jor Leisure and Inskeep, E. 1991, Tourism Planning: An Integrated Content Offered Semester 2 Tourism, Longman, London. and Sustainable Development Approach, Van Thts elective subject Is concerned with the Assessment Continuous Nostrand. New York. LEI8311 SPORT AND A11STRALlAN development potential offered by tourism to Content SOClETY lOcp developing countries. The concept of economic Lea, J. 1988, Tourism and Development In the ThIrd "growth" is examined alongside problems of This subject further explores the leisure needs and World, Routledge, London. Lecturer Peter Brown international dependency. access to world markets abilities of persons with "specific needs" with a focus LEIS316 TOURISM ENTERPRISE Prerequisite Completion of 60 cps and other development constraints commonly on personswl!h physIcal and intellectual dlsabllttles. MANAGEMENT lOcp HolUs Three hours teaching per week encountered by developing counties. The soctal. It examines current Issues and research with an Lecturer Harold RIchins Offered Semester 2 cultural and environmental impacts of tourism are emphasis on programming and seIVIce responses assessed and the practical problems of scale. access for persons with a dlsablltty. PrereqUisite IEIS211 Assessment Continuous assessment and and the supply of tourist resources considered. References examination Hours Three teaching hours per week ReJereru::es Content Howe-Murphy. R. & Charbonneau. B. 1987. Offered Semester 1 Sml!h, V. L. (ed.) 1988, Hosts and Guests The Theropeutic Recreation Intervention An Ecological Assessment To be advised The subject focuses attention on the SOCiolOgical Anthropology oJTourism, 2nd edn, UnIversIty Press, PerspecUve, Prentice-Hall, Englewood CUffs. dtmensions of games and sport. from a perspective Phtladelphla. Content which views sport as a socialinstttution which both Peterson, C.A. & Gunn, S.L. 1984, Theropeutlc RIchter, L. 1989, The PoIlttes oj Tourism In Asia, Recreation Design Prfncfples and Procedures, 2nd This subject builds on the concepts and shapes and is shaped by social. economic and fundamentals of previous work !hroughout !he polttlcal processes. Through a range of structured University of Hawatt Press. Honolulu. edn, Prentice-Hall, Englewood CUffs. student's academtc experience and focuses on workshops and directed readIng, students will Reynolds, RP. & O'Morrow, G.S. 1985, Problems, IEI8313 LEISURE, TOURISM AND functional management areas within a tourism develop an awareness of the role of games and sport Issues and Concepts tn 11terapeutf.c Recreation. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES lOcp organisation. Tourism Enterprise management takes Prentice-Hall, Englewood CUffs. in the llvesofAustralians. as wellas an understanding on an applied. focus to the managementandoperat1on of the factors that contribute to Australia's sporting Lecturer Sue Mulotn LElS315 TOURISM POLICY AND of various tourism enterprises. Identity. In addition. students will be encouraged to Prerequisite LEIS21 1 or LEIS212 PLANNING lOcp The subject will examIne aspects of the following; examine the Impact of politics. economics. Hours Three hours teaching per week competition and gender on sport and its partlctpants. Lecturer Betty Wetler strategiC tourism planning; tourism resort Offered Semester 2 development; quality management. customer service References Prerequisite LEIS211 Assessment Continuous and !he human dimension; Improving productivity; Goldlust, J. 1987, PlayingJor Keeps Sport, the Media Hours Three teaching hours per week Content employee and Industrial relations; tour operation and Society, Longman CheshIre, Melbourne. Offered Semester 2 and tourism productdestgn; meetings. conventions Thtssubject explores the relationship between leisure Lawrence. G. & Rowe. D. 1986. Power Play The and event management; financtal control and pursuits and environmental concerns. It examines Assessment To be adVised Commercialisation of Australtan Sport. Hale & technology In tourism management; and managing curren t research and Issues related to environmental Content Iremonger. Sydney. within regional tourism offices. considerations In the planning of leisure factlttles This subject focuses on planning as a process and a McKay, J. 1991, No Pain, No GaIn? Sport and References and the development of services and programmes. set of techniques for sustainable tourism Australian Culture, Prentice-Hail, Sydney. Areas of focus will include eco·tourtsm. educational development. It looks at the physical environment Powers, T. 1988, Management In the Hosp!taIUy Rowe. D. & Lawrence. G. 1990. Sport and Lefsure travel. and wilderness access. The development of of planning, and !he socIal, cultural and political Industry, 3rd edn, Wiley, New York. 1rends fnAustrailanPopular Culture. Harcourt Brace an understanding and awareness of these concerns realities of planning and poltcy development. Gee. C.Y. 1988. Resort Development and Jovanovich. Sydney. and their Impact on future leisure opportunities will Emphasis Is placed on regional and community· Management. 2nd edn. The Educational Institute of be reviewed and discussed. Faculty of Section Rve Recreation & Tourtsm Faculty of Section Five Recr.. tion. Tourtlm Soclll Science Subject Descriptions Socia' Science Subject DelCrlptlonl

the American Hotel and Motel Association. East Content ofthe student's Interestwlthln a tourtsmorganlsatlon LEl8321 ADVENTURE PROGRAMMING Lansing. Emerging areas within the tourism IndusUy have or regarding a major tourism Issue. AND EXPERIENTIAL Keiser. J.R. 1990. Principles and Practfees oj seen the developmentof more specialised commercial This subject has been designed to address key EDUCATION lOcp Management In the Hospitality Industry. 2nd edn. sectors. Three of these sectors are covered In this issues In the area of specialisation. at both the Lecturer Michael Labone Van Nostrand. New York. subject. Including: meetings. events and tours. The organisational and IndusUy level. It draws on Prerequisite lEIS 212 or eqUivalent meetings market. which involves large conferences previous areas of research. problem solving skills LEl8317 CURRENT ISSUES IN and conventions as well as smaller functions and and project work. as well as various disciplines of Hours Three teaching hours per week plus 7 days of expeditions TOURISM lOcp meetings. has long been an Important component of study. It also provides a forum for the cross Lecturer Harold Richins the tourism Industry. Event tourism is an emerging fertilisation of ideas between speclalisattons (I.e. Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite LEIS211 area of specialisation In tourism. due to increasing tourism management. human resource Assessment Continuous Importance of special events from large scale to one­ management. marketing and enterprise Hours Three teaching hours per week Content day community festivals. A growing diversity In the management). Offered Not available In 1994 This subject offers students the opportunity to interests of tourists and an Increasing need for The subject examines aspects ofthe tourism industry develop specialised knowledge and skills relevant to Assessment To be advised richer experiences have resulted ina more demanding from a management and professional perspective expanding sectors of the leisure industries such as customer. This has led to a speclaltsation and and utt1tses these In the development and Content adventure travel. ecotourlsm and experiential increased sophistication In the area of tour managing implementation of an applted project that addresses This subject strives to develop an understanding of education. In the theoretical component of the and tour guiding. an organisational or industry issue. and appreciation for the prominent contemporary subject students will explore the concept of This subject develops a systemattc approach to the issues facing organisations Involved in tourism on 'adventure' and examine 'environmentalism' as a planning. marketing and managing of meetings, LEl8320 TOURISM MARKETING lOcp both a national and internatlonallevel. Particular social movement. analysing its influence on leisure events and specialised tours. It tllustrates key Lecturer Harold Richins issues are explored from the perspective of the behaviours. A philosophical approach to the concepts and methods.addresses costs and benefits. tourism industry. the tourist. the host and Prerequisite MNGT230 or eqUivalent relationship between humans and nature will be looks at participants and their needs. and explores population. and other diverse groups affected by Hours Three teaching hours per week developed through engagement with the literature specific techniques and their practical application. tourism. Offered Semester 1 in environmental ethics and deep ecology. In the Students will develop an understanding of the Students are expected to utilise the skills and Assessment To be advised applied component. students will research. develop context. significance. roles and responsibiltUes of knowledge obtained In other subjects to Critically and implement a varlety of programmes suitable to Industry elements In the management and function Content revlewlssues. draw analogies. synthesise and analyse applications in adventure travel. ecotourtsm and of convention. events and specialised tours as a part This unit draws on the concepts and fundamentals Ideas. explore alternative viewpoints to an tssue, experiential education. These programmes will of the Australian tourist product. of marketing presented In Marketing PrinCiples and discuss interrelationships to other issues and sectors form the basis of a series of expeditions throughout focuses on tactical aspects of tourism marketing. of tourism and other industries. draw conclusions. References the semester. Expedittons will involve experlence of This Includes the further development of the "Four wilderness areas such as rlver and cave systems. make recommendations and discuss questions for Weller. B. & Hall. C.M. 1992. Specta1InterestTourism, Ps" of the marketing mix Into "Eight Ps" of tourism further thought and analysis. Belhaven. London. alptne environments and rainforest. and activities marketing (Partnership. Products. People. Packaging. such as canoeing. abseiling. climbing. caving. skttng References Getz. D. 1991. Festivals. Special Events and Tourism, Programming. Place, Promotion and Price). and canyontng. rThe nature of the expeditions and Cnilk. J. 1991. Resorting to Tourism, Allen and Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York. Emphasis will also be placed on the posltlontng of chotceofactiv1tleswtllbedependentonstatfresources Unwin. Sydney. Pond. K. 1993. 'The ProJesslonal Gutde: Dynamics oj tourism products and the development and and student Interests.) Smlth. V.L.. Eadington. W.R (ed) 1991. Tourism Tour GuIding. Van Nostrand Reinhold. New York. understanding of the tactical strategies for marketing References: Alternatives. University of Pennsylvania. a tourism seIV1ce. The subject also examines the LElS319 PROJECT IN TOURISM Fox. W" 1991. Toward a '/l"anspersonal Ecology: design and use of creative promotional and media Philadelphia. MANAGEMENT lOcp Deueloping New Foundations Jor Environmentalism, techniques within the tourism IndusUy. Medlk. S. 1991. Managing Tourism, Butterworth/ Lecturer Betty Weller Shambhala. Boston. Helnmann, Oxford. References Kraft. R. and Sakofs. M. (eds). 1990. 'The 'Theory oj Prerequisite MNGT332 Morrison. Alastair 1989. Hospitality &Travel LEl8318 SPECIALISED SECTORS OF. Experiential Education. Association for Experiential Hours Three teaching hours per week Marketing. Delmar. Albany. THE TOURISM INDUSTRY IOcp Education. Boulder, Colorado. Hart. Christopher W.L. & Troy. David A. 1986. Offered Semester 2 Manning. R.. 1985. Studtes In Outdoor Recreation. Lecturer Betty Weiler Strategic Hotel/Motel Marketing. The Educational Assessment To be advised Oregon State University Press. Oregon. Prerequisite LEIS209 Institute of the American Hotel & Motel Association. Content Miles.J.C. (ed). 1990. AduentureEducatton. Venture. Hours Three teaching hours per week East Lansing. This subject builds on the concepts and State College PA Offered Not available In 1994 Laws. Eric 1991. Tourism Marketing: Service and fundamentals of previous work throughout the Quality ManagementPerspectives. Stanley Thomes. Assessment To be advised student's academic experience and focuses on areas Leckhampton. Faculty of Section Five Recreation & Tourism Faculty of Section Five Social Work Social Science Subject Descriptions Socia' Science SubJeet Descriptions

LEI8322 LEISURE. AGEING AND fnterpretatlonprogrammes. Anumberofcasestud1es BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK This subject consists of a number of campus based RETIREMENT IOcp and field visits will examine recreation management SWRKI0l INTRODUCTION TO skills workshops and activities which prepare Lecturer Peter Brown in park areas such as suburban playgrounds. 8OCIALWORK 20cp students for their first Field Education Placement sportsfields. nature reseIVes, coastal foreshores. (SWRK205B) in the second semester. The subject is Prerequisite 80 credit points Introduction to Social Work focuses on the Social national parks and state forests. assessed by testing the students' basic skills and Worker in contempomry Australian SOCiety. It Hours Three teaching hours per week general readiness to begin placement. References Introduces students, through a series of exercises, Offered Not offered in 1994 Clarke. RN. & Stankey. C.H.• 1979. The Recreation visits and activities to the broad knOWledge base of SWRK206 FIELD EDUCATION IB IOcp Assessment Continuous Opportunfty Spectrum. Missoula, USDA Forest Social Work, the methods used and the fields or Offered Semester 2 Content SeIVtce, Missoula. areas of practice. Through involvement In a range of typical practice Issues and examples, students gain This subject consists of 50 days of supeIVtsed Field Australia is experiencing rapid population ageing. Jubenvtlle. A.• 1\vtght. B.N. & Becker. R.H .• 1987. knowledge. develop Inittal skills and explore the Education placementwtth a deSignated Field The number of people aged 60 years and over Is Outdoor Recreation Management: Theory and values Inherent tn Social Work Practice. Educator In a Social Work agency or organisation expected to increase from 2 mtllion in 1981 to 3 Application, Venture. Pennsylvania. and of a number of campus based seminars and mllllon in 200 I and 5 mtllion in 2021. Australians Lipscombe. N.R. 1987. Park Manogement Planning. SWRK201 SOCIAL WORK THEORY I 20cp activities. are also retiring earHer. This subject examines these Riverlna-Murray Institute of Higher Education, In the second year of their course, students work on SWRK301 SOCIAL WORK THEORY 11 20cp trends in the context of service delivery approaches Albury. a number of Learning UnUs that allow students to to the leisure needs of older persons. Problem Based Exercfses LEIMOI RECREATION AND TOURISM discover essential knowledge for Social Work. The Drawing on reduction. engagement and continuity HONOURS 80cp Learning Untts cover the followtngareas: Transitions, In the third year of their course, students focus on theories of leisure actlvtty. this subject will examine The Health System, Community Development, groups,organlsationsandcommunltles. Theyextend the following contexts for service provision: Full time students will enrol in LEIS401. Part time Famtltes, Industrial/Workplace Issues and Mental their learning about group dynamics, learn institution-based care and the deUvery of leisure students will enrol In LEIS402 In the first year and Health. In all areas of study the focus moves through organisational and administrative theories and they seIVices; delivery of leisure seIVices to communtty­ LEIS403 In the second year. personal. group, community and societal extend their learning about community organisation based older adults; health promoUon programmes Content perspectives. The political contest Is always and communttydevelopment. Students are expected for older adults; and pre-retirement education. Students admitted to the Honours program will be addressed. Students are expected to draw upon the to draw upon the knowledge and skills acquired tn References required to complete 20 credit points of approved knowledge and skills they have acquired In their study oflaw (LAW 10 I) and Polittcs and Public prerequisite subjects and to build on this previous Poltcy (SOCA206 or eqUivalent) and to Incorporate Kelly. J.R (ed). 1992. Actlv!ty and Ageing. Sage semester subjects as well as a thesis. Students learning. Assessment Is an Integral part of the this learning tnto graded series of exercises In each Publications. Newbury Park. should consult with the Head of Division of Leisure Studies with respect to their program of study. learning process. The subject Is closely Integrated of the study areas In Social Work. This subject Is Kendig. H. and McCallum. 1988. Grey Australia: with SWRK202. closely integrated with SWRK302. FuturelmpactsojPopulationAgelng.ACPS.Canberra. The Honours thesis comprises two main elements. Students will firstly develop a detailed research SWRK202 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE I 20cp SWRK302 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE 11 20cp MacNeU. R and Teague. 1987. Ageing and Leisure: proposal forpresentaUon to other Honours students Vitality tnLater UJe. Prentice-Hall. Englewood-CUffs Closely Integrated with SWRK20 I. this subjectcovers Closely Integrated with SWRK30 1. this subject and staff. Suggestions and critiques arlslng from the the same Learning Units as 201 with deSignated consists of the deSignated work activities and LEI8323 OUTDOOR RECREATION presentation will be Incorporated Into a revised activities and profeSSional skills prescribed In the profeSSional sktlls prescribed In the learning goals RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 10 cp proposal which will then be Implemented by the learning goals for each Unit Assessmentls an Integral for each module or exercise during the year. student. Lecturer Michael Labone part of the learning process and is In tegrated across In conducting the thesis. students will be expected SWRK20 I and 202. Assessment tasks are Iypically SWRK303 FIELD EDUCATION II 20cp Prerequisite LEIS 211 to Investigate an original problem In the leisure or tasks that a Social Worker would undertake In the Thts subject consists of 50 days of supeIVtsed Field Hours Three teaching hours per week tourism area and to produce a 15,000-20,000 word course of work rather than essays or assignments. Education placement with a DeSignated Field Offered Semester 2 (commencing 1995) thesis based on their revised proposal. Students will Educator In a Social Work agency or organisation be required to make an oral presentation of their SWRK204 SOCIAL WORK SPECIAL and a number of campus based seminars and Assessment Continuous completed thesis In their final semester. PROJECT 20cp activities. The 50 day placement occurs as a block Content This subject is taken. only by students with advanced during semester 1. This placement can occur beyond This subject introduces students to the history and standing for first year of the course. In lieu of the Hunter Region for some students. organisation of park systems In Australta. and SWRKIOl. The alms of the subject are similar to SWRK401 SOCIAL WORK THEORY III 20cp provides an ovetview of the principles and procedures those of SWRKIOl. but the content will be varied of park planning, design and management. The according to the prevtous educational and other This subject examines current areas of Social Work subject will focus on the role of recreation in the experiences of students with advanced standing. concern and involves a deeper examination and management of outdoor areas. Topic areas will consolidation of theoretical areas covered earlier in SWRK206 FIELD EDUCATION lA IOcp Include the Recreation Opportunity Spectrum. vtsltor the course. Some Issues to be covered will be poverty management. parks and publtc policy and Offered Semester 1 and the distribution of wealth, violence In society Faculty of Section Five Social Work Faculty of Section Flv. Social Work Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Sclence Subject Descriptions

(including domestic violence, elder abuse, chUd MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK SWRK506 WORKiNG WITH WOMEN networks and understanding the processes of power - A FEMINIST APPROACH lOcp abuse and incest. racism and ethnic violence). ethical 8WRK501 INTRODUCTION TO LEARNING in SOCIal work practice settings. and politcal debate and Social Work In Its Following a brtef review of selected feminist theory FOR ADVANCED PRACTICE lOcp SWRK511 PSYCHODYNAMIC APPROACHES international and ecological contexts. Each student andfemlntstanalysesoftherapythisoptiondevelops This subject locates theory and practice today by WITH lNDIV1DUALS, GROUPS in SWRK40 1 wUl explore a particular area of Interest a feminist approach to working with women. reviewing AND ORGANISATIONS lOcp in depth In an Individual project. This project wtll recent developments in Soctal Work. also contribute toward the grading of Honours In the Several Issues are then examined In more depth SWRK507 QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH Insights from the Object Relations and Self degree. InclUding the radical crtttque of Social Work, METHODS lOcp Psychology Schools about human development and competency and the measurement of effectiveness This subject deals with problem formulation, behaViour are Increasingly being applied in various SWRK402 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE III 20cp and the relationship between Social Work and other concepts ofmeasurement. probability and sampling. fields of practice. This subject explores aspects of This subject will focus on InteIVention skills In all theories/models of tnteIVentlon (such as family hypothesis testing and statistical manipulation of these theortes relevant to Social Work and helps areas of Social Work Practice. There will be some therapy. analytic approaches. humanistic data. Students will use the Statistical Package for students to include these approaches in their approaches. cognitive and behaviouristapproaches opportunity for students to pursue a particular the Social Sciences (SPSSX) and will complete a IntelVention repertoire. interest area and emphaSiS on the development of and feminist frameworks). small project InvolVing the design. collection and SWRK512 CURRENT SOCIAL WORK their own "style". InteIVentions covered will Include analysis of data relevant to a social Issue or area of 8WRJ502 CURRENT ISSUES 1N SOCIAL PRACTICE lOcp public debate/puhlic speaking, prepartng wrttten WORK THEORY AND theory of their choice. This subject Introduces students to areas of argument based on research and statistical PRACTICE lOcp information. policy development. organisational SWRK60S QUALITATIVE RESEARCH Innovative practice and/or areas ofspecial emphasis change. community action and interpersonal work This subject locates theory and practice today by METHODS lOcp in current practice. It draws upon the skills of a (which may Include radical casework. famtly therapy reviewing recent developments in Social Work. This subject deals with different approaches to range of Social Work practitioners from within and in Social Work. mediation and conflict resolution Several Issues are then examined In more depth qualitative research. including observation. film and beyond the Hunter Region. techniques). InclUding the radical critique of Social Work. sound recording. use of documents. self report and SWRK514 PRACTICUM lOcp competency and the measurement of effectiveness action research. It emphasises the links between SWRK403 FIELD EDUCATION III 20cp and the relationship between Social Work and other social theory and research methodology and This subject Involves a perlod of supervtsedadvanced This suject consists of 50 days of supervised Field theories/models of InteIVention (Such as family examines the impact of the various methods upon practice. a number of group supervision meetings Education placement with a deSignated Field therapy. analytic approaches. humanistic the likely ou tcomes of research projects. and a skills acqulstuon workshop. The work each Teacher. The placement will commence In the approaches. cognttlve and behavlourist approaches candidate undertakes In the Practicum wUl be decided Semester break with a 2 week block continuing 3 and feminist frameworks). SWRK609 HISTORY OF THE In consultation between the candidate and the WELFARE STATE lOcp Practlcum co-ordinator. days/weekdurtng II weeks ofSemester 2 and finish SWRK503 PRACTICUM 20cp with a 2 week block In the mid-Semester break. In This course considers the creation and evaluation of This subject Involves a period of supeIVisedadvanced 8WRK516 PRACTICUM lOcp addition there will be a number of campus-based the modem SOCial welfare state from the late 19th This SUbject Involves a period of supervtsedadvanced seminars and activities which wtll Include practice. a number of group supervision meetings century with special reference to the British Isles. practice. a number of group supelVision meetings preparation for employment. job-seeking skills and and a skills acquisition workshop. The wor~ each Australia and New Zealand. Particular attention will candidate undertakes In the Pracllcum wUl be decided and a skills acquisition workshop. The work each c~reer planning. be given to the development of child welfare measures. candidate undertakes In the Practicum wUl be decided in consultation between the candidate and the the treatment ofthe aged and women. the prevention in consultation between the candidate and the Practtcum coordinator. of poverty. the prOvision of social security benefits Practlcum co-ordinator. SWRK504 MINOR THESIS 40cp and the establishment of socialised medicine. The current debate about the alleged demise of the SWRK516 CRITIQUE OF THERAPEUTIC The thesis should present an original but limited welfare state in western economies wtII be analysed RESPONSES TO TRAUMA investigation of a topic in an area related to Social from an historical perspective. VICTIMS Work theory and/or practice. Each candidate will have a thesis su pervtsor. SWRK610 POWER AND INFLUENCE 1N Over the last 10 years helping profeSSionals have ORGANISATIONS lOcp Increasingly embraced therapeutic InteIVentions with SWRK505 THE POLITICS OF THE trauma victims. Simultaneously as "stress debriefing" This subject will study theortes oforganisations and PERSONAL: SOCIAL movement has emerged creating an explosion In the nature of power In organisations. It will examine WORK AND FEMINISM lOcp related research and profesSional literature. This strategies which enable social workers to establish Both Social Work and Feminism have as a central subject will trace the development ofthts InteIVention bases of power and influence so that they can work concern what has come to be known in popular movement from its origins In treatment of American successfully with their clients and change tenns as the "politics of the personal". This option Vietnam veterans. The application ofstressdebrieftng organisational practices which are not In the clients' inteIVentions to victims of any traumatic event examines the possible links between Social Work Interests. The subject will Include the management warrants critique from social. polttcal and and Feminism. of conflict in organisations. developing referral profeSSional perspectives. Students will also have Faculty of Section Rve Social Work Faculty of Section Rve & Social Sclance SubJect Descriptions Sociology Anthropology Social Science SubJect Descriptions

an opportunity to develop inteIVention skills in SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY SUBJECT Students applying to undertake a 300 level subject specific areas of inteIVention with trauma victims. DESCRIPTIONS need to have completed at least 20 cp of SOCiology Introduction SWRK617 CHJLD SEXUAL ABUSE: and Anthropology at 200 level or Its eqUivalent. They THEORY PRACTICE AND In thls Department the diSCiplines of Sociology and also need to complywtth the necessary prerequisites RESEARCH Anthropology are taught as Integrated sub-fields of for the subject they wish to take. This subject examines theoretical perspectives and the study of SOCiety. At 200 level and above, students Quotas maybe appUed to Sociology andAnthropology recent research In relation to child sexual abuse. are able to specialise to some degree In SOCiology or subjects in 1994. in order to avoid very large The emphasis is on the inter-relatedness of theory. social anthropology, although we see the two enrolments tn particular subjects. If so, there will be research and practice and on the critical evaluation disciplines as complementing each other. and expect a procedure for prior registration In late 1993. of current research and practice. In particular. the most students to take some of both. Details will be available from the Department of usefulness of feminist perspectives In research and Sociologists focus on the study of contemporary Sociology and Anthropology. practice with victims/survivors. non-abusing industrial society and examine topiCS such as the The following subjects from other Departments are significant others and offenders will be addressed. political process, work and Industry, soclalinequaUty, recognised by the Department of Sociology and gender. the family. community. medicine. Ideology. Anthropology as counting towards cp In SOCiology SWRK61S SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE religion. social change and the capitalist economic and Anthropology. AND FAMILY LAW system. While social anthropologists study similar IDS20 I Feminism: An Historical and Cross Cultural This subject examines the relationship between topics, their emphases. methods and approaches Perspective (10 cp) recent family research and currentfamily law practice often differ. reflecting the non-European and often with an emphasis on the Impltcattons of both for small-scale societies where most anthropolOgical 100202 Gender and Knowledge (10 cp) Social Work practtce across a range of practice research has traditionally been carned out. Since all HIST243 and HlST343 Colonisation and History: settings. Content areas encompassed Include: societies are increasingly becoming part of a single Aboriginal Australia and Papua New Guinea (10 cp) custody. access and child support; domesucvtolence; world system and the basic problems of soetal life Subjects Taught at the Central Coast Campus multicultural Issues In family law; family law and are everywhere the same. sociology and social child protection; mental health issues In family law; anthropology have become complementary parts of The following Sociology and Anthropology subjects the Social Work roles of family counsellor. report a general comparative study of society. will be taught at the Central Coast Campus In 1994: writer and expert witness; and alternative dispute SOCiology and social anthropology, while grounded SOCAlll Introduction to SOCiology and resolution. In ourobseIVations of human socialltfe. have strong Anthropology (full year) theoretical and philosophical bases. Their purpose SOCA203 Work in Industrial Society is not simply to accumulate information but to (semester 1) understand how society is organised. develops and SOCA366 Comparative Studies In Social changes. Inequality (semester 1) Further details of the courses available In Sociology SOCA202/302 Introduction to Medical and Anthropology maybe found In the Department's An thropology (semester 2) Manual. SOCA208/308 Media and Society (semester 2) Students applying to undertake a 200 level subject normally need to have completed 20 cp of Sociology loo-LEVEL SUBJECTS and Anthropology at 100 level. in other words SOCAlll Is a full year Introductory subject and Is SOCAlll (or both SOCAIOI and SOCAI02). The a prerequisite for all 200- and 300-level subJects. 1 semester subjectsSOWE 105 and SOWE 106, taught There are two hours of lectures each week and a one by the Department of Soctal Welfare until 1992. are hour tutortal class. All lectures are repeated at day recognised by the Department of SOCiology and and evening times and you are free to attend at Anthropology as eqUivalent to SOCAlll for the either time. You must also enrol for a tutorial group purpose of satisfying the prerequisites for 200 level subjects In SOCiology and Anthropology. There Is a broad range of offerings at 200 level. Students may undertake as few asa single semester The subject Australian Society, taught by the subject or any number up to the full range being Department ofSodal Welfare unttll992 (SKII0Wor offered by the Department. SOWEI 05/ 1 06), is considered as equivalent to SOCIII or SOCAIII Jar purposes ofprerequlstles. Occaslonally,partlcularsubjectsmay haveaddutonal alternative prerequisites. Sociology & Anthropology Faculty of Section Five Subject Descriptions Fecultyof Section Rve Sociology & Anthropology Social Science Soc'.' Science Subject Descriptions

Is abltltke leamlngto understand another language. Willis. Evan (ed) 1988. Technology and the Labour and attend that tutorial each week. Tutorial Process: Australasian Case Studies., Allen and state power. In the first four weeks Bany Moms In view of this, the subject will concentrate on attendance and participation Is an Integral and considers the issue of culture and power in terms of several selected texts of classical social theory with Unwtn. Sydney) essential part of all subjects tn the Department of youth subcultural style and resistance. Kerry the aim that students become familiar with these Sociology and Anthropology. The lectures and Carrington introduces students to the study of SOCA204 THEORY AND PRACTICE 0)1' texts and capable of explaining and crtticlslng them SOCL\L RESEARCH lOep tutorials complement each other, and the popular culture taktng up In particular the Issue of tn their own words. This subject will look at the Prerequisite SOCAI1 l.SOWEi05/l06orequlvaient. examinations assume that you are familiar with the gender and youth culture. The second half of her writings of Marx, Durkhelm and Weber, and also Eventng classes tn 1994 (Semester 2) matertal presented In both. Separate subject guides lecture serles considers the response of various tntroduce feminist theory as a substantially new for each semester will be available from the state agenCies (i.e. welfare, Judicial. police & type of approach that has been most thoroughly Hours 1\\10 hours per week departmental secretary near the start of each schooling) 10 the poliCing of young people. In the develOped since the early 1970s. Assessment To be advised semester. flnal series oflectures Raymond Donovan considers Recommended Reading Lecturers Dr Ellen Jordan and Dr John Gow SOCAlll replaces the fonner year-long subject, state responses to deviance and the control of sexual SOCII I. taught In 1992. and the previous two 'deviance' In relation to the theme of ideology and FIrestone. Shulamtth. 1979. The Dfalectic oj Sex: Content sexuality. 'The Case Jar Fem1n.lst Revolution Women's Press. semester-long subjects. SOC 10 1 andSOC102. which This subject Is Intended to give students basic skills were taught until 1991. Under exceptional Recommended Texts London. tn qualitattve and quantitative methods. It also alms circumstances (e.g. previous completion ofSOC 10 1 Abercrombie. N.• S. Hili el al. 1984. Dictlo111lT!J oj Haralambos. M. 1990. Sociology: Themes and to encourage a theoretically Infonned and reflexive only, or unavoidable absence from Newcastle for Sociology. Penguin. Perspectives. Bell and Hyman, London. view of the research process, research ethics, and part of the year) students may be permitted to take Bennett.J. and George.S. 1987. TheHungerMa.chine: Tucker. Robert C. (ed) 1978. The Marx Engels Reader. the social role of researchers and 'sclentific' one semesteronlyofSOCA111. in which case it will The PoIUIes oj Food. Polity Press. W.W. Norton and Co., New York. knowledge. be counted towards their degree as SOCAI01 (nrst S0CA204 will examine the literature and debates on semester) or SOCAI02 (second semester). Recommended Reading Weber. Max. 1985. The Protestant EthIc and the Spirit ojCapitallsm Unwin Paperbacks, London. the nature of science, social science. ideology and SUBJECT DESCRIPTION Camngton. Keny and Bany Moms. 1991. PoIUtes. what comprises an 'objective' view of knowledge. The Prtsons and Pwlishment: Royal Commissions and SOCA203 WORK IN INDUSTRIAL contrast between poslUvistand subjectivist views of SOCAlll INTRODUCTION TO ·Rtiforms·. (JownaiJor SocialJustCce S/udtes. Special SOCIETY lOep the production of ideas about socieUes Will be (SOCAIOI SOCIOLOGY AND Issue Series. vo1.4. SOCAI02J SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY 20ep Prerequisite SOCA III or eqUivalent. or Industrtal explored. Giddens. A. 1989. Soclo/cgy. Polity. Relations IIA The practicalimpl1catlonsofthese separate traditions Prerequisite nil Hebdlge. D. 1979. Subcultures: The MeanlngojStyle. Hours 1\vo hours teaching per week. Day classes in for an understanding of the research process will Hours Three hours teaching per week throughout Methuen, London. 1994 (Semester 2) then be examined. Topics will include sources of the year. Day and evening classes data for research projects, basic research concepts, Jagtenberg. T. and P. D'Alton (ed) 1989. Four Assessment Research project, essay, examination Assessment class work, aSSignments. examinations Dimensional Social Space: Class. Gender. Ethnicity principles of sampling, fieldwork, questionnaire Lecturer Dr Ellen Jordan design, interviewing and other research techniques. Lecturers Semester 1: Lois Bryson, John Gow. and Nature, Harper & Row. Kathy Robinson Najman.J. andJ. Western (ed) 1988. A Sociology oj Content Recommended Reading Semester 2: Keny Carrington, Raymond Donovan, AustTa1ianSoclety: Introductory Readings. Macmillan. This subject will examine the growth of Industrtal Lewlns. Frank. 1992. Social &tence Methodology. Bany Moms Robinson. Kathy 1986.StepchOdrenofProgress. State capitalism, its impact on the organtzatlon and Macmillan. Melbourne. University of New York Press. experience of work, the degree to which Its form Is de Vaus. D.A. 1991. Surveys In Social Research. Content determined by technology, and the relationship Schwichtenberg. C. (ed) 1993. The Madonna Allen and Unwin. London. Following a brieffntroduction to sociology and social between recent technological Innovations and Connection, Allen & Unwin. Sydney. anthropology. the first semester of SOCAlli will be unemployment. Particular attention will be paid to Glesne. Cortnne & Alan Peshkln 1992. BecomIng Qualitative Researchers: An Introduction. Longman. concerned with the nature of social inequaHty. To S0CA201 HISTORY 0)1' questions of ethnlc1ty, gender and professionaUsm. begin with. the subject will consider the notion of White Plains. NY. SOCIOWGICAL THOUGHT lOep Recommended Text inequality in the context ofcontemporruy Australian Prerequisite SOCA111. SOWEI05/ 106. orequlvalent Williams. Clare 1992. Beyond InduslTlll/ Sociology: SOCA205 ANTHROPOLOGICAL society, looking at issues of class. ethntcity and ANALYSIS lOep gender. The next section of the subject examines Hours 1\vo hours teaching per week. Day classes in The Work oj Men· Women, Allen & Unwin. Sydney) PrerequisiteSOCA111.S0WE 105/ 106 or equivalent fonns of inequality In the economic order of third 1994 (Semester 2) Newcastle Campus and Central Recommended Reading Coast Campus Hours Three hours per week. Day classes tn 1994 world societies, examining how new forms of Game. A. and R. prtngle. Gender at Work. Allen and Inequality accompany the incorporation of these (Semester 2) Assessment To be advised Unwin. Sydney. societies Within a global economy. The semester Lecturer Dr Teny Leahy Assessment To be advised concludes With a comparative study of different Littler. Craig R. (ed) 1985. The E>pertence ojWork. Lecturers Dr Barry Morns and Dr James Wafer structures of state power and political vtolence. Content Gower and Open University. Aldershot. The second semester of SOCAlll explores the For most students In their second year of SOCiology, Probert. Belinda. 1988. Working Uje. McPhee Grtbble. relations between culture, youth, sexuality and learning to understand classical sociological theory Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anlluopology Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anlhropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Content endorsement of ft. They emphasise the playful and Content in which those relations are constituted ad This subject introduces students to the major Ironic In the media and stress the multitude of The subject Will deal With some of the theoretical and represented. approaches in the discipline of social and cultural interpretations which different parts of an audience substantive issues associated with Aboriginal and How do we know the -nurd World"? This question anthropology through a seriesofcase studies selected bring to the popular media. other Indigenous peoples In modem liberal states. wtll be addressed through examining both first from ethnographies covering a range of SOCieties. By Recommended Reading The study materials for the subject wtll be drawn world and third world representations of the comparlng studies ofunfamJliar societieswtth studies prtmarlly from Australia but also from North America differences between them. The making of the of societies that are more familiar. the subject Berger, J. 1972, Ways oj Seeing, Penguin, Hannondsworth. and wtll deal With the relations of Indigenous groups contcmporwy world order wtIl be further located in focuses on the issues involved In the analysis of with the dominating state systems tn contexts of the Idea of the nation. The "problems" of the Third cultural difference. The subject Is designed as an Ooffman. E. 1979. Gender Advertisements. colonial conquest and racial stigmatlsatlon and World. as constituted In the discourse of Introductton to the Department's other offerings In Macmillan. London. subordination. The relations between indigenous Development, Will be explored through Interpreting anthropology. Root, J. 1984, PIctures ofWomen: Sexualtty, Pandora groups and Uberal States Will be covered In a analyses ofa series of major "problems": population. Recommended Reading Press. London. number of areas. The deprived and underprivileged the environment. and aid. The subject will then look status of Aborigtnal groups require that analyses at particular case studies: resource development Marcus, George E. and Michael M.J. Fischer 1886, • S0CA210 THE AUSTRALIAN FAMILY lOcp Anthropology as Cultural Cril:ique: An £>perlmental incorporate the broader issue of polttical and (the Soroako nickel project); the industriaUsing PrerequlslteSOCAI I I,SOWE 105/ 1060requivaient MomentlntheHwnanSciences. UntversltyofChicago economic tnequaltty in modern nation states. "Dragons" ofAsia (through Walden Bello'sana1ysis); Press, Chlchago. HolUs Two hours teaching per week. Day classes In However. our analysts of power shall be extended to women and industrialisation (Athwa Ong's work); 1994 (Semester 2) consider the Issue of cultural domination and the and the role of aid In constituting the Third World Rosaldo, Renato 1989, Culture and Truth: The question of cultural rights as It applies to Aborigtnal (the Margarinl project). Assessment Essays, exercises and seminar Remaking oJSociaIAnalysls, Beacon Press, Boston. people. We will focus upon the historical and presentation The subject will end with a consideration of the lure SOCA208 MEDIA AND SOCIETY lOcp contemporary constructions of"racial" and "ethnic" of modernity In contemporary Third World societies. Lecturers Inta Allegritti and Professor Lois Bryson identity and explore the cultural politics associated Prerequisite SOCAII!. SOWE 105/ 1060requivaient Content with the issues of assimilation. multi-culturaltsrn Recommended Reading HolUs Two hours teaching per week. Day classes In and Land Rights In terms of their Implications for Anderson, Benedict O'G. 1983, Imagined This subject prOVides an Introduction to the 1994 (Semester I) Comnwn.ltles: Reflections on the Origlnand Spread oj sociological study of familtes and the ways In which the status and rights of Indigenous peoples. The subjectWill also consider Aborigtnal representations Nationalism., Verso. This subject Will not be taught at the Central Coast they Interact with the Wider society. The subject ofthetrexperienceasexpressedin theircontrtbutions Campus in 1994 however It will be offered again In involves studies of key Issues of contemporary life. Bello, Walden and Stephanie Rosenfeld, 1990, 1995 as In 1993. for example the relationship between the division of to politics. literature and painting. Dragons in Distress: Asia's Miracle EconomIes in Assessment To be advised labour Inside and outside the family. parenttng. Recommended Readings Crisis. Lecturer Dr Teny Leahy divorce and social policies relating to famtltes. Beckett, J. 1988, Past and Present, AlAS, Canberra. Dorfman, A. 1983, The Empire's Old Clothes, Pluto Press. Content Recommended Reading Maddock, Kenneth 1982, TheAustrallanAborlglnes: Gtldlng, M. 199!. The Making and Breaking oj the A Portrait ojtheir SocIety, 2nd edn, PengUin/Pelican, Ong, Alhwa 1987, Spirits oJResistance and Capitalist The subject looks at popular media from the point of Australian Family, Allen & UnWin, Sydney. Melbourne. DIscipline: Factory Women tnMaiaysla., SUNY Press, view of two tendencies in sociological analysis of the Albany. media: hegemonic and post-modernist. Analysis of Dempsey, K. 1992,AMan'sTown: lnequalUyBetween Morris, Bany, 1989, IJomeslicatlng Resistance: The the media as hegemonic sees the media In terms of Women and Men In Australia. Oxford University Dhan.cadIAborlglnes and theAustrailanState, Berg, Robinson, K. 1986, Stepchildren oj Progress: The the way It reflects and serves the Interests of a ruling Press. Melbourne. Oxford. Political Economy oj Development In an IndoneSian class. Feminist analysIs of the media as hegemonic Mining Town., SUNY Press, Albany. Delphy, C. and D. Leonard 1992, Familiar SOCA213 DEVELOPING THIRD looks at men as a ruling class and marxist analysis Exploftatfon: A New Analysis of Marriage in WORLD SOCIETIES lOcp Porter, Doug, Allen Bryant and Gaye Thompson of the medta as hegemonic sees capitalists in this Contemporary Western Socfety. Polity Press. 1991, Development In Practice: Paved with Good role. More recently. there has been a shift In media Cambridge. Prerequisite SOCAII!. SOWE 105/ 1060requlvaient. Intentions, Routledge. analysts - towards what we may call a "post­ Hours Three hours teaching per week (tncluding one Shlva, Vandana 1989, StaylngAlIve: Women, Ecology S0CA212 INTRODUCTORY ABORIGINAL modernist" posttton. The analysis of the media as hour film program). Day classes In 1994 (Semester and Development. Zed Press. post-modem suggests that hegemonic analysis is STUDIES: CULTURE AND I) POLITICS lOcp too Simplistic and In a sense outdated by real Assessment Take home exam. major essay, book S0CA216 YOum. CULTURE AND changes in the popular media. Postmodernlst Prerequisite SOCAI I !.SOWEI05/ 1060requivaient review DEUNQUENCY lOcp approaches are more likely to view the media In HolUs Two hours teaching per week. Day classes In Prerequisite SOCAIII or eqUivalent terms of the desires and wishes of the audience. and Lecturer Associate Professor Kathryn Robinson 1994 (Semester I) Hours 1\vo hours teachtng per week. Day classes in to stress the way in which the media serves the Content Assessment To be advised 1994 (Semester I) audience. They are more likely to look at the media This subject will explore the relations between as a commentary on inequality rather thai). an Lecturer Dr Barry MOnis Industrialised and developing nations. and the ways Assessment To be advised Faculty of Section Five Sociology. Anthropology Faculty of Section Five Sociology. Anthropology Social ScJance Subject Descriptions Social ScJence Subject DescrlpUona

Lecturer Dr Kerry carrington In relation to the Ideas and polfcfes of the New Right. Willis. E. 1989. MedicalDomlnance. Allen & Unwin. Tonklnson. R and M. Howard (ed) 1990. GoIng It Content concludes the subject Sydney. A1Dne: ProspecIsJor Aborlg!nalAutonomy. Aborlgtnal Studies Press. Canberra. The subject begtns by tracing the development of Recommended Readings Scambler. G. (ed) 1987. Soc!olcgical Theory and WUllams. F. 1989Social Polfey. PoUty Press. sociological studies of youth cultures from its roots Bottomley. G. 1992. FromA""ther Place: Migration Medical SockJIogy. Tavfstock. London. In the etbnographlc studies of the Chicago School. and the PoIlt(cs oj Culture. Cambridge University Daniel. A. 1990. Medicine and the State. Allen & Canberra. to the contemporary studies of youth cultures Pre... Cambridge. Unwin. Sydney 8OCA221 SOCIOLOGY OF COMMUNITY lOep associated with the Birmingham Centre for Turner, B. 1987, Medical Power and Social Contemporary Cultural Studies (CCCS). Most Castles. S" M. Ka1antlls. B. Cope and M. Morrissey Prerequisite SOCA III or eqUivalent (ed) 1988. Mistaken Identity. Pluto Press. Sydney). Knowledge. Sage. London. Importantly. the Intellectual work of the CCCS HolUS Three hours teaching per week (Including one connected the study ofyouth cultures with concepts Colllns. Jock 1988. Migrant Hands In a Distant Lupton. G. & Najman. J. (eds) 1989. Sociology oJ hour f11m program). Evening classes In 1994 ofclass. ideology and hegemony. However, the subJect Land. Pluto Press. Cambridge.. Health and R1ness. Allen & Unwin. Sydney. (Semester 1) at Newcastle Campus. Day classes In also considers the critiques of subcultural theory Pettman. J. 1992. Uvlng In the Margins. Allen & Gerhardt. V. 1989. Ideas About mness. Macmfllan. 1994 (Semester I) at Central Coast Campus which later emerged from concerns about the Unwln.Sydney) Sydney. Assessment To be arranged inadequate treatment of gender and race In the SOCiology ofyouth subcultures. The latter half ofthe 8OCA219 SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH 8OCA220 ABORIGINES AND THE Lecturer Dr Santi Rozario subject moves on to analyse the polic1ng of youth AND ILLNESS lOep WELFARE STATE lOep Content subcultures and particular categories of'delinquent' Prerequisite SOCAIII or equivalent Prerequisite SOCAII I. SOWE!O5/ l06orequlyaJent. Thts subject introduces the concept of community youth at school, In public and on the streets. The Hours Two hours per week. Day classes In 1994 Day classes in 1994 (Semester 2) from historical and sociological perspectives. A subject brings a cultural studies approach to bear (Semester I) HOlUS 1\\10 hours teaching per week number of case studies both within and outside of on the analysis of delinquency In Australia. Australtaare used toapprectate both undifferentiated Assessment To be advfsed Assessment To be arranged Reconvnended Reading and differentiated types of communities. Lecturer Peter Khoury Lecturer Peter Khoury Hebdfge. D. 1989. Hiding In the Ught. Routledge and characterised by social cohesion on the one hand. Kegan Paul. London. Content Content and social InequaUty on the basis of class. etbnlclty. race and religion on the other. McRobble. A. 1991. Feminism and Youth Culture: This subject will provfde a SOCiological analysis of ThIs subject will prOvide a crlttcal analysis of FtomJaclde to Just Seventeen, Macmtllan, London. health and Illness In western industrial SOCieties. Aborlginesand thewelfare state in Australia. Central Recommended Texts .. The social dlstrfbutlon of health and lllness will be themes throughout this subject include: welfare as Dempsey. K. 1990. Smalltown: A Study oj Soc"'l addressed tn terms of key SOCiolOgical variables soctal control, welfare colonialism, and feminist and Inequality. CohestonandBe1onglng. Oxford University such as class, gender, race, ethnlclty and occupation. anU-racist critiques of the welfare state. Where 8OCA217 ETHNIClTY AND MIGRATION Press, Melbourne. possible reference wllI be made to other Indigenous SroDIES lOep The historical development and ascendancy of the Metcalfe. A. 1988. For FreedomandDlgntty: Histortcal biomedical model will be Critically examined as well populations such as Native Americans. Prerequisite SOCA III. SOWE 105/ 1060requlvalent Agency and Class Structures In the Coo!flelds oj as the role ofthe state In legltlmatlngand reinforcing An evaluation will be made of various government NSW. Allen and Unwin. Sydney. Hours 1\\10 hours teaching per week. Evenings In Its dominance. A number of health and medical poliCies such as segregatton, assimilation. self­ 1994 (Semester 2) issues will be analysed in terms of their social and management and self-determination, and of their S0CA223 THE CULTURE OF SEXUAL Assessment Seminar paper, book review, essay political dimenSions. Other areas covered In this effects on AbOriginal communities. The aim is to MINORITIES lOep understand how various state inteIVentions are Lecturer Inta Allegrlttl subject Include: medical dominance, alternative Prerequisites SOCAlll or eqUivalent therapies, power relations and the sexual division of experienced by Aborigines. Hours 1\vo hours per week. Evening classes tn 1994 Content labour In health care, the professlonalisatlon of One of the central concerns of this subject Is to give (semester I) Immigrants have always been integral to Australia's health care occupations. and the medlcallsatlon of priority to the Aboriginal viewpoint on welfare issues Assessment To be advised development, progress and indeed survival. They social problems. and soctalJustice and to be aware of how Aboriginal are not a homogenous group of people, but rather a The subject will also focus on key aspects of the perceptions and aspirations differ from dominant Lecturer Dr James Wafer reflection of Australia's Immigration poltcles. Australian health care system such as privatisation, and official viewpoints. Representatives from key Content Immigrants have settled from 140 countries around access to health services and the Impltcatlons of Aboriginal organisations will be Invfted as guest In this subject we will analyse the processes that the world and bring with them adlversftyof attitudes. medical technology. Comparisons will be made with speakers. have created a "heterosexual culture" In. western beliefs and social practices. the British and Amertcan health systems. Reconvnended Readings societies, and the parallel processes that have created. This subject looks at Immigration through the Reconvnended Reading Bennett. S. 1989. Aborigines and Political Power. "sexual minorities", consisting oftndividuals whose concepts ofethnlclty, class and gender. Immigration gender Identities and/or sexual practices are non­ poliCies and the poliCies of ethnic affairs will also be Davfs. A. & George. J. 1992. States oJHealth, 2nd Allen and Unwin. Sydney. edn. Harper & Row. Sydney. heterosexual. The subJectwill focus on two partfcular considered. A look at multiculturalism, particularly Pettman. J .• 1992. Uvlng In the Margins: Racism. sexual minorities-gays and lesbians-but wtll also Sexfsmand Feminism fnAustralta. Allen and Unwin, deal with others, Including bisexuals, Sydney. Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Facultyo! Section Flv. Sociology' Anthropology Social Science Subject DescrlptJons Social Science Subject Dliacrlptlon.

transgenderpersons. pedophiles. sado-masochlsts. HOlUS Two hours teaching per week. Day classes in The first section of the course will explore the Banner.l.oisandHartmann. Maryeds. 1974. Clio's etc. 1994 (Semester 1) emergence of first-wave feminism in nineteenth Consciousness Raised.. New York. centul)' Britain and North America. The effects of We will examine the theol)' according to which the Assessment Book review, seminar presentation and Summers. Anne 1975. Damned Whores and God's evolution of sexual minorities in the west has passed report. essay IndustriaUsation on women's social positlon (and Police .. Harmondsworth. through three main phases: the religious phase. the the ideologies defining tt) will be examined. aa will Lecturers Inta AlJegritti and Dr John Cow medical-scientific phase and the contemporary theuseofl1beral and radical Ideas to re-conceptualtse lDS202 GENDER AND KNOWLEDGE IOcp human rights phase. We will also study the Impact ConIent and challenge that position. Offered Semeater 2. 1994 of heterosexual culture on the peoples colonised by Thts subject introduces the historical development The second section will focus on the way indigenous Credit Points 10 the west. This win entatl consideration of historical of modern liberal nation-states within the context of cultural and broader Islamic values have shaped the Prerequisite 60 credit points at 100 level and cross-cultural variations In the construction of an international order. It focuses on the political poslUon ofMuslim women. The relationship between gender and seXUality. ideolOgies and Institutions that characterise such Imperialism. Islamtc fundamentalism and the Hours per week 1 lecture: 1 two hour tutorial. In addition. we will review the cultural politics of states and explores the relationships between political Muslim women's movement will be examined. Assessment 1\vo 1500 word essays. power. class. genderandethnlcltywtthtn this setting. contemporary sexual minOrities, particularly in Finally. the course will tum to the rise of second­ SpeCific issues to be covered will Include cittzenshlp, Lecturers Dr. J. Goodall. Mr. R. Mackie and Dr. AustraUa, and consider the reasons why gays and wave feminism In the second half of this century. civil society, forms of state intervention and K.Robinson lesbians have been able to claim a legal status as The work of charismatic and popular writers of the contemporary political and social movements. Content quasl-ethntc groups, whtle other sexual minorities 1960s and 70s which challenged established gender continue to be regarded as criminal. We will deal Recommended Reading roles and expectations in the Industrlaltsed nations This course will look at the various ways tn which with development of a contemporary gay and lesbian Allen. J .. Braham. P. and Lewis. P. Political and will be considered. Discussion of the movement of Ideas of gender have shaped and been shaped by knowledge. Beginning with an examination of the culture, its Internatlonal1satlon, and its prospects Economic Forms of Modernity, Polity Press In feminism beyond a campaign for political, social and for modifying what has been called association with the Open University, Cambridge. sexual rights to transforming Intellectual movement construction of masculinity in soclal, political and "heteronOrmatlvlty"-or "heterosexual culture's of Significance for all modem thought will conclude cultural contexts, the course will move on to look at Pateman. C. 1988. The Sexual Contract. Polity exclusive ability to Interpret Itself as society". the course. the ways In which metaphors of masculinity and Press,Cambridge. femlnlty are Integral to the argument of eighteenth Recommended Reading References Subjects offered In Semester 2, 1994 and nineteenth century sctentlfi.c discourse. Mary Aldrich. Robert. and Garry Wotherspoon (eds) 1992. Banks. Olive 1981. Faces ojFemlnlsm. Oxford. Shelley's Frankensteinwillbediscussedasanarrative Gay Perspectives: Essays inAusfTalian Gay Cultwe.. Gender Studies Subjects Jeffreys. Sheila. ed. 1986. The Sexuality Debates. reflecting a crisis In the btnary lOgiC which equates Department of Economic History. University of IDS201 FEMINISM: HISTORICAL AND London. woman with nature and man with culture. Sydney. Sydney. CROSS-CULTURAL Levine. Phillippa 1987. Victorian Feminism 1850- Symbolic classU1cations of gender will be further Blackwood. Evelyn [ed.) 1986. Anthropology and PERSPECTIVES lOcp 1900.. l.ondon. explored through debates In anthropology which Homosexual Behavior, Haworth Press. New York. Offered Semester 1. 1994. employ the comparative perspective to highlight Rendall. Jane. ed.1987. Equal or DilJerent: Women Faderman. Lllllan 1991, Odd Girls and ThlUlght Eurocentric assumptions concerning the natural Credit Poinis 10 and Politics 1800-I 914. Oxford. Lovers:AHistoryojLesbianUjein1WentfethCenlur!J order of gender relations. This would provide a Prerequisite 60 credit points at 100 level America, Columbia University Press, New York. Strachey. Ray 1978. The Cause: A Short History oj foundation for approaching contemporary critiques Hours per week 1 lecture: 1-2 two hour tu torial. the Women's Movement in Great Britain, l.ondon. Greenberg. David F. 1988. The Construction oj of those traditions ofenqutrywhlch aim toconstltute HOI11DSexuallty. University of Chicago Press. Chicago. Assessment Two 1500 word essays. Taylor. Barbara 1983. Eve and the New Jerusalem. themselves as "bodies of knowledge" . The latter part of the course will Introduce students to examples of Lecturers Dr Hilary Carey. Dr Ellen Jordan and Dr London. Kader. Chel)'l. and Thomas Plontex 1992. flaunting work which aims rather at knOwing the body in new Santi Rozario Al-hlbrl. A. 1984. Women and Islam.. Sydney. It: Lesbian and Gay Studies. Indiana University ways, as this work constitutes one of the most Press, Bloomington. Content Beck. L. and Keddie. N. eds. 1978. Women in the Important and rapidly expanding dimensions in Murray. Stephen O. 1984. Social Theory. HOI11DSexual The object of this course Is to investigate, in selected Muslim World.. cambrtdge. current theoretical enquiry. Realities. Gal Saber Monograph. New York. historical and cultural contexts. thepolttical, religious Tabarl. A. and Yegayneh. N. eds. 1982. In the References and sexual discourses which have defined and Shadow oflslwn London. Sedgwick. Eve Kosofsy 1990. Epistemology oj the Segal, Lynne 1990. Slow Motion: Changing ordered the place of women, and the varieties of Close~ University of California Press. Berkely. Caine, Barbara. Grosz E.A. and de Lepervanche. Masculinities. Changing Men. l.ondon. feminism which have arisen in response to them. Warner. Michael 1991, "Fear oj a Queer Planet". Marie eds. 1988. Crossing Boundaries. Femlnlsms Connel. R. W. 1987. Gender and Power. Sydney. Social Text 9:4. 3-17. These questions w1l1 be considered In terms of and the Critique oj Knowledges.. Sydney. concerns which have emerged from recent debates Spender, Dale 1983. There'salwaysbeenawomen's MacCormack, C. andStrathem. M. eds.1960. Nature. SOCA224 DEMOCRACY. POUTICS In contemporary feminism: the status of the female nwvement this century. London. Culture and Gender. cambridge. body, the existence of a uniquely female culture, the AND POWER IOcp Shlva. Vandana 1989. Staying Alive. l.ondon. Eisenstein. Hester 1984. Contemporary Femlnlst Prerequisite SOCAIII, SOWElO5/1060requlvalent status of women as 'other' In a relationship of subordination to the dominant culture. Thought Sydney. Easlea. Brian 1983. Fathering the Unthinkable. London. Focultyol Section Five Sociology' Anthropology Faculty of Section Flv. Sociology. Anthropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subloc! Deocrlptlono

Shelley. Mary 1984. Frankenstein. Oxford. Kuhn. T.S. 1970. The Structure oj Scfentfjlc pragmatic reconstruction of 'abnormal' eveIYdayor group of related but contrasttng soclettes of Central Mellor. Anne 1990. Mary Shelley. London. Revolutions. University of Chicago Pre... Chtchago. commonsense knowledge. (3) Psychiatric meantng­ andSouthejlStAsia These Include Buddhtst societies systems as ideology. and the influence It has on which have historically had weak tTIbet) and strong Martin. Emily 1989. The Woman In the Body. Boston. Feyerband. P. 1975. AgafnstMethod. Verso. London. state and bureaucratic knowledge ('officlal' discourse) ObatIand) state structures. and -tribal" soclettes In Caine. B .. Grosz. E.A. & de Lepervanche. M. eds. SOCA363 KNOWLEDGE, IDEOLOGY In shaping public concepttons ('unofficlal' discourse) the Southeast Asian highlands which retained 1988. Crossfng Boundartes: Fernfnlsms and the AND DISCOURSE 20Cp about rattonaltty and Irrattonallty. (4) The polittcal traditional spirit cults and other local ritual CrWque oj KnDwledge. Sydney. Pnerequlsite 20 credit points of Sociology and economy of decarceration or deinstitutlonaltsation complexes but tnteracted in various ways with the Dlprose R & Ferrell R. eds. 1991. Cartographies. Anthropology subjects at 200 level Including In North America and Australia. specifically the Buddhist societtes of the plains and the Htmalayan Sydney. SOCA201 1983 Richmond Report and the 1990 NSW Mental plateau. Within the Buddhist societies. cults oflocal Health Act. (5) The Influence official dlscou roe has spirits and deities coexisted wtth more specifically 300-LEVEL SUBJECTS HalUs Three hours teaching per week. Evening on conceptions of rationality In light of the recent Buddhist elements. All these SOcieties seem to be clas.. s In 1994 (Semester 1) SOCA362 RESEARCH METHODS IN government enquires Into Chelmsford Hospital. and exhibit less gender Inequality. and less rigidly SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL Assessment To be advised Townsville General Hospllal Ward lOS. prescribed social nonns, than the Hindu societies of ANTHROPOLOGY 20Cp Lecturer Dr Raymond Donovan Recorrunended Readings South Asia or the Confucian societies of East Asia. Through studying these Interrelated issues. we Pnerequlsite 30cp of SOCiology & Anthropology Content A. Esterson 1972. The LeaLoes oj Sprfng: A Study In explore central anthropological themes relattng to subjects at 200 level Including SOCA20 1 and This subject Is an Introductton to the sociology of the Dla1ectfcsofMadness, Penguin. Harmondsworth. S0CA204 or eqUivalent the state. power. religion and gender. knowledge. and selected issues tn contemporary M. Foucault 1967. Madness and C(vUisatton. Recommended Readings HolUs Three hours teaching per week. Day classes social theory. concentrating upon the work of Karl Tavlstock, London. In 1994 (Semester - Newcastle). (Semester 2 - Central Kirsch. Thomas 1973. FeastfngandSocialOscfUat1on. Mannhelm. Alfred Schutz and Michel Foucault. S. Garton 1988. Medicine and Madness: A Social Coast) Particular attention Is given to the competlngclatms Department of Asian Studies. Cornell University. History oJInsantty In New South Wales 1880-1940. Assessment To be advised of causal and reductive explanatlons of social University of New South Wales Press, Sydney. Samuel. Geoffrey 1993. ClvUtzed Shamans: phenomena. tn contrast to the interpretative· Buddhism In TIbetan Socletfes. Smithsonian Lecturers Dr Keny Carrington. Peter Khoury & Dr D. Ingleby (Ed) 1981. Critical Psychiatry: The Politics James Wafer hermeneutic tradition which places emphasis upon Institution Press, Washington DC. reason and motive tn human agency. The central oj Mental Health. Penguin. Harmondsworth. Content Tamblah. Stanley J. 1976. World-conqueror and theme of the subject focuses upon certain socio­ K. Mannhelm 1936. Ideology and Utopia, Routledge. World·Renouncer. Cambridge University Press. This SUbject emphasises the integral connections histOrical forms of rattonality and Irrationality. the London. between theory and method. We shall concern construction of scientific-medical knowledge. and A. Schutz 1962. Collected Papers. I: The Problem oJ SOCA366 FAMILY AND MODERNITY 20Cp ourselves wtth both discussion of the ethical. drawing upon a variety of critical historical and Social Reality. NIJholT. The Hague. Not available to students who have taken SOC306 theoretical and methodological Issues of social contemporary studies In the SOCiology of psychiatry. Family and Community. research, and wtth leamtngandapplytng the various The paradigm of psychtatric knowledge Is of Interest A. Strauss. L. Schatzman et aI. 1981. Psychiatric research techniques of SOCiology and social stnce In Its contemporary guise It fashions Itself on Ideologies and Institutions, new edn, Transaction. Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology & Anthropology anthropology. In this latter context we shall the methods and rhetoric of medical science (the New Jersey. subjects at 200 level emphasise different styles of research and their blo-medlcal model) yet. arguably. In Its practice the P. Wright and A. Trecher (ed) 1982. The Problem oJ HOlUS Three hours teaching per week. Day classes complementarity In overall research design. diagnostic procedures psychiatry employs Owe as Medical Knowledge: Examining the Social In 1994 (Semester 1) at Central Coast Campus Topics covered In the subject include Foucauldian much to the interpretative-hermeneutic approach ConstrucitonoJMedlcfne. Edinburgh University Press. Assessment Book Review. Essay. Examination and Kuhnlan crittques of science. obJecttvlty and of the social SCiences. It Is not the purpose of this SOCA366 TIBET AND SOUTHEAST Lecttuer Dr Ellen Jordan subject to call Into question the Integrity ofpsychiatric reason; feminist methodologies; research ethics; ASIA: BUDDHIST AND knowledge. diagnosis and treatment The concern Is Content interrogating official statistics; writing culture; doing TRIBAL SOCIETIES 20Cp ethnography and reading popular culture. with how social meanings and social processes in The subJect looks at the place of the family In Prerequisite 20cp of SOCiology & Anthropology Recommended Readings the identification ofmadness/1rratlonalltyare socially modem industrialised societies and tn particular situated and legitimated by psychiatric discourse subjects at 200 level Including at least one focuses on the extent to which changes In the nature CUITord. J. and Marcus. G. 1986. Writing Culture. and with how, histOrically. SOCial meanings about Anthropology subject of the family can be related to the broader question University of CaUfornla Press. Berkely. Insanity/mental tllness have changed. In accordance HOlUS Three hours teaching per week. Day classes ofthe nature of modernity. The historlcaidevelopment Irvine. J .. Miles. I. and Evans. J. 1979. Demyst1Jyfng with shifts In societal meaning-systems and In 1994 (Semester 1) of the family Is considered, Including critiques of the Social Statfstlcs. Pluto Press. London. discoursesaboutnormaltty/ abnormality. This theme Assessment To be advised family and proposals for utopian alternatives. SneJa. G. (ed) 199 I, A ReaderlnFernfnfstKnowledge. will be explored In relation to a range of historical Recommended Readfngs Routledge. London. and contemporary Issues. (1) The historical Lecturer Associate Professor Geoffrey Samuel 'discovery' of the social categories of reason and Content Anderson M. (ed) 1980. Socfology oj the Family. Gordon.C. (ed).1984.Power/Knowledge. Pantheon. Penguin. Harmondsworth. New York. Insanity. (2) The social production of clinical This subject discusses issues of pollttcs, the state. knowledge, and psychiatric diagnosis as the social structure. ritual. religion and gender among a Faculty of Section Five SoclologV & AnlhropologV Faculty of Section Five SoclologV & Anlhropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Socia' Science Subject Descriptions

Nicholson. Linda 1986. Gender and History: The Hours Three hours teaching per week. Day classes (1) Feminist debates concerning sexuality. sexed Assessment To be advised LImits of SocIal Theory In the Age of the Famtly .• In 1994 (Semester 2) bodies and the patterning of desire. with Lecturer Dr James Wafer Columbia University Press. New York. reference to prostitution and transsexual1ty. Assessment To be advised Content Stone. L. 1977. The Famtly, Sex and Marriage In (2) The 19th Century InVention of the homosexual Lecturers Dr Kerry Carrtngton and Dr Raymond England 1500-1800.. Weldenfeld and Nicholson. This subject traces the construction of the idea of Donovan personage as an abject body and. the London. Iconography and Ideology of the homosexual as Aborlglnallty In Australta. through an investigation Content dangerous Other. of textual (and some other) representations of the Zaretsky. E. 1976. Capitalism, the Family. and people now known as "Aborlglnes". It begins with a Personal Life.. Plu to. London. This subject focuses upon the government of the (3) The governmentofadolescent sexuality In regard brleflookatearlytexts, suchasaccountsbyexplorers body in contemporary soctety, and critically OptIDnaI Readings to multiple discourses about femininity, and escaped convicts, then moves to the sctentlzation addresses the issue as to how sexuality In general, masculinity that operate through governmental Fiske.J.. B. HodgeandG. Turner 1987. MythsofOz: of Aborlglnallty In the work of social evolutionists. and the sexed bodies of male and female desire in mechanisms such as age of consent legislation Reading Australian Popular Culture.. Allen and The main body of the subject Is devoted to an particular have. In parallel with the emergence of and sex education. Unwin. Sydney. examination of the anthropological construction of modern fonns of governmentality during the last (4) Childhood sexuality. paedophilia. and Aborlglnallty In the classic ethnographies. This two centuries. been defined. represented. managed 8OCA38O AUSTRALIAN CULTURE. Intergenerattonal sex. (5) Masculinities proVides the opportunity for dealing with particular and reconstructed. The subject critically evaluates MYTHS AND NATIONALISM 20cp and state power. (6) Pornography and the topics, such as kinship. that have been crucial to the the proposft1on that discourses of sexuality have Prerequisite 20cp of Saclology & Anthropology at feminist crlttque of patriarchy. development of a field of white "expert knowledge" moved along an historical continuum of progress 200 level about Aborlglnes. The last part of the subject covers towards sexual liberation. A number of discrete Recommended Readings the legal construction of Aborlglnallty. particularly HoLUs Three hours teaching per week. Day classes Issues will be addressed. fOCUSing upon the link Blrken. L. 1988. Consuming Desire: Sexual Science In the land claim process, and contemporary In 1994 (Semester 1) between science, medicine and moral polttlcs, and and the Emeryenceofa Culture ofAbundance, 1871· representattons of Aborlglnallty in the mass media. Assessment To be advised the strategies of governing bodies through the 1914. Cornell University Press. Ithaca. Recommended Reading Lecturer Dr Bany Moms sUlveillance and regulation of sexuality. It Is to be Burchell. G et a1. 1991. The Foucault Effect: Studies argued that the discovery of dangerous populations InGooemmentallty. HaIVester/Wheatsheaf.London. Beckett. Jeremy R. 1988. Past and Present: The Conient enabled marginal sexualities to be brought under Connell. R. W. 1988. Gender and Power. Polity ConstrucUon ofAborigiJwllty InAustralia, Aborlglnal This Isa multidisciplinary subjectdestgned to provide the surveillance of governing bodies With the object Press. Cambrldge. Studies Press, Canberra. the basis for cross-fertiltsation between the of governing (dangerous) bodies. This will be Meggitt. Mervyn J. 1974. Desert People: A Study oJ disciplines of history. SOCiology. anthropology and addressed In a threefold manner. First, how the Featherstone. M .. et al (eds) 1991. The Body: SocIal the Walb!rl Aborigines of Central Australia, Angus media studies. For students the subject provides the 19th Century populatton sciences (Including Processes and CultUTalTheory. Sage. London. and Robertson, Sydney. opportunity to deepen their understanding of sexology, phrenology, crlmtnology, medicine and Foucault. M. 1980. The History oJSexuallty, Vol 1: AUstralian culture. The contemporary study of myth psychology) fac!l!tated the 'dlscovery' of a class of An Introduction. Random House, New York. Michaels. Erlc 1986. The AborigiJwl Invention oj Television In Central Australia 1982·1986. AlAS, and culture has moved beyond the traditional dangerous populattons and sexualities who were Grosz. E. 1989. Sexual Subversions: Three French Canberra. aSSOCiation with anthropology to embrace htstory, differentiated from the normal population through Feminists. Allen & Unwin. Sydney. SOCiology and media studies. ThiS has both the mechanisms of exclusion, punishment, moral Swain. Tony 1985. Interpreting Aboriginal Religion: Mort. F. 1987. Dangerous Sexualutes: Medico·Moral invigQrated cultural studies and commensurately and legislative regulatton. and consequently subject An Historical Account. MSR. Bedford Park. Politics In England Since 1830. Routledge. London. broadened our understanding ofcultural processes. to sUlVetllance and administration by state agencies. The subject has an Australian focus, which seeks to Second. an analysis of the debate surrounding the Russett. C. 1989. Sexual Science: The Victorian SOCA365 ORDER AND DISCONTINUITY develop and apply symbolic and cultural analysIs to challenge of the 1960s feminist and gay liberation ConstrucUon of Womanhood, HaIVard University IN INDUSTRIAL SOCIETIES 20cp Australian material. movements to the (then conceived) repression of Press. Cambrldge MAl. Notavatlable to students who have taken SOWE205 Textbook alternative/minority sexualities by a hegemonic Thewelelt. K. 1989. Male Fantasies. 2 VO/S. University Elective: Order and Continuity in Industrial Societies patriarchal power structure. Third. a discussion of Minnesota Press. Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology & Anthropology Kapferer. Bruce 1988. Legends of People, Myths of and evaluation of recent discourse analysIs which State., Smithsonian Institution. Turner. B. S. 1984. The Body and Sodety: subjects at 200 level questtons the 'repressive hypothesis', and instead Explorations In SocIal Theory. Blackwell. Oxford. OR analyses the socto-historlcal origin of official Hours Three hours teaching per week. Day classes In 1994 (Semester 2) Schaffer. K. 1988. Women and the Bush. Cambridge definitions which seek to 'clvilfse' and thereby SOCA364 THE CONSTRUCTION OF University Press. nonnallse dangerous sexualities, and the effect such ABORlGINALITY IN Assessment Book review, seminar presentation & legislative strategies have upon the everyday AUSTRALIA 20cp report. research essay 8OCA362 GOVERNING BODIES: THE dichotomy between femininity and masculinity. Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology & Anthropology Lecturer John Gow STATE AND DANGEROUS These themes wtll be explored with reference to the subjects at 200 level SEXUALITIES 20cp followtng contemporary issues: Content Hours Three hours teaching per week. Day classes This subject focuses on the historical development Prerequisite 20cp of SOCiology & Anthropology In 1994 (Semester 2) subjects at 200 level and contemporary structure of a range of modern Faculty of Section Five Sociology' Anlhropology Faculty of Section Five Sociology. Anlhropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

industIial societies with particular reference to the Prtngle. Rosenuuy 1989. Secretartes Talk: Sexuality. Assessment To be advised. (S) Representatlonsofthe H1Vvirus. and theAIDS· organisation of the labour process. the reproduction Power and Work. Allen and Unwin. Sydney. Lecturer Dr Raymond Donovan body. in scientific literature and medical of class and gender within the workplace. the discourse. Trainer. F.E. 1985. AbandonAffiuence. Zed Books. Content historical development of Industrial nation-states London (6) Moral construction ofAfrtcan. South ·EastAsian This subject questions accepted cultural analyses wlthtn an internattonal order and debates about the AIDS. structural and environmental limits to Industrial Willis. Paul 1983. Learning to Labour: How Working which assume that government, medical and societies. Class Kids Get Working Class Jobs. UK: Gower. religious narratives about the AIDS pandemic are (7) Activists' alternative hlstortes of the pandemic. Aldershot. This approach Iscritlcalofthenotton tha "industrial mechanisms to control peripheral sexual practices (8) The direction of medlco-poliUcs ofHN/ AIDS In society .. can be viewed as a unified theoretical • SOCA367 WOMEN AND THE WELFARE and HlIett drug use, or that media representations of the 1990'.. category. Rather. industrial societies need to be STATE 20cp HN/ AIDS operate merely to stir-up 'moral panics' General References studied comparatively and within a global hlstortcal about dangerous Others. AIDS has been descrtbed Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology & Anthropology as Mslmultaneously an epidemic of transmissible Bayer. R. 1989. Private Acts. Socta! Consequences: context. subjects at 200 level lethal disease and an epidemiC of meanings or AIDS and the Politics ofPublic Health. The Free Press. This framework is then used to develop an Insight Hours Three hours teaching per week. Evening stgntflcations... try as we may to treat AIDS as an New York. into contemporary problemswtthln Australia relattng classes In 1994. Semester 2 'infectious disease' and nothing more, meanings Crtmp. D. (ed) 198. AIDS: Cultural Analysis. Cultural to economic and political restructuring within a Assessment To be advised continue to multiply widely and at an extraordinary Activism. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, changtng global-historical context. Lecturer Professor lois Bryson rate" rrreichler. In Crtmp. 1987: 32}. Official and cambrtdge Mass. Recommended Readings medical responses to H1V / AIDS may also be viewed Content Douglas. M. 1970. Purlty and Donger: AnAnalysls oj Goldthorpe. J. (ed) 1984. Order and Co'lflict as a nonnallsatiDn and disciplining of social decency. Concepts oj Pollution and Taboo. Penguin. The subject focuses on gender relations as they are Contemporary Capitalism. Clarendon Press. Oxford. That is AIDS discourses Simultaneously legtttmatise Hannondsworth. constructed within thewelfare state. History exposes alternative claims to the political control of private Lash. S. and Urry. J. 1987. The End oj Organised two welfare states. a male welfare state. which morality. and contests over sites of sexual choices Fee. E. and Fox. D.M. (eds) 1992. AIDS: The Making CapitaUsm. Polity Press. Oxford. focuses on men as workers and a female. which which are centred upon the re-hegemonlsation of oja Chronic Disease. University of Caltfornla Press, Berkely. SOCA366 COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN casts women as dependent etther on a man or the the monogamous nuclear family. Although debates state. Economic and welfare poltcles are considered SOCIAL INEQUALITY 20cp about fertiltty control, gender relations and sexuality Foucault. M. 1990. The History oJSexualIty. Vol 1: for the way they construct women today. The effects pre-dated by three decades the characterisation of An Introduction. Random House/Vintage Books. Not available to students who have taken SOC524 on women's posltton of interventions Into the state people living with HN/ AIDS as contaminated New York. Approaches to Soctallnequality over recent decades will be examined and the degree 'carners·. during the last ten years they have become Grmek. M.D. 1990. History ofAIDS: Emergence and Prerequisite 20cp of SOCiology & Anthropology of change to traditional gender relationships contemporaneous with the representation of Anti­ Origfn of a Mcxlem Pandemic. PIinceton University subjects at 200 level assessed. Bodies as not onlyunhygtenlc butalso 'undemocratic' Press. New Jersey. Text organisms. Focusing upon political. medical and Hours Three hours teaching per week. Day classes Klrp. D.L. and Bayer. R (eds) 1992. AIDS in the social bel1efs about pollution and contagion. these In 1994 (Semester 2) at Central Coast Campus only. Bryson. lois 1992. Welfare and the State: Who IndustrtallsedDemocracies. Rutgers University Press. issues will be examined In the broader framework of Assessment To be advised Benefits?, Macmtllan, London. New Jersey. the political SOCiology of plagues and moralities. Lecturer Dr Terry Leahy Recommended Reading Kramer. L. 1989. Reports From the Holocaust: 1he (I) Medical and poliUcal construcUons of HI V rtsk Making oj An AIDS Actiulst. St. Martln's Press. New Content Baldock. C. and B. Cass (ed) 1988. Women. Social ·groups·. and the Invislb1l1tyofwomen. mlnortty Welfare and the State 2nd edn. Allen and Unwin. York. Looking at contemporary society. this subject focuses non-white heterosexuals, and lesbians. Sydney. Mack. A. (ed) 1991. In The TIme oj Plague: 1he on the question of social Inequality. What do (2) Different public health models and the Watson. Sophie (ed) 1990. Playing the State: History and Socta! Consequences oJLetlml Epidemic sociologists mean when they speak of Inequality. dIstinctive Australian Commonwealth strategy Australian Feminist Interventions.. Allen and Disease. New York University Press. power, exploitation or stratification? How are these of inclusion of affected communtttes, compared Unwln,Sydney. terms used to understand and explain the nature of to North American and British responses to the Mann. J .• Tarantola. D.J.M. and Netter. T.W. (eds) contemporary society? The subject considers such Yeatman, Anna 1990, BlU'eaucmts, Technocrats. pandemic. 1992. AIDS in the WorW. Harvard University Press, topics as work, social class. gender Inequaltty. Femocrats: Essays on the Contemporary Australian cambrtdge Mass. (3) Australian community-based Initiatives In Ideology. state socialist societies. the third world. State. Allen and Unwin. Sydney. education, care. and treatmentofHIVlnfection. McKenzie. N.F. (ed) 1991. The AIDS Reader: Socta!. the ecological criSiS and postmodemlsm. SOCA36S DISEASE. DISCIPLINE in contrast to the Australian Medical Association Political and Ethical Issues. Penguln/Mertdlan. New Recommended Readings AND DEATH 20cp model of control and quasi-quarantine. York. Braverman. H. 1974. Labour and Monopoly Capita!. Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology and Anthropology (4) Ideological content and Implications of official McNeill. W. 1976.PlaguesandPeople.AnchorPress. Monthly Review Press, New York. subjects at 200 level Including SOC20 I /SOCA20 I educational preventative. and media campaigns. New York. Haug. Frtggaandothers 1987. Female Sexualization: Hours Three hours teaching per week. Day classes Sontag. S. 1990. nlness as Metaphor. &AIDS and Its A Collective Work oj Memory. Verso, London. In 1994 (Semester l) Metaplwrs. Doubleday/Anchor Books. New York. Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Faculty of Section Flva Sociology & Anthropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Soclll Science Subject Descriptions

TImewell. E .• MInichiello. V. and Plummer. D. (eels) and punishment; street crime, the poor and their conceptualtslng the immune system; health SOCA351 FRENCH CONTEMPORARY 1992. AIDS fnAustralia. Prentice Hall. New York. vtctims; migrant criminality; women and crime. promotion (Including Infant feeding) ; eating SOCIAL THOUGHT Subjects offered In Semester 2. 1994 General References disorders. Not available to students who have taken SOC513 SOCA369 CRIMINAL JUSTICE AND J. Bralthwalte 1979. Inequality. Crime and Public Recommended Reading Contemporary French Social Thought. PolicY. Routledge. London. STATE POWER 20cp Jacobus. M. Fox Keller. E and Shutleworih. S. 1990. SOCA35S PROFESSIONALISM AND (Notavatlable to students who have taken SOCA357 S. Cohen 1985. Visions of Social Control. Polity. Body/PoliticS: Women and the Discourses ofSctence. CLASS POWER cambridge. Routledge. Crime. Justice and the State) Iformerly SOC309 Professionals. In tellectuals and Prerequisite 20cp of Sociology & Anthropology M. Findlay and R Hogg (ed) 1988. Understanding Martin. E. 1987. The Womnn In the Body: A Cultural Social Controlll) subjects at 200 level Including SOC20 1/SOCA20 I Crime and CrlmInal Jusitoe. Law Book Co.. North Analysis of Reproduction, Beacon Press. Ryde. Napier. A. David 1992. Foreign Bodies. University of S0CA359 SIIAMANISM AND IlEAUNG HOUTS Three hours teaching per week. Day classes (formerly SOC311 Shamanism and Healing) In 1994 (Semester 2) M. Flnnane 1987. Policing In Australia: Historical California Press. Perspectives. University of NSW Press, Sydney. Assessment To be advtsed Sontag. Susan. fitness as Metaphor/Akls and Its S0CA361 THE STATE AND SOCIAL M. Foucault 1979.lJisclpltne andPunlsh. Penguin. Metaphor, Penguin. REGULATION IN MODERN Lecturers Dr Keny Carrtngton and Dr Raymond Hannondsworth. Donovan Strathern. M. 1992, Reproducing the Future: SOCIETIES D. Garland 1990. Punishment and Modem SocIety. Anthropology. Kinship and the New Reproductive (formerly SOC315 The State and Social Regulation Content Oxford University Press. Technologles, Manchester University Press. In Modem Societies) The history of cnmtnal acts and contemporary R Kinsley and J. Young 1986. Losing the FIght Turner, B. 1987. Medical Power and Social concerns about lawlessness Is the focus of this S0CA363 REPRESENTATIONS OF Against Crime, MacMtllan, London. Knowledge. Sage. subject. The purpose Is to discuss and assess the CULTURE IN ETHNO­ nature of state power and the Implementation of S. Hall 1978. Policing the Crisis. MacMtllan. London. SUBJECTS NOT OFFERED IN 1994 GRAPHIC FILM official strategies of social control in the course of an C. Smart 1987. Women. Crime and Crlmlnology. SOCA202 INTRODUCTION TO S0CA404 SOCIOLOGY AND analysis of the relation between ideology, cnme and Routledge. London.SOCA371 H E A L T H . MEDICAL ANTHROPOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY HONOURS SOcp state justice In late industrial SOCiety. The HEALING AND (formerly SOC202 Medical Systems) contemporary debate about law-and-order will be SOCIAL POWER 20cp Full time students will enrol in SOCA404. Part time students will enrol In SOCA405 in the first year and assessed against the backdrop of 19th Century (not available to students who have previously taken SOCA206 POLITICS AND PUBLIC POLICY formulations about the 'causes' of crime. These SOCA406 In the second year. SOC304 Medicine and Industrial Society) (formerly SOC206 Politics and Public Policy) issues w1l1 be explored by examining three Students will study a number of subjects which may Prerequlslte 20cp of Sociology and Anthropology Intersecting themes. (I) Historically. how the modem SOCA207/ SOCIOLOGY OF SOUTH ASIA be varied from time to time by the Department. subjects at 200 level state has Increasingly acquired for ttself the S0CA307 Those available in 1994. subject to reasonable responsibility for the Incarceration, discipline and HOUTS Three hours teaching per week. Day classes demand and the extgencles of staffing are: punishment of offenders over the last two hundred In 1994 (Semester 2) SOCA211 RACIAL AND CULTURAL POLITICS IN THE AFRICAN Gender and Sociology years, and how the 19th Century sciences and Assessment Take-home exam. research essay. book DIASPORA (Lois Bryson) practices of phrenology. eugenics. penology, revtew statistics. and police and medical photography (formerly SOC21 I Racial and Cultural Politics In the Offered Semester 1 Lecturers Associate Professor Kathryn Robinson factlttated this with the discovery of the criminal African Dtaspora] and Peter Khoury The gender dimension of sociology will be explored character as an Immoral 'type' who could be defined, in three ways. First as it Is dealt with in conventional classtfted and separated from the law-abiding Content SOCA214/ INDONESIAN SOCIETY SOCA314 AND CULTURE SOCiological theory; e.g. Durkheim, Marx and Weber. citizenry. (2) Theoretically. a discussion and This course draws on cnttcal evaluations of the Second through the work of feminist theorists. assessment of ltberal-utilttanan. left realist. New biomedical model of health and healing. In recent (formerly SOC2141ndonesian Society and Culture] paying particular attention to the role of the state. RJght and post-structuralist accounts about the anthropological. sociological and feminist writing. Third. through conSideration of the light shed origins and Impact ofcnme, drawing u pon hlstoncal SOCA215/ ISLAM IN MODERN SOCIETY What are the connections between forms of SCientific SOCA315 SOCiological research on the empirical dtmenstonsof and contemporary Ideologies of punishment so far knowledge. methods of scientific Inquiry and the gender relations. as these reflect changing Incidents and trends In reproduction oflnequalltles ofrace, class and gender? (formerly SOWE213 Islam In Modem Society] offiCially reported crime rates. (3) Contemporary Recommended Reading (not essential to purchase! What do we learn from comparative (cross-cultural) SOCA21S/ SPORT AND THE substanttve issues to be addressed will Include: law. Connell. R W. 1987. Gender and Power. Sydney. perspectives on health and healing? Specific Issues SOCA31S CONSTRUCTION OF GENDER vtolence and public order; delinquency and the which the course will Investtgate Include new Allen and Unwin. chtldren's court system; modem trends in poliCing; technologies In reproductive health (Including IVF SOCA222/ MUSIC IN ASIAN SOCIETY Eisenstein, Hester 1984. Contemporary Feminist black deaths In custody; privatlsatlon of poliCing and related technologies); the health of abOriginal SOCA322 Though~ Sydney. Allen and Unwin. Australians: metaphor In medical discourse; Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions

Franzway. Suzanne. Court, Dianne, Connell. RW. Bulmer. M. (ed) 19B4. Sociological Research MASTER OF SOCIAL SCIENCE Koumey.J .. Sterba.J.P. andTong. R 1992. Feminist 19B9. Stak!ng a Claim Feminism: Bureaucracy and Methods: An Introduction, 2nd edn. Macmillan. At this stage. the follOwing subjects will be offered In Philosphies. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs. the State. Sydney. Allen and Unwin. London. 1994. If there is sufficient student demand, further subjects may be offered. Sydle. R 19B7. Natural Women, Cultured Men, Milton Gunew. SneJa (ed.) 1991, A Reader in Feminist Rose. G. 19B2. Deciphering Sociological Research. Keynes Open University Press. Knowledge. London. Routledge. Macmllian. Offered In Semester 1, 1994 Yeatman. Anna 1990. Bureaucrats. Technocrats. Sydle. R 19B7. Natural Women, Cultured Men, Milton SOCA513 CONTEMPORARY FRENCH Femocrats: Essays on the Contemporary Australtan Keynes, Open Un!verstty Press. SOCIAL THOUGHT State. Allen and Unwin. Sydney. Williams. F. 19B9. SocialPolicyA CrUicalInlToducl/on, Lecturer Geoffrey Samuel Cambridge. PoUty. S0CA525 SOCIOCULTURAL STUDIES Offered Evening classes. Semester 1. 1994 IN HEALTH I Yeatman. Anna 1990, Bureaucrats, Technocrats. Femocrats: Essays on the Contemporary Australian Content Lecturer Kathy Robinson and Nick Higginbotham State. Sydney. Allen and Unwin. This subJect will explore the work ofseveral prominent Offered Semester I, 1994 Contemporary French Social Thought theorists who have been rethinking issues relattng Content to the self. power. sexuality and gender. among them (Geoffrey Samuel) Pierre Bourdteu. Michel Foucault, Gmes Deleuze. Thts subject will Introduce students to a variety of Offered Semester 1 Julia KIisteva. Helene Clxous and Luce Irigaray. We social science approaches to health problems. using the model of a 'transdisclpltnruy social science This course will explore the work of several prominent williookat the question of"post modem Ism" . We will also consider ways in which the course material Is framework'. The subject alms to demonstrate how theorists who have been engaged In radical rethinking the various concepts and methods from diSCiplines of issues relating to the self. power. sexuality and relevant to contemporary work In SOCiology and anthropology. such as sociology. anthropology and psychology-can gender, among them Michel Foucault, Gmes Deleuze, be Integrated to enhance our understanding of Julia KIisteva and Luce Irigaray. We will look at the Recommended Reading health Issues In our own and developing countries. question of 'postmodemtsm'. We will also consider Grosz. Elizabeth 19B9. Sexual Subversions. Allen Social science contributions to the understanding of ways in which the course material is relevant to and Unwin. Sydney. selected health problems (such as heart disease, contemporary work in SOCiology and anthropology. Mol. Toril 19B5. Sexual/Textual Politics: Feminist AlDS. pharmaceutical misuse) will be discussed. Recommended Readings (not essential to purchase) Literary Theory. Methuen. London. For further details see the description of MED626In Section 5. Deleuze. Gille with Claire Pamet 19B7. Dialogues. Rablnow. Paul (ed) 19B6.AFoucaultReader. Penguin. London Athlone Press. Recommended Reading Grosz. Elizabeth. 19B9. Sexual Subversions. Sydney 8OCA519 GENDER AND SOCIOLOGY To be advised. Lecturer Lois Bryson Allen and Unwin. Subjects Offered In Semester 2. 1994 Rablnow. Paul (ed.) 19B6. A Foucault Reader. Offered Semester I, 1994 Penguin. 8OCA526 SOCIOCULTURAL STUDIES The gender dimension of SOCiology will be explored IN HEALTH II Socilal Research Methods in three ways. First. as it Is dealt within relation to Lecturer Kathy Robinson (Department of SoCiology & Anthropology Stall) conventional sociological theory; e.g. Durkhelm. Marx and Weber. Second. through the work of Offered Semester 2. 1994 Offered Semester 1 feminist theorists. paytng particular attention to the The course is organised around critical appraisal of This subject. while focusing on the methods of role of the state. Third. through consideration ofthe research design with an emphasis on the use of research. emphasises the integral connections light shed by sociological research on the empirical qualitative methods to enhance the power of between theory and method. We shall concern dimensions of gender relations. quantitative design in health research. The potential ourselves with both discussion of the ethical. Recommended Reading of these methods is explored through the critical theoretical and methodolOgical Issues of social Connell. R.W. 1987. Gender and Power. Allen and evaluation of published research on health research and with learning and applying the various inteIVentions and community health programs. research techniques of SOCiology and social Unwin. Sydney. anthropology. In this latter context we shall Eisenstein. Hester 1984. Contemporary Feminist Recommended Reading emphasise differen t styles of research and their Though~ Allen and Unwin. Sydney. To be advised. complementarity in overall research design. Gunew. SneJa (ed) 1991, A Reader in Feminist SOCA532 CRIMINAL JUSTICE AND Recommended Reading (not essential to purchase) Knowledge. Routledge. London. STATE POWER 20cp Babble. E. 19B9. ThePractice ofSocial Research, 5th Humm, M. 1992. Feminisms: A Reader. Hatvester/ (Not available to students who have taken SOC307/ edn, Belmont. C.A. • Wadsworth. Wheatsheaf. Hampstead. SOCA357 Crime. Justice and the Statel Fecultyol Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Faculty of Section Five Sociology & Anthropology Social Science Subject Descrlptlonl Social Science Subject Description.

SOCA552 CONTEMPORARY Lecturer Raymond Donovan and Keny Carrington Gahen. S. 1985. Visions qf Sodal Control. Polity. DEVELOPMENTS IN Cambridge. Prerequisite 20 credit points of SoCiology and SOClAL RESEARCH METHODS Anthropology subjects at 200 level including FIndlay. M. and Hogg R. (ed) 1988. Understanding Lecturer Ellen Jordan and John Cow SOC20 I /SOCA20 I Crime and Cr1mInal Justice. Law Book Ga .. North Offered Semester 2. 1994 Hours Three hours teaching per week RJde. This subject will provide a review of recent Offered Day classes In 1994 (Semester 2) Flnnane M. 1987. Policing In Australia: Historical Perspectives. University of NSW Press. Sydney. developments across a broad spectrum of Bocfal Assessment to be advised. research methods. There wtll be three parts to the Foucault. M. 1979. Discipline and Punish. Penguin. Content course. Onewill focus on developments in research Hannondsworth. techniques. a second will deal with methods used The history of criminal acts and contemporary Garland. D. 1990. Punfshment and Modem Society. primarily In sociological research anda third section concerns about lawlessness is the focus of this Oxford University Press. Oxford. will consider developments In anthropology with a subject. The purpose is to discuss and assess the Kinsley. R. and Young. J. 1986. Losing the Fight particular emphasis on Issues relattng to field nature of state power and the implementation of research. official strategies of social control In the course of an Against Crime. MacMillan. London. analysis of the relation between Ideology, crime and Hall. S. 1978.Policlng the Crfsls. MacMillan. London. References Babble. Earl 1989. The Practice of Sociol Research. state justice in late Industrial SOCiety. The Smart. C. 1987. Women. Crime and Criminology. contemporary debate about law-and-order wtll be Rou tledge. London. 5th edn. Wadsworth Publishing Company. Belmont. assessed against the backdrop of 19th Century california. fonnulations about the 'causes' of crime. These SOCA551 CONTEMPORARY Bell Colin and Helen Roberts (ed) 1984. Social Issues will be explored by examining three DEVELOPMENTS IN Researching: Politics, Problems and Practice. intersecting themes. SOClAL THEORY Routledge and Kegan Paul. London. (I) Historically. how the modern state has Lectw-er Lois Bryson Bulmer. Martin 1984. Sociological Research IncreaSingly acquired for itself the responsibtHty Offered Evening classes, Semester 1. 1994 Methods. 2nd edn. Macmillan. London. for the incarceration. discipline and pUnishment Content Rose. Gerry 1982. Deciphering SociologicalResearch, of offenders over the last two hundred years, Macmlilan. London. and how the 19th Century sciences and pmctices This subject will provide a reView and analysts of of phrenology, eugenics, penology. statistics. recent trends in social theory. Three broad areas COURSEWORK MASTER SUBJECTS NOT and pollee and medical photography facilitated will be considered: (I) developments within OFFERED IN 1994 this with the discovery of the criminal character sociological theory at the international level. e.g. SOCA511 Social Policy and Social Theory as an Immoral 'type' who could be defined. theories of the state. poststructuralist/post-modem SOCA515 Quantitative Research Methods approaches. femtntsttheory; (2) developmentswtthln classified and separated from the law-abiding SOCA516 Qualitative Research Methods citizenry. Australian sociologies; (3) developments in theories of culture. SOCA520 Theory and Issues of Gender In (2) Theoretically, a discussion and assessment of the Welfare State liberal-utilitarian. left realist. New Right and Preliminary Reading SOCA52I Gender and Work post-structuralist accounts about the origins Glddons. Anthony 1989. Sociology. Polity Press. SOCA522 Feminist Theory In the Modem and Impact of crime, drawing upon historical Cambridge. and contemporary IdeolOgies of punishment so World System References far as these reflect changing Incidents and SOCA523 Women. Health and Development trends in offiCially reported crime rates. Austln-Broos. Diane 1987. Creating Culture. Allen & SOCA524 Approaches to Social Inequality Unwin. Sydney. (3) Contemporary substantive Issues to be SOCA527 Professionalism and Class Power addressed will include: law, violence and public Edwards. Anne 1988. Regulation and Repression. SOCA531 Mind. Body and Culture order; delinquency and the children's court Allen & Unwin. Sydney. system; modem trends In policing; black deaths McDowell. L. and Pringle. R. 1992. Defining Women. In custody; prtvattsatton of policing and Milton Keynes Open University Press. punishment: street crime, the poor and their NaJrnan. J. and Western. J. (eds) 1993. A Sociology victims; mlgrantcrtmlnality; women and crime. of Australfan Society: Introductory Readings, General References Macmillan, Melbourne. Braithwaite. J. 1979. Inequality. Crime and Public Weedon. Chris 1987. Feminist Practice and Policy. Routledge. London. Poststructurallst Theory. Basil Blackwell. Oxford. Feeully of Section Flv. StaUsllco Faculty of Section Flv. StaUstlco Social Science Subject Descriptions Social Science SubJect Descriptions

STATISTICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Inference. including the principles of study design. STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS lOep Hogg. RV. and Ledolter. J. 1987. Engineering STATIOI Introductory Statletlco lOop data analysIs and Interpretation ofstatistical results. Prerequisites STAT20 I Statistics. Macmillan. Not to count for credit with STATI03. Content Hours 2 lecture Hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial STAT206 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF Prerequisites Thtscoursedoesnotassume knowledge Scales of measurement; summarising data hour per week for one semester EXPERIMENTS AND SURVEYS lOop of calculus or matrtx algebra Probabtlity laws; conditional prohabtllty Content Prerequisite STAT201 Hours 3 lecture hours. I laboratory hour and I Probabtltty d1stribu tlons and sample statistics This course covers the practical and theoretical Hours 3 hours per week for one semester tutorial hour per week. The course Is offered in The centrall1mtt theorem and applications aspects of multiple regression analysIs. Including Content semester 1 and semester 2 the assumptions underlytng normalltnear models. Study design; sUIveys and randomised experiments use of matrix notation. prediction and confidence This course contrasts two methods for collecting Pwpose To Introduce students to the principles of and analysIng data: experimental studies and non­ study design. data analysis and Interpretation; the Confidence intelVals and hypothesiS tests inteJVals. stepwise methods. and examination of the adequacy of models. The statistical computer experimental studies Including surveys. The statistical computing program MINITAB will be used Correlation and regression; least squares princIples of experimental design are Ulustrated by packages MINlTAB and SAS are used. extensively Interences from contingency tables. studying completely randomised deSigns. Text Content Text randomlsed block deSigns and factorial desIgns. Study design. Including surveys and controlled Neter. J .. Wasserman W. and Kutner. M.H. 1990. For sUlVeys the topics include: simple random Freund. J.E. & SImon. G.A. 1992. 8th edn. Modem Applied Linear Statistical Models. 3rd edn. Irwin. sampling. stratified and cluster sampling. ratio and experiments. Sampling and randomtzation. Scales Elementary Statistics. Prentice-Hall. of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data References regression estimators. Class projects are used to analysis. Prohabtltty. Statistical Inference: sampling References Ulustrate practical problems and the statistical Bowerman. B.L.. O·Connell. RT. et al1986. Linear packages Mlnltab and SAS are used to

References Content STAT310 TOTAL gUAUTY Larson. H.J. 1982. Introduction toProbabafty Theory The course covers the theory of generalized linear MANAGEMENT lOcp and Statistical Irifereru:e. 3rd edn. Wiley models and illustrates the ways In which methods Prerequisites MNGTlII and subjects at Level 200 Hogg. RV. and Craig. A.T. 1989. Introduction to for analysing contlnuous. bin"'Y. and categorical totalling 40 credit points chosen from subjects Mathematical statistics. 4th edn. MacMillan. data fit into this framework. Topics include the offered by the Departments of Economics. exponential family of distributions. maximum Management and/or Statistics. Stlvey. S.D. 1978. Statistical Injerence. Chapman likelihood estlmatlon. sampling distributions for Hours 2 lecture hours per week. and Hall. goodness-of-fit statistics, linear models for Press. S.J. 1989. Bayes!an Statistics. Wiley continuous data (regressionandanalysisofvarlance). Content Interscience. logistic regression. and log· linear models. Students Total Quality Management rrQM) is an all embracing w1ll implement these methods using various STAT302 SroDY DESIGN lOcp management and employee Involvement philosophy computer packages. Including GLIM. d1rected towards continuous improvement tn the Prerequisites STAT20 I and STAT202 Ten production of goods and services. Students who Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester complete this course will learn to understand the Dobson. A.J. 1990. An Introduction to Generalized fundamental principles ofTotai Quality Management Content LInear Modelling. Chapman & Hall. rrQMJ. chooseapproprtate statlstical techniques for This course contrasts two methods for collecting References Improving processes and write reports to and analysing data: experimental studies and non­ McCullagh. P. and Neider J.A. 1989. Generalized management describing processes and experimental studies including surveys. The Unear Models. 2nd edn. Chapman & Hall. reconunending ways to improve them. principles of experimental design are illustrated by studying completely randomlsed designs. AUkln. M. et al 1989. Statistical Modelling In GUM. SpeCific topics covered Include the Deming randornised block designs and factorial designs. For Oxford Science Publicatlons. philosophy. understanding variability through surveys the topics include: simple random sampUng, Healy. M.J.R 1988. GUM: anintroductton, Clarendon. stattstlcal thinking. qualltyimplementatlon matrices. stratlfted and cluster sampHng, ratio and regression quality functlon deployment. the seven tools of estimators. Class projects are used to 11lustrate STAT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS lOcp quality control, quality Improvement teams, the practical problems and the statistical packages Prerequisite STAT20 I and STAT202. In additlon Itts PDCA cycle. standards, the role of management. MINITAB and SAS are used to cany out analyses. strongly recommended that students have Passed bastc statistical methods and control charts. References STAT301. Text Barnett. V. 1986. Elements oj sampling theory. Hows 3 Hours per week for one semester To be advised. Hodder and Stoughton. Content Cochran. W.G. 1977. SamplingTechniques.3rdedn. This course Is about the theory and practice of time Wiley. series analysis - the analysis of data collected at Neter.J .. Wasserman. W. etall990.AppliedUnear regular Intervals tn time (or space). Topics covered StatIStical Models. 3rd edn. Irwin. include: stationary processes. ARMA models, models for periodic phenomena. analysis using MINlTAB. Cochran. W.G. and Cox. G.M. 1964. Experimental SAS and other time series packages. Designs. Wiley. Ten Box. G.E.P .. Hunter. W.G. et al 1978. Statisticsjor Experimenters: an introduction to design, data Cryer. J.D. 1986. TIme Serles Analysis. Duxbury analysis and model butlding. WUey. Press. References STAT303 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS lOcp Box. G.E.P. and Jenkins. G.M. 1970. TIme Serles Analysis: Forecasting and Control. Holden Day. Prerequls!te STAT20 I and STAT202. In addition it is strongly recommended that students have Passed Fuller. W.A. 1976. Introduction to Statistical TIme STAT301. Serles. Wiley. Hows 3 Hours per week for one semester Newton. H.J. 1988. TIMESLAB. A TIme SerlesAnalysls LaboratoTY. Wadsworlh & Brooks/Cole. Flculty of Section Five Welfar. Studies Feculty .1 Section Five Welfare Studiu Soclll Sckmce Subject o.scrlptlonl Social Science Subject Description.

BACHELOR OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (WELFARE admlnistmtlon. Students wlll participate In field Hours Four teaching hours per week recognised models. The rationale for such prlnclple. Is examined and several process models are STUDIES) activities and experiential workshops to promote Offered Semester 2 considered. Value. ethical and legal constmlnts are SOWEIOI SOCIAL WELFARE IA lOcp thefr understanding of these processes. Assessment Continuous considered. Lecturer George Morgan Text Content Through tutorlals and workshops the student is To be advised. Prerequisite Nfl This subject provides the foundation practicum expected to develop basic competenCies and skllls In Hows Four teaching hours per week SOWEI07 UFESPAN DEVELOPMENT workshops for social welfare analysIs and inquiry. interpersonal communication within the context of Offered Semester I AND WELFARE PRACTICE lOcp Content will critically examine current areas of casework processes. welfare practtce - which will include private and The groupwork stmnd of the module Is designed to Assessment Continuous, including field studies Lecturer Patricia Duncan publlc spheres of service dellvery -by employing provide an overview of soctal grou pwork as one Prerequisite Nfl Content various teaching modes such as guest lectures. method of pmctlce used within a wide range of social This subject provides an introduction to the concept Hours Four teaching hours per week workshops and panel discussions. Guest welfare settings. Lectures will provide a theoretical of social welfare in theory and practice. It examines Offered Semester I practitioners wtll discuss the scope of their day to basis for an understanding of the dynamics of day activities. how these fit Into the pattern of the historical processes that have shaped social Assessment Continuous groupwork and also explore implications for the role welfare and how these processes affect individuals community services. thetmpllcatlonsoflnstltutlonal ofa Groupwork In various welfare practice situations. Content structures and not least soctety. Emphasis will be and groups as well as institutions. The subject Opportunltles to experience and develop groupwork given also to the scope and limitation of particular seeks to develop a critical understanding of social This subject Introduces the student to the concept skllls will be provlded through Involvement in patterns of services. welfare today and Its role within the Australian of lifespan development through an examination of Indlvldual experiential workshop exercises dmwlng context. In so doing it focuses on the values and the physical. cognitive and psychosocial changes Through problem-based workshop material students on a variety oftnteJVention strategies and techniques. beliefs that underpin social welfare. and the notions which normally occur within the Indlvldual through will examine content and issues raised by of rights and equity which are associated with the maturation and environmental Influences. practitioners in the field. Reviews of these material Texts delivery of welfare and community services. Partlcular emphasis will be given to the changes sand panel discussions will further allow students Aoderson. J. 1988. Foundations oj Social Worlc References which occur at various stages of development. and to critically evaluated a range of conceptual and Practice. Springer. New York. the coping mechanisms related to those stages practical themes to help them understand the Burnham. J.B. 1986. Famlly Therapy FIrst Steps Morgan. G.H. & Allegrlttl. J. 1991. Social Problems which have Implications for effective functtonlng syntheSiS of theory and pmctlce. In so doing this Towards a Systemic Approach, Routledge. London. An AustraUan Perspective. N.S.W. Social Science wtthln a society from a social welfare perspective. subject alms to help students refine and develop Press. Wentworth Falls. James. A.L. & Wllson. K. 1986. Couples. COI\Illct and their philosophical orientations and commitments Attention Is directed at selected theoretical Change. Routledge. London. Gmycar. A. & Jamrozlk. A. 1993. How Australians approaches which attempt to explain human to social welfare. Uve. Macmlllan. South Melbourne. Marmm Van Servellan. G. 1984. Group and Family behaviour In development terms. An emphasis is Text Therapy. C.V. Mosby. Toronto. SOWEI02 SOCIAL WELFARE m lOcp placed on understanding the Individual from a Barry. N. 1990. Welfare. Mllton Keynes. Open holistic viewpoint through an examination of how Munro. A.. Manthei. B. & Small. J. 1989. CowlseUing Lecturers Christopher Dole University Press. these approaches can be used to factUtate the The Sktlls oJProblem Solving. Routledge. London. Prerequisite Nll Rees. S. 1991. Achieving Power: Practice and poUcy provision ofwelfare services to peoplewtth different 1\1rner. R. (ed.) 1986. Social Casework 1reatment. in social welfare. Allen & Unwin. North Sydney. Hours Four teachings hours per week age groups. 3rd edn, Free Press. New York. Offered Semester 2 Suggested Reading SOWE201 SOCIAL WELFARE Tyson. 1989. Working With Groups. Macmlllan. METHODS2A lOcp Assessment Continuous, Including field studies Berger. K. 1988. The Developing Person Through the Melbourne. UJe Span, Worth Publlshers. New York. Lecturers Alex Beveridge & Chris Dole Content SOWE202 SOCIAL WELFARE Development. PrerequisIte SOWE 10 1 and SOWE 102 lOcp This subject develops further the themes that were Heaven. P.C.L. (ed) 1992. Life Span METHODS2B Harcourt Brace Jovanovich Ltd., Australia. examined in Social Welfare 1A. The provision of Hours Four teaching hours per week Lecturers Greg Heys & Arthur McCulloch welfare and community services takes place wtthln Papalla. D. & Olds. S. 1991. Gethln. L. & Hatchard. Offered Semester 1 PrerequisItes SOWE 101 and SOWE I 02 D. Australian Editors. Life Span Development. First a contested terrain With patterns of co-operation Assessment Continuous and conflict which influence values and ethical Australian Edition. McGraw-HUl. Australia. Hours Four teaching hours per week practices. These are considered In relation to the Peterson. C. 1989. Looking Forward Through the UJe Content Offered Semester 2 social. political and economic features that account Span, 2nd edn. Prentice Hall. New York. This subject prOVides students with a basic Assessment Progressive for the allocation of welfare arrangements In understanding of the theory and practice ofcasework Content Australia. SOWEI09 SOCIAL WELFARE and groupwork as primary methods in provision of ANALYSIS AND INQUIRY I lOcp This subject covers the theoretical and practical An introduction to welfare methods also takes place. social welfare. elements of the management of communtty setv1ces. This Introduction covers groupwork. casework. Lecturer Alex Beveridge & Greg Heys casework Is presented as an interactional approach It deals wtth elements of community analysiS; social community work. as well as social pollc~ and Prerequisite Nll to helping based upon professional principles and Faculty of Seetion Flv. Welter. SbJdie. Faculty of SecUon Flv. Wolfar. Studl•• Socl.IScIence Subject Description. Social Scl.nce Subject Descriptions

planning theory and practice: small agency Content SOWE223 FIELD PLACEMENT 2A lOcp this stage of skill and theoretical development is the management; human resources and financial This subject w1l1 introduce the student to Issues Coordinator Patricia Duncan emphasis on practical experiential workshops. and management: and agency planning and evaluation. an exposure to skills and competenctesappltcable to related to the placing of the Individual within a social Corequlsltes SOWE20 1 and SOWE202 Texts context relevant to welfare. The lecture content w1l1 the various stages of group program and process. focus on the broad theme of social influence through Hours Sixty or more hours field work over one year. Texts Henderson. D. &Thomas. D. SkUlsinNefghbourhood TWo hours Vocational Forum each week over the Work, Allen & Unwin. an examination ofconcepts such as grou p formation Anderson. J. 1988. Foandatlons of SocIal Work and structure. attitudes and attitude change, and same year. Hasenfeld. Y.• Human Service Organisation. Prentice Practtce. Springer. New York. the Interpersonal relationships with groups and Assessment Continuous Hall. Burnham. J.B. 1986. Family Therapy FIrst Steps individuals. Content Towards a Systemic Approach. Routledge. London. SOWE203 FIELD EDUCATION 2 20cp References Various topics will he approached through field James. A. L. & Wilson. K. 1986. Couples. Conflict and Coordinator Patricia Duncan Sears. D.O.. Peplau. L.A. and Taylor. S.E. 1991. experiences within Agency settings. A specific field Change. Routledge. London. Prerequisites SOWE 101 and SOWE 102 Social Psychology. 7th edn.. Prentice Hall. Sydney. placement may be organised at a Social Welfare agency to enable the student to gain and Implement Marram Van Servellan. G. 1984. Group and Family Corequlsltes SOWE20 1 and SOWE202 Milgram. S. 1992. The Individual in a Social World. Therapy. C.V. Mosby Publishers. Toronto. McGraw-Hill Inc .. New York. social welfare skills and knowledge. Hours 1\vo hundred and fifty hours field work over Vocational Forum sessions wtll provide the Munro. A.. Manthei. B. &Small.J. 1989. CounseUIng one year. 1\vo hours per week Vocational Forum SOWE209 SOCIAL WELFARE ANALYSIS opportunity for preparation. feedback. support and The SkUls ofProblem Solving. Routledge. London. and Seminar over the same year. AND INQUIRY D lOcp debriefing related to fieldwork. Turner. R. (ed.l. Social Casework '/l'ea\ment. 3rd Content Lecturer Greg Heys and George Morgan This subject is available only to students who have edn. Free Press. New York. Various topics will he approached through field Prerequisite SOWE 109 been granted partial advanced standing In Field Tyson. 1989. Working With Groups. Macmillan. experience within Agency settings. A specific field Hours Three teaching hours per week Education 2. Melbourne. placement will he organised at a Social Welfare agency to enable the student to galn and implement Offered Semester 1 SOWE301 WELFARE METHODS 3A lOcp S0WE302 WELFARE METHODS 3D lOcp social welfare skills and knowledge. Assessment Continuous Lecturer Alex Beveridge & Chris Dole Lecturers Arthur McCulloch and Greg Heys Vocational Forum sessions wlll prOVide the Content Prerequisite SOWE20 1& SOWE202 Prerequisite SOWE20 1 and SOWE202 opportunity for preparation. feedback support and This subject provides a theoretical analysIs of the Hours Four teaching hours per week Hours Four teaching hours per week debriefing related to field work and will Introduce descriptive material provides In SOWE109. It Offered Semester 2 Offered Semester 1 the student to the basic processes underlying examines the recent writings on the role of social interpersonal communication as relevant to welfare theory (economics. polttlcs, administration) tn Assessment Continuous Assessment Continuous setvlce provision. organising the role of government in making and Content Content Communication In dyads. groups and families will Implementing social policy and In establishing the This subject extends students theoretical and This subject extends theoretical and practice be examined from a Social Welfare perspective. institutional arrangements for welfare intervention. practice understanding of casework and groupwork understanding of the development and organisation focusing on the abtlity of the welfare worker to This analysIs will focus on a number of areas of as primary methods 10 the provision of social welfare. of community services In Australia. It deals with understand and facilitate such communication. social policy including; community welfare. Casework approaches to dtverse consumer groups. community development. social action. and welfare education. housing, employment and Income Text contexts and human problems are considered. administration. security. Particular attention Is paid to the normative No set text. although the student will he reqUired to Representative examples of contemporary casework A critical approach Is taken to theoretical. and profeSSional Issues which arise in discussing read In areas related to their specific field practice practice drawn from a variety of settings are explored. methodological and practtce issues. aspect of welfare. experience. to provide understanding of the knowledge and Texts Text skills necessary for competent practice. A critical SOWE206 INTERPERSONAL RELATIONS Wllenskl. P .• Public Power andPubllcAdmlnlstration. LeGrand.J.. Propper. C .. & Robinson. R. 1992. The evaluation ofcasework theory and practice is offered. It WELFARE PRACTICE IOcp Hale & Iremonger. Economics of Social Problems. 3rd edn. Macmillan. Advised and differentiated casework skills are Lecturer Patricia Duncan London. developed through tutorials. case studies. role plays S0WE303 FIELD EDUCATION 3 20cp Prerequisites Nil Forder. A., Caslin. T .• Ponton. G .• & Walklate. S. and the critical evaluation of student's practical Coordinator Patricia Duncan 1984. Theories of Welfare. Routledge and Kegan work. Hours Fours hours teaching per week Prerequisite SOWE203 Paul. London. Working from the foundation studies of groupwork Offered Semester 2 Corequlsltes SOWE30 I and SOWE302 Graycar. A .. & Jamrozlk. A. 1993. How Australians provtded tn Year 2. the advanced component further Assessment Continuous LIve: SocIalPoIlcy in Theory and Practtce. Macmillan. develops an understanding of the applicability of Hours 1\vo hundred and fifty hours field work over Melbourne. social groupwork in a variety of settings. Central to one year. Two hours Vocational Forum each week over the same year. Faculty of Section Flv. Waltar. Studl •• Faculty of Section Flv. W~far. Studl., Social Sclance SubJect Description. Social Science Subject DelCrlptlon,

Assessment Continuous Social welfare research methodologies range from Texts Content Content highly sophlstlcated national and international Ward. R et al 1989. Economics. Harper & Row. This subject examines social problems In Australia This subject provtdes the opportunity through field studies to those concerned solely with parochtal Sydney. and seeks to introduce students to way of analysing experience for the student to expand upon knowledge, interests. The subject includes a critical examination a range of social phenomena, from. for example. of a range of selected inferential and non-parametlc O·Leary. J. & Sharp. R 1991. Inequality inAustralia skills and abtlltles developed In Welfare Practice 2. Slicing the Cake. William Heineman. Melbourne. discrimination through racist and sexist practices. PlacementexperlencelSgalnedwithaspectftcWelfare methods. as well as the common multi-variate to poverty and relative deprlvatlon. to Inequality. Jamrozlk. A. 1991. Class. Inequality and the State. agency and Vocational Forum sessions will focus on methods. and programme evaluation. Special exploitation and youth unemployment. These attention Is given to social action research. a mode Macmillan. Sydney. an exploration of that experience in relation to the perverse social phenomena are Interlocked wldelyuttltsed by practitioners and graduates In the student's professional development. SOWE1l2 LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT 8< consequences of datly life In mostlndustrtal societies. field and discipline. Case studies of earlier major WELFARE PRACTICE U lOcp Subject content will also cover the ways In which Text research. of current research undertaken by social society delineates social problems and the strategies No set text although students will be required to welfare staff. and of research conducted by guest Lecturer Patricia Duncan used to deal with them through social and community read in areas relevant to their field exper1ence. researchers will be used in lecture-workshops to Prerequisite SOWE 107 or eqUivalent services. Students more over will have the analyse and critique general methodologies, research HOUTS Three hours per week opportunity to engage In the dehate about why SOWE30S SOCIAL WELFARE PROJECT lOcp designs. research strategies and research techniques Lecturer Patricia Duncan as well as the findings In general. Offered Semester 2 social problems occur and what causes them. As a result a cr1tical and interactive approach to the Assessment Continuous Prerequisite SOWE20 I andSOWE302. or equivalent Summarlly this subject Is an Important link In the study of this subjectwlll be fostered through tutorlals HOUTS Three hours teaching per week for one core studies of the social welfare curriculum Content and lectures. semester providing. as it does. the synthesis of social welfare This subject expands on the Introduction given In Text methods. them)' and research. Addtttonally. Ills the SOWE 107 to the concept of lifespan development. Offered Semester 2 Morgan. G.H .. Allegrlttl.1. 1992. Social Problems: An refinement of the theoretical and methodological The Influence of maturational and environmental Assessment To be advised Australian Perspective. Social Science Press. basis for Social Welfare Project. SOWE309. the factors on coping mechanisms. and strategies Wentworth Falls. NSW. Content subject which students undertake in their last available to the Individual will be examined within a semester as undergraduates. Students will undertake a directed study on an developmental framework. Bean. P .. Ferns.J .• Whynes. D. 1985. In DeJence oJ Welfare. Tavtstock Publications. London. approved social welfare topic. and partiCipate In Text Attentton Is directed at selected theoretical seminars. Methodology will utilise a cr1tical review Hom. R.V. 1993. Statistleal Indleators approaches which will be examined tn tenns of their Forder.A.. Caslin. T .. Ponton. G .. Walklate.S. 1984. Theories ofWelfare. Rou tledge & Kegan Paul. London. and analysts of the current literature. or other Students will be expected also to cover a range of potential for explaining human behaviour In an appropriate procedures as approved. which do not applted setting. Specific issues such as development official documents and critical reviews of research. SOWE142 POLITICS 8< THE require Intervention with human subjects. within peer groups. the family. and the community ELECTIVE SUBJECfS: WELFARE STATE lOCp Choice of topic will be made In consultation with will be explored. Lecturer Arthur McCulloch academic statT within the Department. SOWEll 1 ECONOMIC SYSTEMS AND Recommended Reoding SOCIAL WELFARE lOcp Prerequisite Nil SOWE309 SOCIAL WELFARE ANALYSIS Bukatko. D .• & Dachler. H. 1992. Child Development HOUTS Three teaching hours per week AND INQUIRY m lOcp Lecturer Greg Heys A Topical Approoch. Houghton Mifflin Company. London. Lecturers George Morgan and Arthur McCulloch Prerequisite Nil Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite SOWE209 HOUTS Three teaching hours per week Papalia. D .• & Olds. S. 1991. Gethlng. L. & Hatchard. Assessment Continuous D. Australian Editors. UJe Span Development, Offered Semester I Content HOUTS Four teaching hours per week McGraw-Hm. Australia. Assessment Progressive assessment through a Thts subject has the aim of providing a sound Offered Semester 1 Ross. L. & Nisbett. R 1991. The Person and The variety of instruments; Including tutOrial exercises. grounding tn the theory and practice of Australian Assessment Continuous Situation, McGraw-Hill. Sydney. essays and exams. politics. as well as an appreciation of the nature and Content extent of political processes In everyday Itfe. Topics Content SOWE141 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 8< Completing the trlad of subjects· SOWEI09 and COMMUNITY SERVICES lOcp covered Include Australian political Institutions. the This module Introduces basic economic concepts to role of parties. media and Interest groups. the role of SOWE209 - SOWE309 progresses students· examine their Impact on social policy and social Lecturer George Morgan unrJerstanding of modes of analysIs and inquiry by political theory. arenas of political action; the administration. Inter-governmental financial policy Prerequisite Nil Critically examining social research conducted by constitution strategies for political action; and welfare and the effect ofeconomics on specific areas of social HOUTS Three hours teaching per week polttlcs. Government agencies. commissioners. social policy is also examined. The objective is to develop· researchers and practitioners. The focus of the a critical understanding of current social policy. Offered Semester 1 Texts subject Is on research as a mode of welfare practice. Assessment Continuous Aitken. D. 1977. StabUily and Change inAustralian Po/Ules. ANU. Faculty of _:I"".'.J. Section Flva Welfare Studl•• Faculty of Section Five Welfare Studies Subject Descriptions Social Science Subject Descriptions Soclll Sclln.. (.~'";'.' i~:' •• ":: ..

\ () '- ". ~I' "'-'.' i. \ ' " SOWE243 POWER AND CONTROL IN emph,.slstng the theoretical foundations of these Altken. D. & Jinks. B. 1980. Australian PolUIca! Turner. F. (ed.) 1986. Social Casework 7reatment. THE WELFARE STATE basic concepts are developed. and spectfic Institutions. Pitman. New York Free Press. mOdeiS. Lecturers Arthur McCulloch . ~techntques and procedures are examined, and Kelly. P. 1976. 1lle Dismlssa~ Angus & Robertson. SOWE2I7 COMMUNITY ADMINISTRATION: developed in experientlallearning situations. Melbourne. Prerequisites SOWE 101 & SOWE 102 or eqUivalent DEVELOPING PROGRAMMES lit The applied focus of this Advanced Methods strand Pollard. D. 1989. GIve and TakeThe Losing ORGANISATIONS IOep Hours Three teaching hours per week Is informed by the key concepts, therapeutic Partnership in Aboriginal Poverty, Hale and Lecturers Arthur McCulloch & Greg Heys Offered Semester 1 processes, techniques and procedures drawn from lremonger. PrerequisUes SOWE 101 & SOWE 102 or eqUivalent Assessment Continuous the psychodynamic. existential. person -centred. and Wtlenskl. P. 1981. Publfc Power and Publfc gestalt approaches to casework and groupwork. Hours Three teaching hours per week Content Administration. Hale and Iremonger. Texts Offered Semester 2 It remains commonplace In analysis of soetal welfare SOWE2I4 ADVANCED CASEWORK lit and social policy to work with an explanatory logtc Corey. G. 1986. Theory and Practice in CounseUlng Assessment Continuous GROUPWORK PROCESSES lit which reUes heavily on a social control paradigm. and Psychotherapy. Brooks/Cole Publishing PROCEDURES (1) IOep Content This subject surveys contemporary debates about Company. Monterey. California. Lecturer Alex Beveridge The subject aims to provide students with an the exercise of power and control through the Connler. W. & Connler. S.L. 1991. Intervtewlng arrangements of welfare provision and assesses the Strateglesjor Helpers. Brooks/Cole. California. Prerequisite SOWEI01 & SOWEI02 or equivalent advanced understanding of those practice skills involved in programme planning, programme validity of social control theories as applied to an lvey. A .. Bradford-Ivey. M.. Simek-Downing. 1987. Hours Three hours teaching per week evaluation. and organisational development in the analysis of welfare. It will begtn with a review ofthe Counselling and Psychotherapy Integrating SIdlls. Offered Semester 1 welfare sector. Topicscoveredtnc1udeagencyftnance; debates between pluralism. eUtism and class analysis Theory and Practice. Prentice Hall. New Jersey. that have surrounded the 'conununltypower' debates Assessment Continuous legal responslbtlttles of employers; sta/llng - EEO. Lakin. M. 1988. Ethfca/Issues in the Psychotherapies. and Cover topics that include the 'essential OH&S. Dlsabtltty Discrimination legtslation; staff Oxford University Press, Oxford. Content management and development; conflict resolution. contestabUtty' of key concepts such as JX>wer. control. BuUding on the foundation established In Casework decision making; community data analysis. planning authority. interests. coercion and force; contending Marram Van Servellan. G. 1984. Group and Family and Groupwork (Methods 2) the module examines a and programme management. approaches to social explanation (functional, causal. Therapy. Toronto, C.V. Mosby. number of individual and groupwork approaches. Text and Intentional); and the agency structure debate. Nelson-Jones. R. 1984. Personal ResponsibUity Basic concepts are developed, and specific techniques Recommended Readings CounseUing and Therapy. An Integrative Approach. and procedures are examined, and developed in Jackson. A.C .. & Donovan. F .. Managing Human Harper & Row. London. experiential learning situations. Service Organisations. Prentice Hall. Sydney. Meutzelfeldt. M. (ed) 1992. Soctety Slate andPolftfcs in Australia. Turner. F. (ed.) 1986. Social Casework Treatment, The models presented in thts Advanced Methods SOWE242 YOUTH STUDIES IOep New York Free Press. Lukes. S. 1986. Power. strand fittnto 3 categories: psychodynamic approach; Lecturers Christopher Dole experiential and relationshlp,oriented approaches; Connolly. W. 1983. 1lle Terms ojPolitical /Jisrourse. SOWE34I HUMAN RIGHTS. ADVOCACY Prerequisite Nil AND SOCIAL CHANGE lOep cognitive.behavioural models. Gray. I. Power in Place. Offered Semester 2 Lecturer George Morgan and Arthur McCulloch Assessment will include the presentation of a serles Watts. R. 1988. 1lle Foundations oj the National of verbatims, and process recordings supported by Hours Three hours teaching per week Welfare State. Prerequisite Nil a video presentation. Assessment Continuous Clegg. S. 1989. Frwneworks ojPower. Hours Four hours teaching per week Texts Content Offered Semester 1 SOWE314 ADVANCED CASEWORK lit Corey. G. 1986. 1lleory and Practice in Counselling Thlselectlve provides an introduction to the historical Assessment Continuous and Psychotherapy. Brooks/Cole Publishing GROUPWORK PROCESSES development and current provision ofyou th services lit PROCEDURES (2) lOep Content Company, Monterey, California. tn Australia. as well as outltning the basic Lecturer Alex Beverldge This subject will explore the Inter·relationshlp Connler. W.H. & Connler. L.S. 1991. Intervtewlng philosophies and models of youth work Infonnlng between human rights. community advocacy and Strategtesjor Helpers. Brooks/Cole. California. such services. Provision Is made for students to Prerequisite SOWEI01 and SOWEI02 or equivalent social change. It will examtne processes of change develop practical skills in design and Implementation Hours Three hours teaching per week lvey. A.. Bradford-lvey. M.. Simek-Downing. 1987. as they affect the welfare context and social justice. Counselling and Psychotherapy Integrating Skills. of programs for youth in a varletyof service settings. Offered Semester 2 The effectiveness of community advocacy strategies Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall. New Jersey. The legal. class. race and gender aspects of program Implementation are discussed. Assessment Continuous and how these influence structures. organisations Lakin. M. 1988. Ethfca/Issues in the Psychotherapies. Content and systems. including the legal system. will be Oxford University Press. Oxford. Texts Building on the foundation established in Casework analysed and assessed. The emphaSiS will be on No set texts. Readings to be advised. Nelson-Jones. R. 1984. Personal ResponsibUtty and Groupwork Methods 2 the module examines a practicalities and on the skills of being an activist Counselling and 1llerapy. An Integrative Approach. number of applied approaches. Instead of and advocate. At the same time the boundaries and Harper & Row. London. Faculty of Secdon Flv. Social Welfar. Social Science Subject Descriptions

limitations of direct and Indirect action will be McLoughlin. B. & Huxley. M. 1986. UrbanPlann/ng considered. The subject alms to promote a critical In AusfTalta CrUkal ReadingS. Longman Cheshire. understandtng which will allow students to Melbourne. appreciate and deal with agencies of social control and at the same time be more effective advocates of SOWE401 WELFARE STUDIES social change. HONOURS ~p Text Tull time students will enrol in SOWE40 I. Part time students will enrol In S0WE4021n the first year and Baldry. E. & Vinson. T. (eds) 1991. Actions Speak: S0WE403 in the second yar. Strategies and Lessons from Australian Socfal and Content Community Action. Longman Cheshire. Melbourne. HonolD'8 Research Seminar - involves a minor Fields. F. 1986. Poverty andPoIltfcs: The Inside Story research project by the students in an approved area oj the CPAG Campaign In the 1970·s. Heinemann. London. ofstudy separate but complimentruy to the Research TheSis. Study may include a critical review of Slipman. S. 1982. Helping Ourselves io Power. literature, development of new methodologies or Pergaman Press. theories. or Original research. Choice of topic will be S0WE342 REGIONAL SOCIAL POLICY made In consultation with academic staff within the ap~mG l~p Department of Social Welfare. Lecturer Greg Heys & Arthur McCulloch Method. of Inquiry Into Welfare Studies - Students will examine aspects of topics such as Prerequisite SOWEI12 or eqUivalent scientific methods In the social sciences. ethics of Hours Three hours teaching per week social inquiry. methodologies: designs. strategies. Offered Semester 1 techniques. the nature of sociological explanations. and critical inquiry. analysts and evaluation in Assessment Continuous assessment through social sciences. workshops on techniques plus wrttten papers and a project. Elective Subjects (Honours) - requires the student to select topics for study from a provided list within Content the Department. The exact topics offered may vary This module through a regional focus critiques fromyear to year depending on staff availability. current social planning practice and techniques. It Attendance and participation Is compulsory and describes and critiques current regional social policy may be assessed by essay. examination. oral In the context of theortes of the State. Students presentation or a combination.. select a specific project to develop social planning HonolD'S Thesis - consists of the development. techniques regional policy practice. conduct analysis where appropriate and reporting Texts of a piece of research based on an original problem Cooke. P. 1983. Theories oj Planning and Spatial In the students chosen area of specialisation. Development. Hutchinson. London. Suggested length Is 15.000-20.000 words. Davis. C. & al 1989. Public Policy In Australfa. Allen & Unwin. Sydney. Franzway. S. & a11989. StaklngA ClalmFemfntsm. Bureaucracy and the State. Allen & Unwin. Sydney. Troy. P. (ed.) 1981.AJustSoclety? EssaysonEquity In Australia, Allen & Unwin. Sydney. Conroy. J. (ed) 1987. AustraHan Regional Developments An Evaluation oJLocaI Area Economic Strategy Studies. AGPS. Canberra.